STANDARDS OF THE TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION EIGHTH EDITION TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC. 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, New York 10591 Richard C. Byrne, Secretary www.tema.orgNO WARRANTY. EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED ‘The Standards herein ae recommended by The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. to assist users, engineers and designers who specify, design and install tubular exchangers. These standards are based upon sound engineering principies, research and field experience in the manufacture, design, installation and use of tubular exchangers. These standards may be subject to revision as further investigation or experience may show is necessary or desirable. Nothing herein shall constitute a warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, and warranty responsibilty of any kind is expressly denied, © Copyright 1968, 1970, 1972, 1974, 1978, 1986, 1987. 1988, 1999 Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. TEMA is a trademark of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. This document may not be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated: mocified or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form in whole or in part, without prior written consent of the ‘Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVEDCONTRIBUTING MEMBERS ‘TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC. Comprising Manufacturers of Various Types of Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Equipment API Heat Transfer, Inc. ..2777 Walden Avenue Buffalo, NY 14225 8888 West 21st Street ‘Sand Springs, OK 74063, Energy Exchanger Company : ea ms 1844,N. Garnett Road Tulsa, OK 74116 --9501 West 11th Street Houston, TX 7008-60011, Fabsco Shell and Tube, LLC.rnnnnnnn P.O. Box 988, ‘Sapulpa, OK 74066 Cust-0-Fab, Inc. Engineers and Fabricators Company... Graham Corporation... : .20 Florence Avenue Batavia, NY 14020 Heat Transfer Equipment Co... .--P.O. Box 580638 Tulsa, OK 74158 Hughes-Anderson Heat Exchangers, Inc. 1001 N. Fulton Avenue Tulsa, OK 74115 ITT Standard, ITT Fluid Technology Corporation... P.O. Box 1102 Butfalo, NY 14227 Joseph Oat Corporation .nnnunmemnnne .. 2500 Broadway famden, NJ 08104 1675 Rahway Avenue Union, NJ 07083 Manning and Lewis Engineering Company. Nooter Corporation. : P.O. Box 451 ‘St Louis, MO 63166 ‘Ohmstede, In {825 North Main Street Beaumont, TX 77701 .824 Meadowbrook Road Robbinsville, NJ 08691 RAS Process Equipment, Inc... ‘Southern Heat Exchanger Corporation. sss P.O, BOX 1850 ‘Tuscaloosa, AL 35403 Struthers Industries, Inc. 1500 34th Street Guifport, MS 39501 Wiegmann and Rose eee P.O. Box 4187 Subsidiary of Xchanger Mig. Corp. Gakiand, CA 94614 Yuba Heat Transfer ... P.O. Box 3158 ‘A Division of Connell Limited Partnership eee eee rea OKi74101. itTECHNICAL COMMITTEE OF THE ‘TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION Ken O'ConnOF en .-API Heat Transfer, Inc. Doug Wethane...snnnnne eee aes Gilet O-Fab, ino Kon Fultz. civics ana snmunnnnnnnnnnergy Exchanger Company Cris Smelley.... o Engineers and Fabricators Company Philip Marks. aan egeueae Graham Corporation Monte Davis. Heat Transfer Equipment Company dim Harrison. .. Hughes-Anderson Heat Exchangers, Inc. Nick Tranquil... t Seago ITT Standard Michael Holtz, Joseph Oat Corporation Ted Rapczynski... Se _».Manning and Lewis Engineering Co. Steve Meierotto.... Nooter Corporation Michael Tracy. Ohmstede, Inc. Todd Allen. snnnnennninnsnnvnne Uther Heat Exchanger Corp. Dan Stenman Gay L. Bem nesses Struthers Industries, Inc. Jack E. Logan ..Wiegmann and Rose ‘Subsidiary of Xchanger Mfg. Corp. Larry Brumbaugh... Yuba Heat Transfer Connell Limited PartnershipPREFACE Eighth Edition - 1999 The Eighth Edition of the TEMA Standards was prepared by the Technical Committee of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association. A compilation of previously proven information, along with new additions to the Flow Induced Vibration, Flexible Shell Elements and Tubesheet Design sections is presented for your practical use. Design methods for Floating Head Backing Devices have also been added and the scope has been changed to accommodate a larger range of sizes and pressures. Metric units and tables have been included wherever possible. Suggested methods have been included for support and lifting lug design in the RGP section. This edition of the TEMA Standards is dedicated to the memory of Wayne Schaefer of the Nooter Corporation for his years of dedicated service to the TEMA Technical Committee. The Editor also wishes to acknowledge the contributions to the Eighth Edition by the following past members of the Technical Committee: Victor J. Stachura, Joseph H. Kissel, Robert C. Moscicki and Harry W. Saulz. Jim Harrison EDITORCONTENTS ‘Symbol & Section Paragraph MEMBERSHIP LIST.. nme eee eeomenees TECHNICAL COMMITTEE saeeeees sent v PREFACE : aaa eerie ve NOTES TO USERS... nsec : Seen em omre | 10N NOMENCLATURE 1 Size Numbering and Type Designation—Recommended Practice... 1 2 Nomenclature of Heat Exchanger Components .....n ied 3 2 oF FABRICATION TOLERANCES. 1 External Dimensions, Nozzle and Support Locations. 6 2 Recommended Fabrication Tolerances. 7 3 Tubesheets, Partitions, Covers, and Flanges a 4 Flange Face Imperfections... 9 3G GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION 1 ‘Shop Operation. wt 13 2 Inspection oon 13 3 Nameplates 7 mi ses - 13 4 Drawings and ASME Code Data Reports. 13 5 Guarantees. 14 6 Preparation of Heat Exchangers for Shipment seennienennnnnnenne 1S 7 General Construction Features of TEMA Standard Heat Exchangers. 15 aoe INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE 1 Performance of Heat ExchaNgOFS wnsennmnnvnnnnnn Cental 2 Installation of Heat Exchangers so. snes a 17 3 Operation of Heat Exchangers. 18 4 Maintenance of Heat Exchangers 19 5 CB MECHANICAL STANDARD TEMA CLASS RCB HEAT EXCHANGERS, 1 Scope and General Requirements nnn ee 23 2 Tubes 27 3 Shells and Shell Covers 20 4 Baffles and Support Plates. : ae eee 5 Floating End Construction os 38 6 GASKEES een semen vn enn 7 Tubesheets. senutenns seven on AB 8 Flexible Shell Elements son 6 8 Channels, Covers, and Bonnets... : es 88 10 Nozzles... 91 11 End Flanges and Boing, 93 ev FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION 1 ‘Scope and General oe see cerned 2 Vibration Damage Patterns... Speen 95; 3 Failure Regions, sonnel 95, 4 Dimensionless Numbers. isn 96 5 Natural Frequency . ses 7 6 ‘Axial Tube Stress. ester 104 7 Effective Tube Mass... 104 8 Damping 107 viCONTENTS ‘Symbol & Section Paragraph 6v FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION (continued) 9 Shell Side Velocity Distribution. js eo 108 10 Estimate of Crtical Flow Velocity Se ne 11 Vibration Amplitude... 114 12 Acoustic Vibration 116 13 Design Considerations. 124 14 Selected References... 122 Tee ‘THERMAL RELATIONS. 1 ‘Scope and Basic Relations. ae nce 124 2 Fouling... : i 125 3 Fluid Temperature Relations, ee 126 4 Mean Metal Temperatures of Shell and Tubes. 128 8 P PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS 1 Fluid Density 180 2 Specific Heat. : 180 3 Heat Content of Petroleum Fractions 151 4 Thermal Conductivity. so ein 5. Viscosity ee : 181 6 Cfitical Properties eee eee eer! 7 Properties of Gas and Vapor Mixtures. 182 8 Selected References. 183 8D GENERAL INFORMATION (See detailed Table of Contents) .ncsnnmnnnnnnninisnnsnnnnnnnnnn 183 40 AGP RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE G-7.11__ Horizontal Vessel Support... 253 G-7.12 Vertical Vessel Supports eee 267 G72 Lifting Lugs a 269 G-7.3 Wind and Seismic Design cae 273 ROB-2 Plugging Tubes in Tube Bundle : 273 ROB-4 Entrance and Exit Areas. : se : 278 RCB-6 Gaskets. 279 RCB-7 —Tubeshests 278 FCB-98 Channels, Covers, and Bonnets. 280 RCB-10 Nozzles. 281 RCB-11 End Flanges and Boating. 281 T2 Fouling 283 INDEX. 291 vilNOTES TO USERS OF ‘THE TEMA STANDARDS Three classes of Mechanical Standards, R,C and B, reflecting acceptable designs for various service applications are presented, The user should refer to the definition of each class and choose the one that best fis the spectfic need Corresponding subject matter in the three Mechanical Standards is covered by paragraphs identically numbered ‘except for the prefix letter. Paragraph numbers preceded by RCB indicates that all three classes are identical. Any reference to a specific paragraph must be preceded by the class designation. ‘The Recommended Good Practice section has been prepared to assist the designer in areas outside the scope of the basic Standards. Paragraphs in the Standards having additional information in the RGP section are marked with an asterisk (*). The reference paragraph in the RGP section has the identical paragraph number, but with an "AGP" prefix, Itis the intention of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association that this edition of its Standards may be used beginning with the date of issuance, and that its requirements supersede those of the previous edition six months from such date of issuance, except for heat exchangers contracted for prior to the end of the six month period. For this purpose the date of issuance is June 1, 1999, Questions on interpretation of the TEMA Standards should be formally addressed to the Secretary at TEMA 25 North Broadway, Tarrytown, NY 10591. Questions requiring development of new or revised technical information will only be answered through an addendum or a new edition of the Standards. Upon agreement between purchaser and fabricator, exceptions TEMA requifements are acceptable. An exchanger may stil be considered as meeting TEMA requirements as long as the exception is documented. vilHEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE SECTION 1 N-1 SIZE NUMBERING AND TYPE DESIGNATION--RECOMMENDED PRACTICE It is recommended that heat exchanger size and type be designated by numbers and letters as described below No.4 SIZE Sizes of shells (and tube bundles) shall be designated by numbers describing shell (and tube bundle) diameters and tube lengths, as follows: N-1.11 NOMINAL DIAMETER The nominal diameter shall be the inside diameter of the shell in inches (mm), rounded off to the nearest integer. For kettle reboilers the nominal diameter shall be the port diameter followed by the shell diameter, each rounded off to the nearest integer. N-1.12 NOMINAL LENGTH ‘The nominal length shall be the tube length in inches (mm). Tube length for straight tubes shall be taken as the actual overall length. For U-tubes the length shall be taken as the approximate straight length from end of tube to bend tangent N-1.2 TYPE Type designation shall be by letters describing stationary head, shell (omitted for bundles only), and rear head, in that order, as indicated in Figure N-1.2, N-1.3 TYPICAL EXAMPLES N-1.31 Split-ring floating head exchanger with removable channel and cover, single pass shel, 234 [ees mm) inside diameter with tubes 16'(4877 mm) long. SIZE 23-192 (631-4877) TYPE N-1.32 U-tube exchanger with bonnet type stationary head, split flow shell, 19° (483 mm) inside diameter with tubes 7'(2134 mm) straight length. SIZE 19-84 (483-2134) TYPE BGU. N-1.33 Pull-through floating head kettle type reboiler having stationary head integral with tubesheet, 23" (684 mm) port diameter and 37° (940 mm) inside shell diameter with tubes 16'(4877 mm} long. SIZE 23/37-192 (584/940 - 4877) TYPE CKT. Ne1.34 Fixed tubesheet exchanger with removable channel and cover, bonnet type rear head, two pass shel 9-1/8. (B41 mm) inside diameter with tubes 8 (2438 mm) long, SIZE 39-96 (841-2498) TYPE AFM. N-1.35 Fixed tubesheet exchanger having stationary and rear heads integral with tubesheets, single pass shell, 17" (432 mm) inside diameter with tubes 16 (4877 mm) long. SIZE 17-192 (432-4877) TYPE NEN. N-1.4 SPECIAL DESIGNS ‘Special designs are not covered and may be described as best suits the manufacturer. For example, a single tube pass, fixed tubesheet exchanger with conical heads may be described as “TYPE BEM wih Gonical Heads", A pul through fleeting head exchanger with an integral shel cover may be described as "TYPE AET with Integral Shell Cover’. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 1SECTION 1 HEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE FIGURE N-1.2 ‘FRONT ENO ie HEAR ENO STATIONARY HEAD TYPES ‘omma Fres ‘HEAD TYPES: ae ae re ' [|| 1 al ior I cee ONE PASS sett une RERERY wean HE || =e S le xe yunesnest "wo Pass. suet. ace O SYAMONT WITH LONGITUDINAL BAFFLE Ciel ad = iy B G q| SS frxeo_ruaesHer ce NE STATONAIY HEAD ONNET INTEGRAL COVER! = me (=i i 4 JOUrSIDE PACKED ROATING HEAD © frogs ema | | oun seit ow ‘anne, T 45 — j } FLOATING HEAD iealeesscaedeall WITH BACKING DEVICE, ¢ owing Row o a \ N G L PULL THROUGH FLOATING HEAD K L Ft SEES TER PLS r 5 ) seme nee sou |] U — rune eunots o x | mel A} | SSD SPECIAL HIGH PRESSURE CLOSURE cross now PRERALLY See 2 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE SECTION 1 N-2 NOMENCLATURE OF HEAT EXCHANGER COMPONENTS: For the purpose of establishing standard terminology, Figure N-2 illustrates various types of heat exchangers. Typical parts and connections, for ilustrative purposes only, are numbered for identifi Table N-2. TABLE N-2 1. Stationary Head-Channel 21. Floating Head Cover-External 2, Stationary Head-Bonnet 22, Floating Tubesheet Skirt 3, Stationary Head Flange-Channel or Bonnet 23. Packing Box 4, Channel Cover 24, Packing 5. Stationary Head Nozzle 25. Packing Gland 6. Stationary Tubesheet 26. Lantern Ring 7. Tubes 27, Tierods and Spacers 8. Shell 28. Transverse Battles or Support Plates 9. Shell Cover 29. Impingement Piate 10. Shell Flange-Stationary Head End 30. Longitudinal Baffle 411, Shell Flange-Rear Head End 31. Pass Partition 42. Shell Nozzle 32. Vent Connection 49, Shell Cover Flange 33. Drain Connection 44, Expansion Joint 34. Instrument Connection 15. Floating Tubesheet 35. Support Saddle 16. Floating Head Cover 36. Lifting Lu 17. Floating Head Cover Flange 37. Support Bracket 18. Floating Head Backing Device 38 Weir 49. Split Shear Ring 39, Liquid Level Connection 20. Slip-on Backing Flange 40. Floating Head Suppor FIGURE N-2 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Associ:SECTION 1 HEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE FIGURE N-2 (continued) a @ ® @ 4 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE SECTION 1 FIGURE N-2 (continued) OOOH OO @O@O@HO® @ Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 2 HEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES F-1 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS, NOZZLE AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS. Standard tolerances for process flow nozzles and support locations and projections are shown in Figure F-1. Dimensions in () are millimeters. FIGURE F-1 #1/2°(12.7) £1/4°(6.4) #1/4°(6.4) a 21/4°(64) £1/4"(64) #1/4(64)__ #1/4°(6.4) => ‘ #1/4(64) | _#1/8°(3.2) NOMINAL NOZZLE Size [|G MAX | 24" INCLUSNE i7ie"(1.6) = 6°12" INCLUSIVE, 3/32"(2.4) =| 14°—36" INCLUSNE, 3/1648) = ‘OVER 36” 174°(6.4) TOTES This tobe oppiza a ores comering to Rema lng ony are #1/2"(12.7) £1/4"(6.4) a STACKED EXCHANGERS x 41°(0.017 RAD) 3/16"(4.8) MAX ALLOWABLE # CENTERUNE J \\\ TRUE ROTATION, LF CENTERLINE, CONNECTION NOZZLE ALIGNMENT AND SUPPORT ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE ON NOZZLE FACES TOLERANCES ‘AT BOLT CIRCLE 6 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES SECTION 2 F-2 RECOMMENDED FABRICATION TOLERANCES Fabrication tolerances normally required to maintain process flow nozzle and support locations are shown in Figure F-2. These tolerances may be adjusted as necessary to meet the tolerances shown in Figure F-1 Dimensions in () are millimeters. FIGURE F-2 1/464) 41/832), ee | ! é il oe 4 —_— (3. 2), £78 62) £1/8"(3.2) £1/8"(3.2) | +1/8" Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 7SECTION 2 HEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES, F-3 TUBESHEETS, PARTITIONS, COVERS AND FLANGES The standard clearances and tolerances applying to tubesheets, partitions, covers and flanges are shown in Figure F-3. Dimensions in (are milimeters. au ‘TONGUE ANI 8 FIGURE F-3 T ms 41/8132) My Ptr SA Dy=0, 41/832) 3 to 8 A temo 3 2 STANDARD CONFINED JOINT CONSTRUCTION A rsa! 1 Le ie 0. Bett EET ys oy i i ae V ‘STANDARD UNCONFINED PLAIN FACE JOINT CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES 4/6 ca aia (208) EV AGA 1. SECTION 2 1S NOT INTENDED TO PROT ‘UMWCHINED TUBESHEET FACES AND FLAT (COVER FACES. THEREFORE NO PLUS TOLERANCE 1S SHOWN OW RA 2. NEGATIVE TOLERANCES SHALL NOT BE CCONSTRUCD TO MEAN THAT FAA. DDMENSIONS CAN BE LESS THAN THAT REQURED BY DESGN CALCULATINS. FOR PERIPHERAL GASKETS, “CONFWNED® MEANS “CONFINED ON THE 0D" DEIALS ARE TYPCAL AND 00 NOT PRECLUDE THE USE OF OTHER ETALS. ‘WHICH ARE FUNCTIONALLY EQUNALENT. 5: FOR UMTS OME Gt (524) T0100 (2242) DIAMETER, TOLERANCES, "D" AND "W" INCREASED TO 21/1641). ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES SECTION 2 FIGURE F-4 PERMISSIBLE IMPERFECTIONS IN FLANGE FACING FINISH. FOR RAISED FACE AND LARGE MALE AND FEMALE FLANGES 1.2 NPs laximurn Radial Projection of Maximum Depth and Radial Projection of Imperoctions Which ve No Deeper Than | Imperfections Which Ave Deeper Than the the Bettom ofthe Serrations, nro) ‘Bottom of te Sovtatone in (rm) 1/2 ys @3 1/16 (16) aya ie (32) 1/18 (16) 4 1/8 (32) 1/16 (18) 14/4 1/8 32 4/18 (1.6) 14/2 178 (32) 1/16 (1.6) 2 1/8 G2) 4/16 (1.6) 24/2 1/8 (32) 4/16 (1.6) 3 3/16 (48) 1/16 (16) 34/2 4/4 (64) 4/8 (3.2) 4 1/4 64) 1/8 (82) 5 1/4 6a) 1/8 (3.2 8 vi 68 Vs 83 8 5/16 (7.9) 1/8 (3.2) to 5/16 (79) 3/16 (48 12 5/16 (79) 3/16 (48) 14 5/16 (79) 3/16 (4.8) 16 3/8 fe Sie (3 18 4/2 (12.7) 4/4 (4) 20 1/2 (12: 1/4 (64) 24 1/2 (127) 4/4 (6.4) NOTES: (1) Imperfections must be separated by at least four times the permissible radial projection. (2) Protrusions above the serrations are not permitted, FLANGE PERIPHERY SERRATED (RAISED) FACE t PIPE Bore V ‘Sketch showing Radial Projected Length (RPL) serrated gasket face damage Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 910. 1" 12, 13. 14. 16. 16. 17. 18. 19. GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION 3 DEFINITIONS Baffie is a device to direct the shell side fluid across the tubes for optimum heat transfer. Baffle an ft Plate Tube Hol nce Is the diametral difference between the nominal tube OD and ‘the nominal tube hole diameter in the baffle or support plate. Consequential Damages are indirect liabilities lying outside the heat exchanger manufacturer's stated equipment warranty obligations. Double Tubesheet Construction is a type of construction in which two (2) spaced tubesheets or equivalent are employed in lieu of the single tubesheet at one or both ends of the heat exchanger. Effective Shell and Tube Side Design Pressures are the resultant load values expressed as uniform pressures used in the determination of tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet heat exchangers and are functions of the shell side design pressure, the tube side design pressure, the equivalent differential expansion pressure and the equivalent bolting pressure. Equivalent Bolting Pressure is the pressure equivalent resulting from the effects of bolting loads imposed on {ubesheets ina tied tubesheet heat exchanger when the tuBeshoets are Srionded Tor boling ae Hanged connections. Equivalent Differential Expansion Pressure is the pressure equivalent resulting from the effect of tubesheet loadings ina fixed tubesheet heat exchanger imposed by the restraint of differential thermal expansion between shell and tubes. Expanded Tube Joint is the tube-to-tubesheet joint achieved by mechanical or explosive expansion of the tube into the tube hole in the tubesheet. Expansion Joint “J" Factor is the ratio of the spring rate of the expansion joint to the sum of the axial spring rate of the shell and the spring rate of the expansion joint Flange Load Concentration Factors are factors used to compensate for the uneven application of bolting moments due to large bolt spacing. Minimum: it fle an ings are design limitations for the spacing of baffles to provide for mechanical integrity and thermal and hydraulic effectiveness of the bundle. The possibilty for induced vibration has not been considered in establishing these values. ‘Normal Operating Conditions of a shell and tube heat exchanger are the thermal and hydraulic performance requirements generally specified for sizing the heat exchanger. Pulsating Fluid Conditions are conditions of flow generally characterized by rapid fluctuations in pressure and flow rate resulting from sources outside of the heat exchanger. Seismic Loadings are forces and moments resulting in induced stresses on any member of a heat exchanger due to pulse mode or complex waveform accelerations to the heat exchanger, such as those resulting from earthquakes. hell Metal Temperatures are the average metal temperatures through the shell and tube thicknesses integrated over the length of the heat exchanger for a given steady state operating condition, ‘Shut-Down Conditions are the conditions of operation which exist from the time of steady state operating Conditions fo the time that flow of both process streams has ceased. ‘Start-Up Conditions are the congitions of operation which exist from the time that flow of either or both process. streams is initiated to the time that steady state operating conditions are achieved is a device to support the bundle or to reduce unsupported tube span without consideration for heat transfer. ‘Tubesheet Ligament is the shortest distance between edge of adjacent tube holes in the tube pattern. Welded Tube Joint is a tube-to-tubesheet joint where the tube is welded to the tubesheet. 10 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION 3 FIGURE G-5.2 HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATION SHEET 1 TNs, 2Jeustomer everenso Ne, 3)adaress Proposal No. “Pint Location Date Fa 5 [Service of Uni Rom We ofsize Gaivery Connected Paraicl Safes 7 [oun (Grae FE Shel Sur Shell (GUSTER) Sa Ft q PERFORMANCE OF ONE UNIT [Faia Aibeation Shai Sige Tubs Sie 10[Fiula Name 11a unt Tor 12] Vapor {nv 13] id 14 Steam: +5{__ Water s6{_—Noncondansatia 17 [Temperature (vOut 18 [Specie Gravity 19] ecosty, Ligue 20)lelecular Weigh, Vapor 21[lotecular Weigh, Nencondonsabie 22) Specie Heat Bu 23) Thermal Conduct BEATA Sa FT 2af Latent Heat Bui @ 25[iniot Pressure Pai 25] veicty, Fir See 27 [Pressure Drop, Alow ae i n 28] Fouling Resistance (ain) TrsaF FT Bu 20(eat exchanged Bau HEMT (Corrected) | 120] Transfer Rate, Serves Clear Bar Hr Sq AF | a ‘CONSTRUCTION OF ONE SHELL ‘esis [Buna Nozzle Orientation) 2 ‘Shell Sie 133 Dasign7 Test Pressre Pai] r ‘34[Design Temp. Maxrhtin | r 35|fio, Passes per Shel +26[Corosion Alowance: wl ‘37 Connections [in 3s] size ow 30|_Ratng _[[ntermodiate 40| Tube No. ‘OD Ta TAY PEPER pew eoewoe 4i[Tabe Ty Taira 2)shet i [Shot Cover nies) _—Remov) «9|Channel or Soanat [Channel Cover ‘4[Tuboshest Sati [Tubesheot lotr 45|Foating Head Cover [impingement Protector 46 [Bates Cross, “uk (Damas) ‘Spacing cle Tat ‘Baie Lon ‘Seal Type 48| Supports Tube 7 +9) Bypass Seal Aran Taber Tubeshoat Jan 50[Expansion Jon Tye 51 vet Nozal Bundle Ean Banaie Et 52|Gaskote-Shol Side Tube Side 53]Foating Head 54)Goge Requirements TEWA Cas, s5|Weight Shel Bundle 56|Remarke a7 9 9 6 ai Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association WSECTION 3 GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION FIGURE G-5.2M HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATION SHEET 1 ee. 2) customer Reference No. Econ Proposal Ne. «{[Piant Location Date ‘| Senos of unt Tom We ols. coven ‘Connected 7 | Suri reese ‘Sqm, Shal/UAT Surishell GaeTET al PERFORMANCE OF ONE UNIT 9|Fiaa Aocation Shall 86 10 [Ft Name 1] Fug Guanty Tear rr 12 Vapor Gniou 13[ teu 14 Sioa +5[—Water 46|—Noncondanaabie 17 [Fomperature (vu), 18 |Spectie Gr 19 [viccosty, uqud ol 20 [Molecular Weight, Vapor 2 [Movecular Weight, Neneondensable 22|Spectie Heat Ta 23| Thermal Conduct Wine 2a[Latent Heat we 25|inlet Pressure Healers) 26|vet rafsee 27 [Pressure Dap, Alon TGals Wal T 28|Fouing Resistance Win) Sqn SW] 28|Heat Exchanged WiMTD orected) 30[Transfor Rat, Sonica Clean Wem ai ‘CONSTRUCTION OF ONE SHELL ‘Saich GundieMNazwe Oentation 32 ‘Shall Sie. Tube Sie, 139 | Design 7 Test Pressure Wa Z 7 '34] Design Temp, Main L r '35|No, Passes por Shot '36|Contosion Alowance 37|Connections [la 36] seee [Oa 30| Rating [intermediate +40[ Tube No, 00 __amTTK (NAG) Tamera Enpich __am S S wOS Sas 41[Tube Waiaal 42/het o oo. Tim [Shel cover Trig) Remon 43 | Channel or anne [Channel Cover ‘44|TubsshestStationar TubeshostFiatng 45| Floating Head Cover impingement Protection 46 Bates: Cross ‘iCut OiamvArea) 47 [Bartes-Long Seal Type 48 |Suppots-Tube Tee ‘49[ Bypass Seal Arangoment abot Tubacheet Fant 50] Expansion sont Type. 81 [pw anit Nozze Bundle Eanes Bungie Ea 52|Gaskete-Shet Side Tube Se '3[Floating Head 54] Code Requrererts TTEWA Cs ‘5|iWeight/ Shel ied wi Water Bundle '56|Remarks 57] al sal «| 6 12 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION 3 G-1 SHOP OPERATION The detailed methods of shop operation are left to the discretion of the manufacturer in conformity with these Standards. G-2 INSPECTION G-2.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION Inspection and testing of units will be provided by the manufacturer unless otherwise specified. The manufacturer shall carry out the inspections required by the ASME Code, and also inspections required by state and local codes when the purchaser specifies the plant location. G-2.2 PURCHASER'S INSPECTION ‘The purchaser shall have the right to make inspections during fabrication and to witness any tests when he has so requested. Advance notification shall be given as agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Inspection by the purchaser shall not relieve the manufacturer of his responsibilities. G-3 NAME PLATES Ge 1 MANUFACTURER'S NAME PLATE A suitable manufacturer's name plate of corrosion resistant material shall be permanently attached to the head end or the shell of each TEMA exchanger. Name plates for exchangers manufactured in accordance with Classes "R’ and “B' shall be austenitic (300 series) stainless. When insulation thickness is spected bythe purchaser, the name plate shal be attached to @ bracket welded tothe exchanger. G-3.11 NAME PLATE DATA In addition to all data required by the ASME Code, a name plate shall also include the following (if provided): User's equipment identification User's order number G-3.12 SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION The manufacturer shall supply supplemental information where it is pertinent to the operation oF testing of the exchanger. This would include information pertaining to alferential design and test pressure conditions, restrictions on operating conditions for fixed tubesheet type exchangers, or other restrictive conditions applicable to the design and/or operation of the Unit or its components. Such information can be noted on the name plate or on a supplemental plate attached to the exchanger at the name plate location. G-3.2 PURCHASERS NAME PLATE Purchaser's name plates, when used, are to be supplied by the purchaser and supplement rather than replace the manufacturer's name plate. G-3.3 TEMA REGISTRATION PLATE ‘The TEMA organization has adopted a voluntary registration system for TEMA members only. When ‘a heat exchanger is registered with TEMA, a unique number is assigned to the heat exchanger. A TEMA registration plate, showing this number, is affixed to the heat exchanger and the ASME Code data reports placed on file at the TEMA office. By referencing this registration number. a Coby of the ASME Code data report may be obtained by the purchaser from the TEMA office. G-4 DRAWINGS AND ASME CODE DATA REPORTS, G-4.1 DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL AND CHANGE ‘The manufacturer shall submit for purchaser's approval three (3) prints of an outline drawing showing nozzle sizes and locations, overall dimensions, supports and weight, Other drawings may be furnished as agreed upon by the purchaser and the manufacturer. It is anticipated that a reasonable number of minor drawing changes may be required at that time. Changes subsequent to receipt of approval may cause atonal expance chargeable to the purchaser Purchasat approval of drawings does not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for compliance with this Standard and applicable ASME Code requirements. The manufacturer shall not make any changes Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 13SECTION 3 GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION ‘on the approved drawings without express agreement of the purchaser. Shop detail drawings, while primarily for internal use by the fabricator, may be furnished to the purchaser upon request. When detail drawings are requested, they will only be supplied after outline drawings have been approved G-4.2 DRAWINGS FOR RECORD ‘After approval of drawings, the manufacturer shall furnish three (8) prints or, at his option, a transparency of all approved drawings. G-4.3 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO DRAWINGS ‘The drawings and the design indicated by them are to be considered the property of the manufacturer and are not fo be used or reproduced without his permission, except by the purchaser ‘or his own internal use. G-4.4 ASME CODE DATA REPORTS After completion of fabrication and inspection of ASME Code stamped exchangers, the manufacturer shall furnish three (8) copies of the ASME Manufacturer's Data Report G-5 GUARANTEES G-5.1 GENERAL ‘The specific terms of the guarantees should be agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser. Unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser, the following paragraphs in this section wil be applicable. G-5.2 PERFORMANCE The purchaser shall furnish the manufacturer with all information needed for clear understanding of performance requirements, including any special requirements. The manufacturer shall guarantee thermal performance and mechanical design of a heat exchanger, when operated at the design conditions specified by the purchaser in his order, or shown on the exchanger specification sheet fumished by the manutactuter (Figur G-5 2, G-6.2N), This quaantoe shall xtend fora period of twelve (12) months after shipping date. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibilty for ‘excessive fouling of the apparatus by material such as coke, sit, scale, or any foreign substance that, may be deposited. The thermal guarantee shall not be applicable to exchangers where the thermal performance rating was made by the purchaser. G-5.21 THERMAL PERFORMANCE TEST ‘performance test shall be made if itis established after operation that the performance of the exchanger is not satisfactory, provided the thermal performance rating was made by the manufacturer. Test conditions and procedures shall be selected by agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer to permit extrapolation of the test results to the specified design conditions. G-5.22 DEFECTIVE PARTS ‘The manufacturer shall repair or replace F.0.8. his plant any parts proven defective within the guarantee period. Finished materials and accessories purchased from other manufacturers, including tubes, are warranted only to the extent of the original manufacturer's warranty to the heat exchanger fabricator. G-5.3 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ‘The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any indirect or consequential damage. G-5.4 CORROSION AND VIBRATION ‘The manufacturer assumes no responsibil for deterioration of any part or parts of the equipment due to corrosion, erosion, flow induced tube vibration, or any other causes, regardless of when such deterioration occurs after leaving the manufacturer's premises, except as provided for in Paragraphs G-5.2 and G-5.22, 14 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION 3 G-5.5 REPLACEMENT AND SPARE PARTS ‘When replacement or spare tube bundles, shells, or other parts are purchased, the manufacturer is 10 guaranteo satisfactory fit of such parts only if he was the original manufacturer. Parts fabricated to drawings furnished by the purchaser shall be guaranteed to meet the dimensions and tolerances specified. G-6 PREPARATION OF HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR SHIPMENT G-6.1 CLEANING Internal and external surfaces are to be free from loose scale and other foreign material that is readily removable by hand or power brushing. G-6.2 DRAINING Witer, ll or other igus used fr cleaning or hydrostatic testing are to be drained from all units before shipment. This is not to imply that the units must be completely dry. G-6.3 FLANGE PROTECTION All exposed machined contact surfaces shall be coated with a removable rust preventative and protected against mechanical damage by suitable covers. G-6.4 THREADED CONNECTION PROTECTION All threaded connections are to be suitably plugged. G-6.5 DAMAGE PROTECTION ‘The exchanger and any spare parts are to be suitably protected to prevent damage during shipment. G-6.6 EXPANSION JOINT PROTECTION External thin walled expansion bellows shall be equipped with a protective cover which does not restrain movement. G-7 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION FEATURES OF TEMA STANDARD HEAT EXCHANGERS G-7.1 SUPPORTS All heat exchangers are to be provided with supports. *G-7.11 HORIZONTAL UNITS ‘The supports should be designed to accommodate the weight of the unit and contents, including the flooded weight during hydrostatic test. For units with removable tube bundles, supports should be designed to withstand a pulling force equal to 1-1/2 times the weight of the tube bundle. For purposes of support design, forces from external nozzle loadings, wind and seismic events are assumed to be negigible unless the purchaser spectically deta the requirements. When these additional loads and forces are required to be considered, the combinations need not be assumed to occur simultaneously. ‘The references under Paragraph G-7.13 may be used for calculating resulting stresses due to the saddle supports. Horizontal units are normally provided with at least two saddle type supports, with holes for anchor batts. The holes inal but one of the supports are o be elongated to accommodate axial movement of the unit under operating conditions. Other types of support may be used if all design criteria are met, and axial movement is accommodated. *G-7.12 VERTICAL UNITS. Vertical units are to be provided with supports adequate to meet design requirements. The supports may be of the lug, annular ring, leg or skirt type. Ifthe unit is to be located in a supporting structure, the supports should be of suificient size to allow clearance for the body flanges. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 15SECTION 3 GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION G-7.13 REFERENCES (1) Zick, L.P., "Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports,” Pressure Vessel and Piping; Design and Analysis, ASME, 1972. (2) Vinet, R., and Dore, R., “Stresses and Deformations in a Cylindrical Shell Lying on a Continuous Rigid Support," Paper No. 75-AM-1, Journal of Applied Mechanics, Trans. ASME (3) Krupka, V., “An Analysis for Lug or Saddle Supported Cylindrical Pressure Vessels,” Proceedings of the First International Conference on Pressure Vessel Technology, pp. 491-500, (4) Singh, K. P.,. Soler, A. |, "Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components,” Chapter 17, Arcturus Publishers, Inc. (6) Bilaard, P. P., "Stresses from Local Loadings in Cylindrical Pressure Vessels,” Trans. ASME, Vol. 77, No. 6, (August 1955). (6) Wichman, K.R., Hopper, A. G., and Mershon, J.L., "Local Stresses in Spherical and Cylindrical Shells due to External Loadings,” Welding Research Council, Bulletin No. 107, Rev. 1 (7) Rodabaugh, E.C., Dodge, W. G., and Moore, S. E., "Stress Indices at Lug Supports on Piping Systems," Welding Research Council Bulletin No. 198, (8) Brownell, LE., and Young, E. H., "Process Equipment Design,” John Wiley & Sons Inc. (9) Jawad, M.H., and Farr, J. R., “Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment,” John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1984. (10) Bednar, H. H., "Pressure Vessel Design Handbook,” Van Nostrand Reinhold Company. (11) Blodgett, ©. W., "Design of Welded Structures,” The James F. Lincoln Arc Welding Foundation, 1966. (12) Moss, Dennis R., "Pressure Vessel Design Manual,” 1987, Gulf Publishing Company. *G-7.2 LIFTING DEVICES Shannels, bonnets, and covers which weigh over 60 Ibs. (27.2 Ka) are to be provided wit I fings or tapped holes for eyebolts, Unless otherwise specie lft only the component to which they are directly attached. Lugs for lifting the complete unit are not normally provided. When lifting lugs or trunnions are required by the purchaser to lft the complete unt, the device must be adequately designed, (1) The purchaser shall inform the manufacturer about the way in which the iting device will be used. The purchaser shal be ntiied of any lintations of te lting devie relating to design or method of rigging. (2) Liquid penetrant examination of the lifting device attachment weld should be considered on large heavy units. () The design load shall incorporate an appropriate impact factor. (4) Plate-type lifting lugs should be oriented to minimize bending stresses. (6) The hole diameter in the litting device must be large enough to accept a shackle pin having a load rating greater than the design load. (©) The effect on the unit component to which the ling device is attached should be considered. It ‘may be necessary to add a reinforcing plate, annular ring or pad to distribute the load, (7) The adequacy of the exchanger to accommodate the lifting loads should be evaluated, ing lugs, 1280 lifting devices are designed to *G-7.3 WIND & SEISMIC DESIGN For wind and seismic forces to be considered in the design of a heat exchanger, the purchaser must specity in the inquiry the design requirements. The “Recommended Good Practice" section of these Standards provides the designer with a discussion on this subject and selected references for design application. 16 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationINSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SECTION 4 -1 PERFORMANCE OF HEAT EXCHANGERS. Satisfactory operation of heat exchangers can be obtained only from units which are properly designed and have built-in quality. Correct installation and preventive maintenance are user responsibilities E-1.1 PERFORMANCE FAILURES ‘The failure of heat exchanger equipment to perform satisfactorily may be caused by one or more factors, such as: (1) Excessive fouling (2) Air or gas binding resulting from improper piping installation or lack of suitable vents. (3) Operating conditions differing from design conditions, (4) Maidistribution of flow in the unit. (6) Excessive clearances between the baffles and shell and/or tubes, due to corrosion. (6) Improper thermal design, The usor's best assurance of satisfactory performance lies in dependence upon manufacturers competent in the design and fabrication of heat transfer equipment. E-2 INSTALLATION OF HEAT EXCHANGERS E-2.1 HEAT EXCHANGER SETTINGS: £-2.11 CLEARANCE FOR DISMANTLING For straight tube exchangers fitted with removable bundles, provide sufficient clearance at the stationary head end to permit removal of the bundle from the shell and provide adequate space beyond the rear head to permit removal of the shell cover and/or floating head cover. For fixed tubesheet exchangers, provide sufficient clearance at one end to permit withdrawal and replacement of the tubes, and enough space beyond the head at the opposite end to permit removal of the bonnet or channel cover. For U-tube heat exchangers, provide sufficient clearance at the stationary head end to permit, withdrawal of the tube bundle, or at the opposite end to permit removal of the shell E-2.12 FOUNDATIONS Foundations must be adequate so that exchangers will not settle and impose excessive strains on the exchanger. Foundation bolts should be set to allow for selting inaccuracies. In concrete footings. pipe sieeves at least one size larger than bolt diameter slipped over the bolt and cast in place are best for this purpose, as they allow the bolt center to be adjusted after the foundation has set. E-2.13 FOUNDATION BOLTS Foundation bolts should be loosened at one end of the unit to allow free expansion of shells. Slotted holes in supports are provided for this purpose. £2.14 LEVELING Exchangers must be set level and square so that pipe connections may be made without forcing. E-2.2 CLEANLINESS PROVISIONS E-2.21 CONNECTION PROTECTORS All exchanger openings should be inspected for foreign material. Protective plugs and covers. should not be removed untl just prior to installation. E-2.22 DIRT REMOVAL The entire system should be clean before starting operation. Under some conditions, the use of strainers in the piping may be required. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 17SECTION 4 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE £-2.23 CLEANING FACILITIES Convenient means should be provided for cleaning the unit as suggested under ‘Maintenance of Heat Exchangers,” Paragraph E-4. E-2.3 FITTINGS AND PIPING E-2.31 BY-PASS VALVES Itmay be desirable for purchaser to provide valves and by-passes in the piping system to permit inspection and repairs. E-2.32 TEST CONNECTIONS When not integral with the exchanger nozzles, thermometer well and pressure gage ‘connections should be installed close to the exchanger in the inlet and outlet piping, £-2.33 VENTS: Vent valves should be provided by purchaser so units can be purged to prevent vapor or gas binding, ‘Special consideration must be given to discharge of hazardous or toxic ids." © E-2.34 DRAINS Drains may discharge to atmosphere, if permissible, or into a vessel at lower pressure. They should not be piped to a common closed manifold, E-2.35 PULSATION AND VIBRATION Inall installations, care should be taken to eliminate or minimize transmission of fluid pulsations and mechanical vibrations to the heat exchangers. E-2.36 SAFETY RELIEF DEVICES The ASME Code defines the requirements for safety relief devices. When specified by the purchaser, the manufacturer will provide the necessary connections for the safety relief devices. The size and type of the required connections will be specified by the purchaser. ‘The purchaser will provide and install the required relief devices. E-3 OPERATION OF HEAT EXCHANGERS E-3.1 DESIGN AND OPERATING CONDITIONS Equipment must not be operated at conditions which exceed those specified on the name plate(s) £-3.2 OPERATING PROCEDURES Before placing any exchanger in operation, reference should be made to the exchanger drawings, specification sheet(s) and name plate(s) for any special instructions, Local safety and health regulations must be considered. Improper start-up or shut-down sequences, particularly of fixed tubesheet units, may cause leaking of tube-to-tubesheet and /or bolted flanged joints, £-3.21 START-UP OPERATION Most exchangers with removable tube bundles may be placed in service by first establishing circulation of the cold medium, followed by the gradual introduction of the hot medium, During start-up all vent valves should be opened and left open unti all passages have been purged of air ancl are completely filed with fui. For fixed tubesheet exchangers, fds must \e introduced in a manner to minimize differential expansion between the shell and tubes. E-3.22 SHUT-DOWN OPERATION For exchangers with removable bundles, the units may be shut down by fst gradually ‘stopping the flow of the hot medium and then stopping the flow of the cold medium. If itis necessary to stop the flow of cold medium, the circulation of hot medium through the exchanger should also be stopped. For fixed tubesheet exchangers, the unit must be shut down in a manner to minimize differential expansion between shell and tubes. When shutting down the system, al units should be drained completely when there is the possibilty of freezing or corrosion damage. To guard against water hammer, condensate should be 18 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationINSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SECTION 4 drained from steam heaters and similar apparatus during start-up or shut-down, To reduce water retention after drainage, the tube side of water cooled exchangers should be blown out with air E-3.23 TEMPERATURE SHOCKS Exchangers normally should not be subjected to abrupt temperature fluctuations. Hot fluid must not be suddenly introduced when the unit is cold, nor cold fluid suddenly introduced When the unit is hot. E-3.24 BOLTED JOINTS Heat exchangers are pressure tested before leaving the manufacturer's shop in accordance with ASME Code requirements. However, normal relaxing of the gasketed joints may occur in the interval between testing in the manufacturer's shop and installation at the jobsite. ‘Therefore, all external bolted joints may require retightening after installation and, i necessary, after the exchanger has reached operating temperature, E-3.25 RECOMMENDED BOLT TIGHTENING PROCEDURE itis important that all bolted joints be tightened uniformly and in a diametrically staggered ttern, as illustrated in Figure E-3.25, except for special high pressure closures when the instructions of the manufacturer should be followed, FIGURE E-3.25 START 1 E-4 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT EXCHANGERS E-4.1 INSPECTION OF UNIT ‘At regular intervals and as frequently as experience indicates, an examination should be made of the interior and exterior condition of the unit, Neglect in keeping all tubes clean may result in complete stoppage of flow through some tubes which could cause severe thermal strains, leaking tube joints, or structural damage to other components. Sacrificial anodes, when provided, should be inspected to determine whether they should be cleaned or replaced E-4.11 INDICATIONS OF FOULING Exchangers subject to fouling or scaling should be cleaned periodically. light sludge or scale coating on the tube greatly reduces its efficiency. A marked increase in pressure drop and/or reduction in performance usually indicates cleaning is necessary. The unit should first bbe checked for air or vapor binding to confirm that this is not the cause for the reduction in performance. Since the difficulty of cleaning Increases rapidly as the scale thickness or depostt increases, the intervals between cleanings should not be excessive. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 19SECTION 4 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE E-4.12 DISASSEMBLY FOR INSPECTION OR CLEANING Before disassembly, the user must assure himself that the unit has been depressurized, vented and drained, neutralized and/or purged of hazardous material To inspect the inside of the tubes and also make them accessible for cleaning, the following procedures should be used: (1) Stationary Head End (@) Type A. C, D &N, remove cover only (©) Type B, remove bonnet (2) Rear Head End (@) Type L, N &P, remove cover only (b) Type M, remove bonnet (©) Type $ &T, remove shell cover and fioating head cover (@) Type W, remove channel cover or bonnet £-4,13 LOCATING TUBE LEAKS The following procedures may be used to locate perforated or split tubes and leaking joints between tubes and tubesheets. In most cases, the entire front face of each tubesheet will be accessible for inspection. The point where water escapes indicates a defective tube or tube-to-tubesheet joint. (1) Units with removable channel cover: Remove channel cover and apply hydraulic pressure in the shel. (2) Units with bonnet type head: For fixed tubesheet units where tubesheets are an integral ppart of the shell, remove bonnet and apply hydraulic pressure in the shell. For fixed tubesheet units where tubesheets are not an integral part of the shell and for units with removable bundles, remove bonnet, e-bottubeshet to shel o instal test fenge or gand, whichever is applicable, and apply hydraulic pressure in the shell. See Figure E-4.13-1 for typical test flange and test gland, FIGURE E-4.13-1 —€é —— (@) Units with Type S or T floating head: Remove channel cover or bonnet, shell cover and floating head cover. Install test ring and bolt in place with gasket and packing. Apply hydraulic pressure in the shell. A typical test ring is shown in Figure E-4.13-2. When atest ring is not available it is possible to locate leaks in the floating head end by removing the shell cover and applying hydraulic pressure in the tubes. Leaking tube joints may then be located by sighting through the tube lanes. Care must be exercised when testing partially assembled exchangers to prevent over extension of expansion joints or overloading of tubes and/or tube-to-tubesheet joints. (4) Hydrostatic test should be performed so that the temperature of the metal is over 60° F (16° C) unless the materials of construction have a lower nil-ductility transition temperature. 20 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationINSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SECTION 4 FIGURE E-4.13-2 TEST AING FLOATING TUBESHEET — SHELL FLANGE- REAR HEAD ENO PACKING — pe GASKET [ = PACKING GLAND i as E-4.2 TUBE BUNDLE REMOVAL AND HANDLING. To avoid possible damage during removal of a tube bundle from a shell, a pulling device should be attached to eyebolts screwed into the tubesheet. If the tubesheet does not have tapped holes for eyebots, steel rods or cables inserted through tubes and attached to bearing plates may be used. ‘The bundle should be supported on the tube baffles, supports or tubesheets to prevent damage to the tubes. Gasket and packing contact surfaces should be protected. E-4.3 CLEANING TUBE BUNDLES £-4.31 CLEANING METHODS The heat transfer surfaces of heat exchangers should be kept reasonably clean to assure satisfactory performance. Convenient means for cleaning should be made available. Heat exchangers may be cleaned by either chemical or mechanical methods. The method selected must be the choice of the operator of the plant and will depend on the type of deposit and the facilities available in the plant. Following are several cleaning procedures that, may be considered: (1) Circulating hot wash oil or light distillate through tubes or shell at high velocity may effectively remove sludge or similar soft deposits. (2) Some salt deposits may be washed out by circulating hot fresh water. (@) Commercial cleaning compounds are available for removing sludge or scale provided hot wash oll or water is not available or does not give satisfactory results. (4) High pressure water jet cleaning. (6) Scrapers, rotating wire brushes, and other mechanical means for removing hard scale, coke, or other deposits. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 2122 SECTION 4 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (©) Employ services of a qualified organization that provides cleaning services. These ‘organizations will check the nature of the deposits to be removed, furnish proper solvents and /or acid solutions containing inhibitors, and provide equipment and personnel for a ‘complete cleaning job. E-4.32 CLEANING PRECAUTIONS (1) Tubes should not be cleaned by blowing steam through individual tubes since this heats the tube and may result in severe expansion strain, deformation of the tube, or loosening Of the tube-to-tubesheet joint (2) When mechanically cleaning a tube buncle, care should be exercised to avoid damaging the tubes. (8) Cleaning compounds must be compatible with the metallurgy of the exchanger. E-4.4 TUBE EXPANDING A suitable tube expander should be used to tighten a leaking tube joint. Care should be taken to ensure that tubes are not over expanded, E-4.5 GASKET REPLACEMENT Gaskets and gasket surfaces should be thoroughly cleaned and should be free of scratches and other defects. Gaskets should be properly positioned before attempting to retighten bolts. It is recommended that when a heat exchanger is dismantled for any cause, it be reassembled with new gaskets, This wil tend to prevent future leaks an /or damage fo the gasket seating surfaces of the eat exchanger. Composition gaskets become dried out and brittle so that they do not always provide an effective seal when reused. Metal or metal jacketed gaskets, when compressed initially, flow to match their contact surfaces. in so doing they are work hardened and, if reused, may provide an imperfect seal or result in deformation and damage to the gasket contact surfaces of the exchanger, Bolted joints and flanges are designed for use with the particular type of gasket specified. Substitution of a gasket of different construction or improper dimensions may result in leakage and damage to gasket surfaces. Therefore, any gasket substitutions should be of compatible design, Any leakage at a gasketed joint should be rectified and not permitted to persist as it may result in damage to the gasket surfaces. Motal jacketed type gaskets are widely used. When these are used with a tongue and groove joint without a nubbin, the gasket should be instailed so that the tongue bears on the seamless side of the gasket jacket. When a nubbin is used, the nubbin should bear on the seamless side. £-4.6 SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS The procurement of spare or replacement pats rom the manufacture’ wil be factated ifthe correct name for the part, as shown in Section 1, Table N-2, of these Standards is given, together with the serial number, type, size, and other information from the name plate. Replacement parts should be purchased from the original manufacturer. E-4.7 PLUGGING OF TUBES In U-tube heat exchangers, and other exchangers of special design, it may not be feasible to remove and replace defective tubes. Defective tubes may be plugged using commercially avaliable tapered plugs with ferrules or tapered only plugs which may or may not be seal welded. Excessive tube plugging may result in reduced thermal performance, higher pressure drop, and/or mechanical damage. It is the user's responsibility to remove plugs and neutralize the bundle prior to sending it toa shop for repairs, Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-1 SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: RCB-1.1 SCOPE OF STANDARDS: RCB-1.11 GENERAL ‘The TEMA Mechanical Standards are applicable to shell and tube heat exchangers which do not exceed any of the following criteria: (1) inside diameters of 100 inches (2540 mm) (2) product of nominal diameter, inches (mm) and design pressure, psi (kPa) of 100,000 (17.5 x 108) (8) a design pressure of 3,000 psi (20684 kPa) The intent of these parameters is to limit the maximum shell wall thickness to approximately 3 inches (76 mm), and the maximum stud diameter to approximately 4 inches (102 mm). Criteria contained in these Standards may be applied to units which exceed the above parameters. R-1.12 DEFINITION OF TEMA CLASS "R" EXCHANGERS ‘The TEMA Mechanical Standards for Class "R" heat exchangers specity design and fabrication of unfired shell and tube heat exchangers for the generally severe requirements of petroleum and related processing applications. C-1.12 DEFINITION OF TEMA CLASS "C" EXCHANGERS: ‘The TEMA Mechanical Standards for Ciass "C" heat exchangers specify design and fabrication of unfired shell and tube heat exchangers for the generally moderate requirements of commercial and general process applications. B-1.12 DEFINITION OF TEMA CLASS "B* EXCHANGERS The TEMA Mechanical Standards for Cass "B" heat exchangers specify design and fabrication of unfired shell and tube heat exchangers for chemical process service. RCB-1.13 CONSTRUCTION CODES The individual vessels shall comply with the ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Boller and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Vill, Division 1, hereinafter referred to as the Code. These Standards supplement and define the Code for heat exchanger applications. The manufacturer shall comply with the construction requirements of state and focal codes when the purchaser specifies the plant location. It shall be the responsibilty of the purchaser to inform the manufacturer of any applicable local codes. Application of the je symbol is required, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. RCB-1.14 MATERIALS-DEFINITION OF TERMS. For purposes of these Standards, "carbon steel” shall be construed as any steel or low alloy falling within the scope of Part UCS of the Code. Metals not included by the foregoing (except cast iron) shall be considered as “alloys' unless otherwise specifically named. Materials of construction, including gaskets, should be specified by the purchaser. The manufacturer ‘assumes no responsibilty for deterioration of parts for any reason. RCB-1.2 DESIGN PRESSURE RCB-1.21 DESIGN PRESSURE Design pressures for the shell and tube sides shall be specified separately by the purchaser. RCB-1.3 TESTING RCB-1.31 STANDARD TEST The exchanger shall be hydrostatically tested with water. The test pressure shall be held for at least 30 minutes. The shell side and the tube side are to be tested separately in such a manner that leaks at the tube joints can be detected from at least one side. When the tube je design pressure is the higher pressure, the tube bundle shall be tested outside of the shell only if specified by the purchaser and the construction permits. Welded joints are to be Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 23SECTIONS MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B sufficiently cleaned prior to testing the exchanger to permit proper inspection during the test. ‘The minimum hydrostatic test pressure at room temperature shall be in accordance with the Code. RCB-1.311 OTHER LIQUID TESTS Liquids other than water may be used as a testing medium if agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. RCB-1.32 PNEUMATIC TEST When liquid cannot be tolerated as a test medium the exchanger may be given a pneumatic test in accordance with the Code. It must be recognized that air or gas is hazardous when used as a pressure testing medium. The pneumatic test pressure at room temperature shall be in accordance with the Code. RCB-1.33 SUPPLEMENTARY AIR TEST When a supplementary air or gas test is specified by the purchaser, it shall be preceded by the hydrostatic test required by Paragraph RCB-1.31. The test pressure shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and manulaturer, but sl not ‘exceed that required by Paragraph 1.82. RCB-1.4 METAL TEMPERATURES RCB-1.41 METAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS FOR PRESSURE PARTS ‘The metal temperature limitations for various metals are those prescribed by the Code. RCB-1.42 DESIGN TEMPERATURE OF HEAT EXCHANGER PARTS: RCB-1.421 FOR PARTS NOT IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS Design temperatures forthe shel and tube sides shal be epectiod separately by the purchaser. The Gode provides the allowable stress limits for parts to be designed at the specified design temperature. RCB-1.422 FOR PARTS IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS The design temperature is the design metal temperature and is used to establish the Code stress lit for design. The design metal temperature shall be based on the operating temperatures of the shellside and the tubeside fluids, except when the purchaser specifies some other design metal temperature. When the design metal ‘temperature is less than the higher of the design temperatures referred to in Paragraph RCB-1.421, the design meta temperature and he afected pats shal be shown on the manufacturer's namepiate(s) as described in Paragraph G-3.1 RCB-1.43 MEAN METAL TEMPERATURES RCB-1.431 FOR PARTS NOT IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS ‘The mean metal temperature is the calculated metal temperature, under specified operating conditions, of a part in contact with a fluid. It is used to establish metal properties under operating conditions. The mean metal temperature is based on the ‘specified operating temperatures of the fluid in contact with the part. RCB-1.432 FOR PARTS IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS. ‘The mean metal temperature is the calculated metal temperature, under specified operating conaitions, of a part in contact with both shellside and tubeside fluids. It is used to establish metal properties under operating conditions. The mean metal temperature is based on the specified operating temperatures of the shellside and tubeside fluids. In establishing the mean metal temperatures, due consideration shall be given to such factors as the relative heat transfer coefficients of the two fluids contacting the part and the relative heat transfer area of the parts contacted by the two fluids, RCB-1.5 STANDARD CORROSION ALLOWANCES: ‘The standard corrosion allowances used for the various heat exchanger parts are as follows, unless the conditions of service make a different allowance more suitable and such allowance is specified by the purchaser. 24 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 RCB-1.51 CARBON STEEL PARTS R-4.511 PRESSURE PARTS All carbon steel pressure parts, except as noted below, are to have a corrosion allowance of 1/8" (3.2 mm). CB-1.511 PRESSURE PARTS All carbon steel pressure parts, except as noted below, are to have a corrosion allowance of 1/16" (1.6 mm). RCB-1.512 INTERNAL FLOATING HEAD COVERS Internal floating head covers are to have the corrosion allowance on all wetted surfaces except gasket seating surfaces. Corrosion allowance on the outside of the flanged portion may be included in the recommended minimum edge distance. RCB-1.513 TUBESHEETS Tubesheets are to have the corrosion allowance on each side with the provision that, ‘on the grooved side of a grooved tubesheet, the depth of the gasketed groove may be considered as available for corrosion allowance. RCB-1.514 EXTERNAL COVERS ‘Where flat external covers are grooved, the depth of the gasketed groove may be considered as available for corrosion allowance. RCB-1.515 END FLANGES Corrosion allowance shall be applied only to the inside diameter of flanges where exposed to the fluids. RCB-1.516 NONPRESSURE PARTS Nonpressure parts such as tie-rods, spacers, baffles and support plates are not required to have corrosion allowance. RCB-1.517 TUBES, BOLTING AND FLOATING HEAD BACKING DEVICES Tubes, bolting and floating head backing devices are not required to have corrosion allowance. RCB-1.518 PASS PARTITION PLATES Pass partition plates are not required to have corrosion allowance. RCB-1.82 ALLOY PARTS Alloy parts are not required to have corrosion allowance. R-1.53 CAST IRON PARTS Cast iron pressure parts shall have a corrosion allowance of 1/8" (3.2 mm). CB-1.53 CAST IRON PARTS Cast iron pressure parts shall have a corrosion allowance of 1/16" (1.6 mm). RCB-1.6 SERVICE LIMITATIONS RB-1.61 CAST IRON PARTS Cast iron shall be used only for water service at pressures not exceeding 150 psi (1034 kPa), C-1.61 CAST IRON PARTS: Cast iron shall not be used for pressures exceeding 150 psi (1034 kPa), or for lethal or flammable fluids at any pressure. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 25SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B 26 RCB-1.62 EXTERNAL PACKED JOINTS Packed joints shall not be used when the purchaser specifies that the fluid in contact with the joint is lethal or flammable. RCB-1.7 ANODES Selection and placement of anodes is not the responsibility of the heat exchanger manufacturer. Ifa heat exchanger is to be furnished with anodes, when requesting a quotation, the purchaser is responsible for furnishing the heat exchanger manufacturer the following information: (1) Method of anode attachment. (2) Quantity of anodes required. (@) Size and manufacturer of the anodes, (4) Anode material (6) Sketch of anode locations and spacing, If the heat exchanger manufacturer chooses to install anodes for a customer, the manufacturer Is not responsible for the suitability of the anodes for the service its installed in, the life of the anodes, the corrosion protection provided by the anode, or any subsequent damage to the heat exchanger attributed to the anode, the method of anode installation, or the installed location of the anode in the heat exchanger. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 *RCB-2 TUBES RCB-2.1 TUBE LENGTH The following tube lengths for both straight and U-tube exchangers are commonly used: 96 (2438), 1120 (8048), 144 (9658), 192 (4877) and 240 (6096) inches (mm). Other lengths may be used. Also see Paragraph N-1.12. RCB-2.2 TUBE DIAMETERS AND GAGES RCB-2.21 BARE TUBES Table RCB-2.21 lists common tube diameters and gages for bare tubes of copper, steel and alloy. Other diameters and gages are acceptable. TABLE RCB-2.21 BARE TUBE DIAMETERS AND GAGES OD. ‘Copper and Copper Alloys | Carbon Steel, Aluminum (Other Alloys Inches ‘and Aluminum Alloys (mm) BWG. BW.G. BW.G 1/4 a7 - 27 (6.4) 24 = 24 22 : 22 3/8 22 - 22 @5) 20 - 20 18 : 18 1/2 20 - 20 (12:7) 48 : 18 5/8 20 18 20 (15.9) 18 16 18 16 4 16 3/4 20 16 18 (48.4) 18 14 16 16 42 44 7/8 18 14 16 (22.2) 16 12 14 14 10 2 12 : : 1 18 14 16 (25.4) 16 12 44 14 : 12 14/4 16 14 14 618) 44 12 12 14/2 16 4 14 8.1) 4 12 12 2 14 14 14 (50.8) 12 42 12 Notes: 1. Wall thickness shall be specified as either minimum or average. 2, Characteristics of tubing are shown in Tables D-7 and D7M. RCB-2.22 INTEGRALLY FINNED TUBES The nominal fin diameter shall not exceed the outside diameter of the unfinned section. Specified wall shall be based on the thickness at the root diameter. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 27SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-2.3 U-TUBES RCB-2,31 U-BEND REQUIREMENTS When U-bends are formed, it is normal for the tube wall at the outer radius to thin. The minimum tube wall thickness in the bent portion before bending shall be: [ria tomtila+ | where to = Original tube wall thickness, inches (mm) t, = Minimum tube wall thickness calculated by Code rules for a straight tube subjected to the same pressure and metal temperature, inches (mm) = Outside tube diameter, inches (mm) R= Mean radius of bend, inches (mm) ‘More than one tube gage, or dual gage tubes, may be used in a tube bundle. When U-bends are formed from tube materials which are relatively non-work-hardening and of suitable temper, tube wall thinning in the bends should not exceed a nominal 17% of original tube wall thickness. Flattening at the bend shall not exceed 10% of the nominal tube outside diameter. U-bends formed from tube materials having low ductility, or materials which are susceptible to work-hardening, may require special consideration. Also refer to Paragraph RCB-2.33. RCB-2.32 BEND SPACING RCB-2.321 CENTER-TO-CENTER DIMENSION ‘The center-to-center dimensions between parallel legs of U-tubes shall be such that they can be inserted into the baffle assembly without damage to the tubes. RCB-2.322 BEND INTERFERENCE ‘The assembly of bends shall be of workmanlike appearance. Metal-to-metal contact between bends in the same plane shall not be permitted. RCB-2.33 HEAT TREATMENT Cold work in forming U-bends may induce embrittlement or susceptibility to stress corrosion in certain materials and/or environments. Heat treatment to alleviate such conditions may be performed by agreement between manufacturer and purchaser. RCB-2.4 TUBE PATTERN ‘Standard tube patterns are shown in Figure RCB-2.4. FIGURE RCB-2.4 20° or 90" ss Triangular sfotates, Square pute Square Note: Flow arrows are perpendicular to the baffle cut edge. 28 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-2.41 SQUARE PATTERN In removable bundle units, when mechanical cleaning of the tubes is specified by the purchaser, tube lanes should be continuous. RCB-2.42 TRIANGULAR PATTERN Triangular or rotated triangular pattern should not be used when the shell side is to be cleaned mechanically R-2.5 TUBE PITCH Tubes shall be spaced with a minimum center-to-center distance of 1.25 times the outside diameter of the tube. When mechanical cleaning of the tubes is specified by the purchaser, minimum cleaning lanes of 1/4" (6.4 mmn) shall be provided. C-2.5 TUBE PITCH Tubes shall be spaced with a minimum center-to-center distance of 1.25 times the outside diameter of the tube, Where the tube diameters are 5/8" (15.9 mm) of less and tube-to-tubesheet joints are expanded only, the minimum center-to-center distance may be reduced to 1.20 times the outside diameter, B-2.5 TUBE PITCH Tubes shall be spaced with a minimum center-to-center distance of 1.25 times the outside diameter of the tube. When mechanical cleaning of the tubes is specified by the purchaser and the nominal shell diameter is 12 inches (305 mm) of less, minimum cleaning lanes of 3/16" (4.8 mm) shall be provided. For shell diameters greater than 12 inches (805 mm), minimum cleaning lanes of 1/4” (6.4 mm) shall be provided, Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 29SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-3 SHELLS AND SHELL COVERS RCB-3.1 SHELLS RCB-3.11 SHELL DIAMETERS It shall be left to the discretion of each manufacturer to establish a system of standard shell diameters within the TEMA Mechanical Standards in order to achieve the economies peculiar to his individual design and manufacturing facilities. RCB-3.12 TOLERANCES RCB-3.121 PIPE SHELLS The inside diameter of pipe shells shall be in accordance with applicable ASTM/ASME pipe specifications. RCB-3.122 PLATE SHELLS The inside diameter of any plate shell shall not exceed the design inside diameter by more than 1/8" (3.2 mm) as determined by citcumferential measurement. RCB-3.13 MINIMUM SHELL THICKNESS. Shall thickness is determined by the Code design formulas, plus corrosion allowance, but in o case shall the nominal thickness of shelis be less than that shown in the applicable table, ‘The nominal total thickness for clad shells shall be the same as for carbon steal shells. TABLE R-3.13, MINIMUM SHELL THICKNESS Dimensions In Inches (mm) Minimum Thickness Nominal Shell Diameter Carbon Steel Alloy * Pipe Plate 6 152) ‘SCH. 40 - ve (32) 8-12 (203-305) SCH. 30 : 178 (3.2) 13-28 (830-737) SCH. STD 3/8 as) | 3/te (48) 30-39 (762.981 : The (ttt va bad 40-60 (1016-1524) : 2 N27) | 5/6 (79) 61-80 (1549-2032) - 472 (12.7) | 5/16 (7.9) 81-100 (2057-2540) : 2 N27) | 3/8 (88) TABLE CB-3.13 MINIMUM SHELL THICKNESS: Dimensions In Inches (mm) Minimum Thickness Nominal Shell Diameter Carbon Steel Alloy * Pipe Plato 6 182), ‘SCH. 40, - 178 (32) 8-12 (203-305) SCH. 30 : 178 82) 13-23 (330-584) SCH. 20 5/16 (7.9) 1/8 (3.2) 24-29 (610-737 - 5/16 (7.9) 3/16 (4.8) 30 - 39. (762-991 ie 3/8 a 4/4 (6.4) 40 - 60 1016-1524) e 7G (114 1/4 (6.4) 61-80. {1346-2082) : 1/2 (12.7) 5/16 (7.9) 81-100 (2057-2540) - 1/2 (12.7) 3/8 (9.5) *Schedule 5S is permissible for 6 inch (152 mm) and 8 inch (203 mm) shell diameters. 30 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 RCB-3.2 SHELL COVER THICKNESS Nominal thickness of shell cover heads, before forming, shall be at least equal to the thickness of the shell as shown in the applicable table. RCB-4 BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES RCB-4.1 TYPE OF TRANSVERSE BAFFLES ‘The segmental or muiti-segmental type of baffle or tube support plate is standard. Other type baffles are permissible, Baffle cut is defined as the segment opening height expressed as a percentage of ihe Shot inside dameter or as a percentage of th total net ree area ide the shel (eel crose sectional area minus total tube area). The number of tube rows that overlap for multi-segmental baffies should be adjusted to give approximately the same net free area flow through each baffle. Baffles shall be cut near the centerline of a row of tubes, of a pass lane, of a tube lane, or outside the tube pattem. Baffles shall have a workmanlike finish on the outside diameter. Typical bafile cuts are ilustrated in Figure RCB-4.1. Baffle cuts may be vertical, horizontal or rotated. FIGURE RCB-4.1 BAFFLE CUTS FOR SEGMENTAL BAFFLES Sas 2 Horizont Verticat Rotates BAFFLE CUTS FOR MULTI-SEGMENTAL BAFFLES GD tt DOUBLE SEGMENTAL CD {bt ‘TRIPLE SEGMENTAL, RCB-4.2 TUBE HOLES Where the maximum unsupported tube length is 36 inches (914 mm) or less, or for tubes larger in diameter than 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm) OD, standard tube holes are to be 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) over the OD of the tubes. Where the unsupported tube length exceeds 36 inches (014 mm) for tubes 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm) diameter and smaller, standard tube holes are to be 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) over the OD of the tubes. For pulsating conditions, tube holes may be smaller than standard. Any burrs shall be removed and the tube holes given a workmanlike finish. Baffle holes will have an over-tolerance fo.n10 nen 03 mm) except that 4% of the holes are allowed an over-tolerance of 0.015 inch (0.4 mm). RCB-4.3 TRANSVERSE BAFFLE AND SUPPORT CLEARANCE ‘The transverse baffle and support plate clearance shall be such that the difference between the shell design inside diameter and the outside diameter of the baffle shall not exceed that indicated in Table RCB-4.3, However, where such clearance has no significant effect on shell side heat transfer coefficient or mean temperature difference, these maximum clearances may be increased to twice the tabulated values. (See Paragraph RCB-4.43,) ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 3SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB TABLE RCB-4.3 ‘Standard Cross Baffle and Support Plate Clearances mensions In Inches (mr) Nominal Shel! ID Design ID of Shell Minus Baffle OD 6-17 152-482) je (32) (457-991) 3/16 (4.8) 1016-1372) 4/4 (6a) 1397-1753) 5/6 (79) 178-2134) 3/8 (@5) (2159-2540) 7/6 (114 ‘The design inside diameter of a pipe shell is defined as the nominal outside diameter of the pipe, minus twice the nominal wall thickness. The design inside diameter of a plate shell is the specified inside diameter. In any case, the design inside diameter may be taken as the actual measured shell inside diameter. RCB-4.4 THICKNESS OF BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES RCB-4.41 TRANSVERSE BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES The following tables show the minimum thickness of transverse baffles and support plates applying to all materials for various shell diameters and plate spacings. ‘The thickness of the baffle or support plates for U-tube bundles shall be based on the unsupported tube length inthe eaight section of he bundle, The U-bond angth shal not be const TABLE R-4. a1 BAFFLE OR SUPPORT PLATE THICKNESS Dimensions in Inches (mm) jered in determining the unsupported tube length for required plate thickness. Plate Thickness Nominal Shell ID ‘Unsupported tube length between central baffles. End spaces between tubesheets and baffies are not a consideration. 24 (610) and | Over 24 (610) | Over 36 (914) | Over 48 Over 60 Under | 10.36 (914) | to48 (1219) | (1219) to60 | (1524) Inclusive | — Inclusive (1524) Inclusive S14 (isecse, [ra aay [are (as [174 (Gah [9/8 fos} 9/8 (95) 15-28 — aat-7i1) |a/ie (48) 1/4 (64) [3/8 (9.5) 3/8 fos) [1/2 (12.7) 29-38 (737-965) |1/4 (64) [5/16 (75) |3/8 (95) |1/2 (12.7) |5/8 (159) 39-60 foor-tsan [174 (64) Jaye fos} |1/2 (127) |a/e 159} |5/B (159) B1-100 (1849-2540) 3/8 (85) [1/2 (127) |5/e 159) |3/4 (194) |3/4 (to. 32 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 TABLE CB-4.41 BAFFLE OR SUPPORT PLATE THICKNESS Dimensions in Inches (mm) Plate Thickness: Unsupported tube lenath between central baffles. End spaces between Nominal Shell ID tubesheets and baffles are not a consideration. 12 (305) | Over12 | Over24 | Overse | Over4s | Over6o and Under | (305) to 24] (610) to 36 | (14) to.48 | (1219) to60| (1524) (610) 14) (1219) (1524) Inclusive | Inclusive | Inclusive | Inclusive 8 /v79, 02 [aris (4a) li/a 64) [3/8 (95) [3/8 05) (3.2) |a/te (48) |1/4 (64) a7 (os) Ja/8 (95) |4/2 (12:7) 4 6-14 (152-056) [1/16 15-28 (gat-711) | 1/8 29-38 gross) jaye {48} |1/4 (64) [5/6 (79) [2/8 (08} [1/2 5/8 (159 2-80 (eor-isza {1/4 es Va 83 Be Bale cen ls {3 Be tiss &1- 100 _ (1549-2540) |1/4_ (6.4) |3/8_ (9.5) |1/2_ (12.7) [5/8 (3) [slats se Get R-4.42 LONGITUDINAL BAFFLES Longitudinal baffles shall not be less than 1/4" (6.4 mm) nominal metal thickness. CB-4,42 LONGITUDINAL BAFFLES Longitudinal carbon steel baffles shall not be less than 1/4" (6.4 mm) nominal metal thickness. Longitudinal alloy baffles shall not be less than 1/8" (3.2 mm) nominal metal thickness. RCB-4.43 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS ‘Special consideration should be given to: (1) Baffies and support plates subjected to pulsations. (2) Baffles and support plates engaging finned tubes. (@) Longitudinal baffles subjected to large differential pressures due to high shell side fluid pressure drop. (4) Support of tube bundles when larger clearances allowed by RCB-4.3 are used, RCB-4.5 SPACING OF BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES RCB-4.51 MINIMUM SPACING ‘Segmental batfles normally should not be spaced closer than 1/5 of the shell ID or 2 inches (Gi mm), whichever is greater. However, special design considerations may dictate a closer spacing, RCB-4.52 MAXIMUM SPACING Tube support plates shall be so spaced that the unsupported tube span does not exceed the value indicated in Table RCB-4.52 for the tube material used. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 33SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB TABLE RCB-4.52 MAXIMUM UNSUPPORTED STRAIGHT TUBE SPANS Dimensions in inches (mm) ‘Tube Materials and Temperature Limits °F (°C) Carbon Steel & High Alloy Steel, 750 [Aluminum & Aluminum Alloys, (399) /Copper & Copper Alloys, Titanium Tube OD —_| Low Alloy Steel, 850 (454) Alloys At Code Maximum Allowable Nickel-Copper, 600 (316) Temperature Nickel, 850 (454) Nickel-Chromium-tron, 1000 (638) 1/4 64 26. (660) 22. (569) 3/8 (35) 35. (889) 30 (762) 4/2 (12.7 44 (1118) 38 (065) 5/8 (15.9) 52 (1921 45 (1149) 3/4 (184 60 (1524) 82 (1921 7/8 (22.2) 69 (1753) 60 (1524 1 (254) 74 (1880) 64 (1626) 11/4 G18) 88 (2235) 76 (1930 14/2 (8.1 100 (2540) 87 (2210 2 bos) 125 (3175 110 (2794) Notes: (1) Above the metal temperature limits shown, maximum spans shall be reduced in direct. proportion to the fourth root of the ratio of elastic modulus at temperature to elastic modulus at tabulated limit temperature. (2) In the case of circumferentially finned tubes, the tube OD shall be the diameter at the root, of the fins and the corresponding tabulated or interpolated span shall be reduced in rect proportion to the fourth root of the ratio of the weight per unit length of the tube, If stripped Of fins to that of the actual finned tube. (3) The maximum unsupported tube spans in Table RCB-4.52 do not consider potential flow induced vibration problems. Refer to Section 6 for vibration criteria. RCB-4.53 BAFFLE SPACING Baffles normally shall be spaced uniformly, spanning the effective tube length. When this is not possible, the baffles nearest the ends of the shell, and/or tubesheets, shall be located as close as practical to the shell nozzles. The remaining bafles normally shal be spaced uniformly, RCB-4.64 U-TUBE REAR SUPPORT ‘The support plates or baffles adjacent to the bends in U-tube exchangers shall be so located that, for any individual bend, the sum of the bend diameter plus the straight lengths measured along both legs from supports to bend tangents does not exceed the maximum unsupported span determined from Paragraph RCB-4.52. Where bend diameters prevent compliance, special provisions in addition to the above shall be made for support of the bends. RCB-4,55 SPECIAL CASES When pulsating conditions are specified by the purchaser, unsupported spans shall be as short as pressure drop restrictions permit. If the span under these circumstances approaches the maximum permitted by Paragraph RCB-4.52, consideration should be given to alternative flow arrangements which would permit shorter spans under the same pressure drop restrictions, RCB-4,56 TUBE BUNDLE VIBRATION ‘Shell side flow may produce excitation forces which result in destructive tube vibrations. Existing predictive correlations are inadequate to insure that any given design willbe free of such damage. The vulnerability of an exchanger to flow induced vibration depends on the flovr rate, tube and baffle materials, unsupported tube spans, tube field layout, shell diameter, and inlet/outlet configuration. Section 6 of these Standards contains information which is 34 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 intended to alert the designer o potential vibration problems, In any case, an consistent wth Paragraph G-5, the manufacturer is not responsible or liable for any direct, indirect, or consequential damages resulting from vibration. RCB-4.6 IMPINGEMENT BAFFLES AND EROSION PROTECTION The following paragraphs provide limitations to prevent or minimize erosion of tube bundle components at the entrance and exit areas, These limitations have no correlation to tube vibration and the designer should refer to Section 6 for information regarding this phenomenon. RCB-4.61 SHELL SIDE IMPINGEMENT PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS ‘An impingement plate, or other means to protect the tube bundle against impinging fluids, shall be provided when entrance line values of p V? exceed the following: non-abrasive, single phase fluids, 1500 (2232); all other liquids, including a liquid at its boiling point, 500 (744). For all other gases and vapors, including all nominally saturated vapors, and for liquid vapor mixtures, impingement protection is required. V/ is the linear velocity of the fluid in feet per second (meters per second) and (is its density in pounds per cubic foot (kilograms per cubic meter). A property designed diffuser may be used to reduce line velocities at shell entrance. *RCB-4.62 SHELL OR BUNDLE ENTRANCE AND EXIT AREAS In no case shall the shell or bundle entrance or exit area produce a value of p Vin excess of 4,000 (5953) where Vis the linear velocity of the fluid in feet per second (meters per second) and 9 is its density in pounds per cubic foot (kilograms per cubic meter). *RCB-4.621 SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITH IMPINGEMENT PLATE When an impingement plate is provided, the flow area shall be considered the Unrestricted area between the inside diameter of the shell at the nozzle and the face of the impingement plate. *RCB-4,622 SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITHOUT IMPINGEMENT PLATE For determining the area available for flow at the entrance or exit of the shell where there is no impingement plate, the flow area between the tubes within the projection of the nozzle bore and the actual unrestricted radial flow area from under the nozzle or dome measured between the tube bundle and shell inside diameter may be considered *RCB-4.623 BUNDLE ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITH IMPINGEMENT PLATE ‘When an impingement plate is provided under a nozzle, the flow area shall be the Unrestricted area between the tubes within the compartments between baffles and/or tubesheet. *RCB-4.624 BUNDLE ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITHOUT IMPINGEMENT PLATE For determining the area available for flow at the entrance or exit of the tube bundle where there is no impingement plate, the flow area between the tubes within the compartments between baffles and/or tubesheet may be considered. RCB-4.63 TUBE SIDE Consideration shall be given to the need for special devices to prevent erosion of the tube ends under the following conditions: (1) Use of an axial inlet nozzle. (2) Liquid p 1”? is in excess of 6000 (8928), where I’ is the linear velocity in feet per second (meter per second), and pis its density in pounds per cubic foot (kilograms per cubic meter) RCB-4.7 TIE RODS AND SPACERS Tie rods and spacers, or other equivalent means of tying the baffle system together, shall be provided to retain all transverse baffles and tube support plates securely in position Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 35SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B R-4.71 NUMBER AND SIZE OF TIE RODS Table R-4.71 shows suggested tle rod count and diameter for various sizes of heat exchangers. Other combinations of tie rod number and diameter with equivalent metal area are permissible; however, no fewer than four tie rods, and no diameter less than 3/8" (@.5 mm) shall be used. Any baffle segment requires a minimum of three points of support. TABLE R-4.71 TIE ROD STANDARDS Dimensions in inches (mm) Nominal Tie Rod Minimum Shell Diameter Diameter | Number of Tie Rods. 6-15 152.98) 3/8 (95) 4 16-27 (406-686) 3/8 (9.5) 6 28-33 11-838) 4/2 (12.7) 6 34-48 (864-1219) 1/2 (12: 8 49 - 60 (1245-1524) 4/2 (12. 40 61-100___(1549-2540) 5/8 (15.9) 12 (CB-4.71 NUMBER AND SIZE OF TIE RODS Table CB-4.71 shows suggested tie rod count and diameter for various sizes of heat exchangers. Other combinations of tie rod number and diameter with equivalent metal area are permissible; however, no fewer than four tie rods, and no diameter less than 3/8" (9.5 mm) shall be used above 15 inch (381) nominal shell diameter. Any batfle segment Tequires a minimum of three points of suppor. TABLE CB-4.71 TIE ROD STANDARDS Dimensions in inches (mm) Nominal Tie Rod Minimum Shell Diameter Diameter | Number of Tie Rods. 6-15 (152-981 1/4 (64) 4 16-27 (406-686) 3/85) 6 28-33 11-838) 4/2 (12. 6 34-48 (964-1219) 4/2 (12. 8 100 2 1/2 (12. 10 61-100__(1549-2540) 5/8 (15.9) 42 RCB-4.8 SEALING DEVICES In addition to the battles, sealing devices should be installed when necessary to prevent excessive fluid by-passing around or through the tube bundle. Sealing devices may be seal strips, tie rods with spacers, dummy tubes, or combinations of these. RCB-4,9 KETTLE TYPE REBOILERS For kettle type rebollers, skid bars and a bundle hold-down may be provided. One method is shown in Figure RGB-4.9. Other methods which satisfy the intent are acceptable. Bundle hold-downs are ot required for fixed tubesheet kettles. 36 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 FIGURE RCB-4.9 (CROSS-SECTION END VIEW OF TUBE BUNDLE AND SHELL Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 37SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-5 FLOATING END CONSTRUCTION RCB-5.1 INTERNAL FLOATING HEADS (Types S and 7) R-5.11 MINIMUM INSIDE DEPTH OF FLOATING HEAD COVERS. For multipass floating head covers the inside depth shall be such that the minimum cross-over area for flow between successive tube passes is at least equal to 1.3 times the flow area through the tubes of one pass. For single pass floating head covers the depth at nozzle centerline shall be a minimum of one-third the inside diameter of the nozzle. CB-5.11 MINIMUM INSIDE DEPTH OF FLOATING HEAD COVERS For multipass floating head covers the inside depth shall be such that the minimum ‘cross-over area for flow between successive tube passes is at least equal to the fiow area through the tubes of one pass. For single pass floating head covers the depth at nozzle centerline shall be a minimum of one-third the inside diameter of the nozzle, RCB-5.12 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT Fabricated floating head covers shall be postweld heat treated when required by the Code or specified by the purchaser. RCB-5.13 INTERNAL BOLTING ‘The materials of construction for internal bolting for floating heads shall be suitable for the mechanical design and similar in corrosion resistance to the materials used for the shell interior, RCB-5.14 FLOATING HEAD BACKING DEVICES The material of construction for split rings or other internal floating head backing devices shall be equivalent in corrosion resistance to the material used for the shell interior. RCB-5.141 BACKING DEVICE THICKNESS (TYPE S) The required thickness of floating head backing devices shal be determined by the following formulas o minimum thickness shown in Figure RCB-5.141, using whichever thickness is greatest. BENDING af Ow: Ay) ers) wate 7 -[ L227)" 10° «am (WCHICY)]'? For Style "1 2(W CH) - Beto" Inches Metric 7. [agape ] x10? mm SHEAR ST ic = —— x 10° GZS Inehes Metric != GZS) sae where A= Ring OD, inches (mm) ‘As shown in Fig. Iv = Design bolt load (as ret. in Code Appendix 2), 1b. (KN) From Code Fig. 2-7.1 using K = A/B RCB-S.141, inches (mm) Bolt circle, inches (mm) Tubesheet OD, inches (mm) H = (C~B)/2, inches (mm) = Greater of Tor, inches (mm) 38 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 Code allowable stress in Sy, = Sof backing ring, psi (kPa) tension (using shell design S,, = Sof split key ring, psi (kPa) temperature), psi (kPa) Su = Sof tubesheet, psi (kPa) 0.85 , psi (kPa) NoTES 1. All references above are to ASME Code Section Vill, Division 1 2. Caution: For style &"D" check thickness in shear of the tubesheet if Su Sor 3. Caution: Style "C" check thickness in shear of the tubesheet if S,. < S, ‘See Figure RCB-5.141 for illustration of suggested styles. Other styles are permissible. FIGURE RCB 5.141 3/8"(9.5) eee )PTIONAL ¥7(25.4) | SSPUT RING: ie (win) Ir SEIN 1] wD tee ANGLE=45° (0.8 RAD) MIN, 75° (1.3 RAD) MAK STVEEVaAc STYLE _"B { 32°4(0.8) 4/2012) |OPTIONAL sou INC |-——|"T- 7a) SPUT RING: pes : Tr NS ‘SPLIT KEY RING. aa et (win) STYLE "D” ft + 108704) = SVL Gesce: Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 39SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-! 15 TUBE BUNDLE SUPPORTS When a removable shell cover is utilized, a partial support plate, or other suitable means, shall be provided to support the floating head end of the tube bundle. Ifa plate is used, the thickness shall equal or exceed the support plate thickness specified in Table R-4.41 or CB-4.41 as applicable for unsupported tube lengths over 60 inches (1524 mm) RCB-5.16 FLOATING HEAD NOZZLES The floating head nozzle and packing box for a single pass exchanger shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs RCB-5.21, RCB-5.22 and RCB-5.23. 5.17 PASS PARTITION PLATES. ‘The nominal thickness of floating head pass partitions shall be identical to those shown in RCB-9.13 for channels and bonnets. RCB-5.2 OUTSIDE PACKED FLOATING HEADS (Type P) RCB-5.21 PACKED FLOATING HEADS ‘The cylindrical surface of packed floating head tubeshests and skirts, where in contact with packing (including allowance for expansion), shall be given a fine machine finish equivalent to 63 microinches. RCB-5.22 PACKING BOXES ‘A machine finish shall be used on the shell or packing box where the floating tubesheet or nozzle passes through. If packing of braided material is used, a minimum of three rings of Packing shall be used for 150 PSI (109¢ kPa) maximum design pressure and a minimum of four rings shall be used for 300 PSI (2068 kPa) maximum design pressure. For pressures less than 150 PSI (1034 kPa), temperatures below 300° F (149° C), and non-hazardous service, fewer rings of packing may be used. Figure RCB-5.22 and Table RCB-5.22 show typical details and dimensions of packing boxes. 40 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTIONS FIGURE RCB-5.22 PACKING GLAND PACKING BOX a o 300 PSI(2068 kPo) al c 150 PSI(1034 kPo) SA CAEN TSZ 4/32"(0.8) MAX E F Design Bosed On Square Pocking of Other Suitoble Broided Packing Moterials, Dimensions, ond Shope Moy Be Used ‘TABLE RCB-5.22 TYPICAL DIMENSIONS FOR PACKED FLOATING HEADS 4180 PSI(1034 kPa) AND 300 PSI(2068 kPa) WITH 600 °F (316° C) MAX. TEMP. Dimensions in inches A 8 c D E F BOLTS Size (Min) NO. SIZE 6-8 aja | 7/16 3/4 4 5/8 9-13, 3/8 | 7/16 3/4 6 5/8 14-17 s/s | 7/16 3/4 8 5/8 18-21 3a | 7/16 3/4 10 5/8 22-23 37a | 7/16 3/4 12 5/8 24-29 v2 | 9/6 4 16 5/8 30-33, 2 | 9/6 1 20 5/8 34-43 a2 | 9/16 1 24 5/8 44-51 sje | 11/16 14a | 28 5/8 52-60 se | 16 | 24/8 ja} 32 5/8 Dimensions in Milimeters a B c D E F BOLTS Size (ny NO. SIZE 152-208 oss | tt | 3175 | 4128 | 2540 | 19.05 4 M16 229-330 953 | 111 | 3175 | 4128 | 2540 | 19.05 6 M6 356-432 asa | init | 3175 | 4128 | 25.40 | 19:05 8 Mi6 487-533, 953 | inti | 3175 | 4128 | 2540 | 1905 | 10 M6 559-584 953 | itt | 3175 | 4128 | 2540 | 1905 12 M6 610-737 | 1270 | 1429 | 4445 | 5715 | 2858 | 25.40 | 16 Mie 762-898 | 1270 | 14.29 | 4445 | 5715 | 2858 | 25.40 | 20 Mie aod-i002 | 1270 | 1429 | 4445 | 5715 | 2858 | 2540 | 24 Mis ivie-t295 | 1588 | 1746 | 5398 | 6985 | 3175 | 31.75 | 28 Mis 1921-1524 | 1588 | 1746 | 5398 | 6995 | 3175 | 31.75 | 32 M6 Note: Nominal size of packing is same as dimension "A" Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association aSECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-5.23 PACKING MATERIAL Purchaser shall specify packing material which is compatible with the shell side process conditions. RCB-5.24 FLOATING TUBESHEET SKIRT The floating tubesheet skirt normally shall extend outward. When the skirt must extend inward, a suitable method shall be used to prevent stagnant areas between the shell side nozzle and the tubesheet. .25 PASS PARTITION PLATES ‘The nominal thickness of floating head pass partitions shall be identical to those shown in Paragraph RCB-9.13 for channels and bonnets. RCB-5.3 EXTERNALLY SEALED FLOATING TUBESHEET (Type W) RB-5.31 LANTERN RING ‘The extornally sealed floating tubesheet using square braided packing materials shall be used only for water, steam, air, lubricating oil, or similar services. Design temperature shall not, exceed 375 °F (191 °C) . Design pressure shall be limited according to Table RB-5.31 TABLE RB-5.31 MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE FOR EXTERNALLY SEALED FLOATING TUBESHEETS Nominal Shell Inside Diameter | Maximum Design Pressure Inches (mm) PSI (kPa) 6-24 (152-610) 300 (2068) 25-42 (635-1067 150 (1034) 43-60 (1092-1524) 75 (517) 61-100 (1549-2540) 50_(345) C-5.31 LANTERN RING The externally sealed floating tubesheet shall be used only for water, steam, ar, lubricating oll, or similar services. Design temperature, pressure and shell diameter shall be limited by the service, joint configuration, packing material and number of packing rings, to a maximum design pressure of 600 pal (2137 KPa). RCB-5.32 LEAKAGE PRECAUTIONS The design shall incorporate provisions in the lantern ring so that any leakage past the packing wil leak to atmosphere. When endless packing rings are used, one ring of packing shall be used on each side of the lantern ring. For braided packing materials with a seam, a minimum of two rings of packing shall be used on each side of the lantern ring, with the seams staggered during assembly. RCB-5.33 PACKING MATERIAL Purchaser shall specify packing material which is compatible with the process conditions. RCB-5.34 SPECIAL DESIGNS ‘Special designs incorporating other sealing devices may be used for the applications in Paragraph RB-5.31 and C-5.31 or other special service requirements. Provisions for leak detection shall be considered. 42 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTIONS RCB-6 GASKETS RCB-6.1 TYPE OF GASKETS Gaskets shall be selected which have a continuous periphery with no radial leak paths. This shall not paclude gaskets made continuous by welding or other methods which produce a homogeneous nd, R-6.2 GASKET MATERIALS Metal jacketed or solid metal gaskets shall be used for internal floating head joints, all joints for pressures of 300 psi (2068 kPa) and over, and for all joints in contact with hydrocarbons. Other ‘gasket materials may be specified by agreement between purchaser and manufacturer to meet Special service conditions and flange design. When two gasketed joints are compressed by the Same bating, provisions shall be made so that both gaskets seal, but nether gasket is crushed atthe requir load. CB-6.2 GASKET MATERIALS For design pressures of 200 psi (2068 KPa) and lower, compostion gaskets may be used for external joints, unless temperature or corrosive nature of contained fluid indicates otherwise. Metal jacketed, jlled or solid metal gaskets shall be used forall joints for design pressures greater than 300 psi (2068 kPa) and for internal floating head joints. Other gasket materials may be speotfied by agreement between purchaser and manufacturer to meet special service conditions and fange design, When two gasketed joints are compressed by the same bolting, provisions shall be made so that both gaskets seal, but neither gasket is crushed at the required bolt load. RCB-6.3 PERIPHERAL GASKETS RC-6.31 The minimum width of peripheral ring gaskets for external joints shall be 3/8" (9.5 mm) for shell sizes through 23 inches (584 mm) nominal diameter and 1/2" (12.7 mm) for all larger shell sizes. B-6.31 ‘The minimum width of peripheral ring gaskets for external joints shall be 3/8" (9.5 mm) for Shell sizes through 28 Inches (584 mn) nominal ameter and 1/2" (12.7 mm) for al arger shell sizes. Full face gaskets shall be used for all cast iron flanges. RCB-6.32 The minimum width of peripheral ring gaskets for internal joints shall be 1/4” (6.4 mm) for all shell sizes, R633 Peripheral gasket contact surfaces shall have a flatness tolerance of + 1/32" (0.8 mm) ‘maximum deviation from any reference plane. This maximum deviation shall not occur in less than a 20 ° (0.3 Rad) arc. cB-6.33 Flatness of peripheral gasket contact surfaces shall be sufficient to meet the requirements of Paragraph RCB-1.3. RCB-6.4 PASS PARTITION GASKETS. ‘The width of gasket web for pass partitions of channels, bonnets, and floating heads shall be not less than 1/4" (6.4 mm) for shell sizes through 23 inches (684 mm) nominal diameter and not less than 3/8" (8.5 mm) for all larger shell sizes. R-6.5 GASKET JOINT DETAILS Gasketed joints shall be of a confined type. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 43SECTIONS MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B (CB-6.5 GASKET JOINT DETAILS Gasket joints shall be of a confined or unconfined type, FIGURE RCB-6.5 —~uaA— a — Confined Gasket Unconfined Gasket For dimensions and tolerances, see Figure F-3 Confined Gasket SPIRAL WOUND GASKET WITH OUTER METAL RING RCB-6.6 SPARE GASKETS Unless specifically stated otherwise, spare gaskets include only main body flange gaskets. 44 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB RCB-7 TUBESHEETS RCB-7.1 TUBESHEET THICKNESS RCB-7.11 APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS AND LIMITATIONS: Subject to the requirements of the Code, the formulas and design criteria contained in Paragraphs RCB-7.1 through RCB-7.25 are applicable, with limitations noted, when the following normal design conditions are met: (1) $lzgand pressure are within the scope of the TEMA Mechanical Standards, Paragraph 14 (2) Tube-to-tubesheet joints are expanded, welded or otherwise constructed such as to effectively contribute to the support of the tubesheets (except U-tube tubesheets) (8) Tubes are uniformly distributed (no large untubed areas) ‘Abnormal conditions of support or loading are considered Special Cases, and are defined in Paragraph RCB-7.3 which is referenced, when pertinent, in subsequent paragraphs, RCB-7.12 EFFECTIVE TUBESHEET THICKNESS Except as qualified by Paragraphs RCB-7.121 and 7.122, the effective tubesheet thickness shall be the thickness measured at the bottom of the tube side pass partition groove and/or hal side longtuinal bale groove minus corrosion allowance in excess ofthe groove jepths. RCB-7.121 APPLIED TUBESHEET FACINGS ‘The thickness of applied facing material shall not be included in the minimum or effective tubesheet thickness. RCB-7.122 INTEGRALLY CLAD TUBESHEETS The thickness of cladding materi in integrally clad plates and cladding deposted by welding may be included in the effective tubesheet thickness as allowed by the Code. RCB-7,13 REQUIRED EFFECTIVE TUBESHEET THICKNESS The required effective tubeshee thickness for any type of heat exchanger shall be determined from the following paragraphs, for both tube side and shell side conditions, corroded or uncorroded, using whichever hickngss is greatest, Both tubesheets of xed tubesheet exchangers shall have the same thickness, unless the provisions of Paragraph RCB-7.166 are satisfied. R-7.131 MINIMUM TUBESHEET THICKNESS WITH EXPANDED TUBE JOINTS Inno case shall the total thickness minus corrosion allowanee, in the areas into which tubes are to be expanded, of any tubesheet be less than the outside diameter of tubes. In no case shall the total tubesheet thickness, including corrosion allowance, be less than 3/4" (19.1 mm). C-7.191 MINIMUM TUBESHEET THICKNESS WITH EXPANDED TUBE JOINTS Inno case shall the total thickness minus corrosion allowance, in the areas into which tubes are to be expanded, of any tubesheet be less than three-fourths of the tube. outside diameter for tubes of 1° (25.4 mm) OD and smaller, 7/8" (22.2 mm) for 1-1/4" {21.9 mm) OD, 1 (25.4 mn) for 11/2 81 mm) OD, or 1-1/4" (31.8 mm) for 2" (60.8 mm) B-7.131 MINIMUM TUBESHEET THICKNESS WITH EXPANDED TUBE JOINTS Inno case shall the total thickness minus corrosion allowance, in the areas into which tubes are to be expanded, of any tubesheet be less than three-fourths of the tube outside diameter for tubes of 1" (25.4 mm) OD and smaller, 7/8" (22.2 mm) for 1-1/4 (31.8 mm) OD, 1" (25.4) for 1-1/2" (38.1 mm) OD, or 1-1/4" (31.8 mm) for 2" (60.8 mm) DD. In no case shall the total tubesheet thickness, including corrosion allowance, be less than 3/4" (19.1 mm). Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 45SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-7.132 TUBESHEET FORMULA - BENDING GLP Tae .55 = Effective tubesheet thickness, inches (mm). Code allowable stress in tension, psi (kPa), for tubesheet material at design metal temperatures. (See Paragraph RCB-1.42). For outside packed floating head exchangers (Type P), shall be as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.141, psi (kPa). For packed floating end exchangers with lantern ring (Type W), for the floating {tubesheet, P shall be as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.142, psi (KPa). For fixed tubesheet exchangers, P shall be as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.163, RCB-7.164 or RCB-7.165, psi (kPa). For other type exchangers, P shall be the design pressure, shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on the opposite side, or differential [pressure when specified by the purchaser, psi (kPa) For U-tube tubesheets (Type U), where the tubesheet Is extended as a flange for bolting to heads or shells with ring type gaskets, P= P,+P, or P.+P» Jdepending upon the side under consideration. where pn ok ME F2-G and Mf *is defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1342, psi (kPa) For floating tubesheets (Type 1), where the tubesheet is extended for bolting to heads with ring type gaskets, the effect of the moment acting upon the extension 's defined in Paragraph RCB-7.162 in terms of equivalent tube side and shell side bolting pressures except G shall be the gasket G of the floating tubesheet. P psi (kPa) is given by the greatest absolute value of the following: Pa Pit Pa OrP=P,-Pe: orP=P, orP=P, |G shall be either in the corroded ot uncorroded condition, dependent upon which condition is under consideration. For fixed tubesheet exchangers, G shall be the shell inside diameter. For kettle type exchangers, shall be the port inside diameter. For any floating tubesheet (except divided), G shall be the G used for the stationary tubesheet using the Pas defined for other type exchangers. Type T tubesheets shall also be checked using the pressure P defined above with bolting and using the actual gasket G of the floating tubeshest For a divided floating tubesheet, C shall be 1.41(d) where d is the length of the shortest span measured over centertines of gaskets. For other type exchangers, G shall be the diameter, inches (mm), over which the pressure under consideration is acting. (e.g. Pressure acting on the gasketed side of a tubesheet, G = the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction as defined in the Code. Pressure acting on an integral side of a tubesheet, G = the inside diameter of the integral pressure part.) 46 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 0.785 1 [aaa forsquae or rotate square tube patterns For integrally finned tubes, the OD of the tube in the tubesheet shall be used. For unsupported tubesheets (e.g.: U-tube tubesheets) gasketed both sides, F 11.25. For supported tubesheets (e.9.: fixed tubesheets and floating type tant ets Gusketed bo Sides = 1S one For unsupported tubesheets (e.g : U-tube tubesheets) integral with either or both sides, ¥ shall be the value determined by the curve U in Figure RCB-7.132. Far supported tubesheets (e.g. fixed tubesheets and floating type tubesheets) integral with either or both sides, / shall be the Value [determined by the curve H in Figure RCB-7.132. FIGURE RCB-7.132 1.30 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 009 0.10 ‘Wall Thickness /IO Ratio For Integral Tubesheets NOTE: If the tubesheet is integral with both the tube side and shell side, Wall Thickness and ID are to be based on the side yielding the smaller value of F. See Table RCB-7.132 for illustration of the application of the above equations. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 47SECTION 5 48 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C ‘TABLE RCB - 7.132 ‘TUBESHEET THICKNESS FOR BENDING Inside diameter im forkotie type | tubesheet type exchangers — Juni) Te tan bs modneaTor al aca tae alee eae sein? oF nas oe re en Feet ner -[ 7 Tue nai -| Se |] “aruton pt Wea) fr pattern tu pattern fine o5) ‘tubesheet material at ~S:smagraly tape ues, [82 egratySopes woes, | Selgriseal ‘the OD of the tube in the ‘the OD of the tube in the ‘temperature. (See Recharmaes ina? | me She mebes inte | Balser ece a) FE c P Sorsae [abe Sao a es @ 70 Geer Guid | Deugn posmen ca Pe goiter ade Senge SS teers [oan | en fretenton poate oe irene eee eee eat ® iz Geatere [Gastar Yoon proves Pa SOM RS eats aoe Wy sale orats nce ee fessor cppcate aera een mer Bice a Teo Fore AG571G2 [Genter [OrannaiO [Doan prose pal Pa) cae | Seats, setae ate: {17 100(75)]) ROB-7-182 conecied for A ee Co Eee ae eT a ern ne wen spetisg by g F Min = 08 ‘customer, or fixed tubesheet Pee eeners Tee Te ey mae @ Shell ID or port | Gasket G (shell Peart | it pcg lence sso yee |e see note fe Shell Dor port | Channel ID (she Orne Table RCB - 7.132 continued next page Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 TABLE RCB - 7.132 (Continued) F & P Shel Sido Tube Side Prossu Presture 0 ‘See Figure ROB7.132. | Gasket 6 (Channel iD | Design pressure, pel KPa), [17 1o0(%5)] | sresice shell side, or tube side, per 7 i) Paragraph AC87.182 12 ‘See note 1 corrected for vacuum when present on opposite side, or Note: F Max = 1.25 diferential pressure when F Min = 1.00 specified by custome, @ +4 Shell Der por | Gasket fesse ameter [tbe sce sete exchangers | See note + Shell Dor por | Channel ID Inside olamoter or kettle type exchangers ; ay ‘ Same G as used fo etationary ‘ubesheet Design pressure, pal hPa, shell side, or tube side, per Paragraph ACB. 132 Genres Yo vnc yen event on opps sie, ot Gierental pressure when Spectiea by customer tubecheet 5 % Spe ges aaeoey,_| SoPonoan rear atin TRS Se Sadar ane a oe fea OS Jd = Shortest span measured over Bs coirrariaa | eeaaaes a : IE ES J Brat Sa ena 7 % So Cagaersairay | Daageoe paar) amen [seep ee weaeremnaere Sam a 3 % SomCogesaioay | aera ROB7.1411 Notes: 1, Gasket G =the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction as defined in the Code. ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 49SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-7.133 TUBESHEET FORMULA - SHEAR, 7a 0:31_Dil P ) iS where T = Effective tubesheet thickness, inches (mm) 4A D.= == Equivalent diameter of the tube center limit perimeter, inches (nm) C= Perimeter of the tube layout measured stepwise in increments of one tube pitch from center-to-center of the outermost tubes, inches (mm) Figure RCB-7.133 shows the application to typical triangular and square tube patterns FIGURE RCB-7.133 " C* (perimeter) is the length of the heavy line Total area enclosed by perimeter C, square inches (mm 2) ,= Outside tube diameter, inches (mm), for integrally finned tubes, the OD of the tube in the tubesheet shall be used. Pitch = Tube center-to-center spacing, inches (mm) For outside packed floating head exchangers (Type P), Pshall be as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.141, psi (kPa). For fixed tubesheet exchangers, P shall be as defined in Paragraphs RCB-7.163, RCB-7.164 or RCB-7.165, psi (kPa). For other type exchangers, ? shall be the design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on the ‘opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by the purchaser. S= Code allowable stress in tension, psi (KPa). for tubesheet material at design metal temperature. (See Paragraph RCB-1.42.) NOTE: Shear will not control when P a. \ Zeroli- 3° ( ran) ‘See Table RCB-7.133 for illustration of the application of the above equations. 50 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B TABLE RCB-7.133, SECTION 5 TUBESHEET THICKNESS FOR SHEAR ‘ube side pressure, whichover is ; To hati ean aa (8) wees (hg “Outside tude diameter, | Pitch. jube spacing, |. =Code allowable stress in Inohes nm). integraly | entrso-center, inches tension, psi (kPa). For inned tubes, the OD of the | fmm). {ubeshet material at design tube n the tubesheet shall be metal temperature (See ses. paragraph ROB-1.42) P Di @ Design pressure, psi (KPa), shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on ‘opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by customer ® Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube [C= Perimeter of tube layout side, corrected for vacuum when present on measured stepwise in ‘opposite side, or differential pressure when inerements of one specified by customer SSutermost tubes, in Inches (mn). See Figure ROE? 153, total area enclosed by C in square inches (mm 2). See Figure ROB 7.133 © edly Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on ‘opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by customer, or for fixed tubesheet type units, as defined in paragraphs RCB-7.163 thru RCB-7.165 ‘TABLE RCB-7.133 Continued next page Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 51SECTION 5 52 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B TABLE RCB-7.133 Continued P Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by customer F=> Hr am) & Design pressure, psi (kPa). Shell side or tube ‘side, corrected for vacuum when present on ‘opposite side, or differential pressure when speeified by customer Sy a D NESS ff 4 4 Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on ‘opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by customer @ Design pressure, psi (kPa), tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on the sheli side o Defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1412 Perimeter of tube layout ‘measured stepwise in increments of one tubeto-tube pitch Centerto-conter of the ‘outermost tubes, In Inches (mm). See Figure Ree 433 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-7.134 TUBESHEET FORMULA - TUBESHEET FLANGED EXTENSION This paragraph is applicable only when bolt loads are transmitted, at the bolt circle, to the extended portion of a tubesheet. The peripheral portion extended to form a flange for bolting to heads or shells with ring type gaskets may differ in thickness from that, Portion inside the shell calculated in Paragraph RCB-7.132. The minimum thickness of the extended portion may be calculated from the following paragraphs. RCB-7.1341 FIXED TUBESHEET OR FLOATING TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS Too oa M_(r?=143,71r?_ In 2" S (A-6)(1+1.86 7?) where 7, = Minimum thickness of the extended portion, inches (mm) A= Outside diameter of the tubesheet, inches (mm) A Yeates M = the larger of M , or M, as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.162 Note: The moments may differ from the moments acting on the attached flange. Sand G are defined in Paragraph RCB-7.132 RCB-7.1342 U-TUBE TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS M*+M+0.39 PC? w (A-6) § where T= Minimum thickness of the extended portion, inches (mm) °- MG - 0.39w PG? TT = Effective tubesheet thickness calculated from Paragraph RCB-7.132, inches (mm) (A-6) (M = the larger of Mf, or M, as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.162 Note: The moments may differ from the moments acting on the attached flange. F , Gand njare defined in Paragraph RCB-7.132 P= P,orP, or maximum differential pressure, as applicable. Note: See Paragraph RCB-7.13421 for procedure. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 53SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-7.13421 ITERATIVE CALCULATION METHODS: Method 1 (1) Cateulate iM * assuming T,, = 7 (2) Calculate P,, then P from Paragraph RCB-7.132. (@) Calculate 7 from Paragraph RCB-7.132 (4) Calculate T , from Paragraph RCB-7.1342, (6) Compare T and 7°,; it is greater than T-,, calculation is terminated. Use T calculated. Do not proceed to Step (6). (6) If 7, is greater than T, oF i itis desired to reduce T , below T, select a new ratio of T/T that is less than 1 and repeat Steps (1) through (6). (Note: 7/7 ratio is, calculated using actual corroded thickness of the part. Method 2 - (ALTERNATIVE METHOD) (1) Set m= =m (2) Calculate P then P from Paragraph RCB-7.132. (@) Calculate T from Paragraph RCB-7.132. (4) Calculate 7 , from Paragraph RCB-7,1342, (6) Recaloulate M* = - Musing values of T and T , obtained in Steps (3) and (4) and 1s defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1842. (Note 7, /T must be < 1). (6) If| M1* | obtained in Step (6) is less than | M |from Step (1), calculation is, terminated. Use 7 , calculated in Step (4). Do not proceed to Step (7). (7) If] M* | obtained from Step (6) is greater than | M |from Step (1), repeat Step (2) using M* calculated in Step (6). Then repeat Steps (3) through (6). (@) Iflast calculated | 1* Is less than the previous | M* | used to calculate P ., calculation is terminated. Use last calculated value of T ,. (@) Iflast calculated | 1 | is greater than the previous | M* | used to calculate P ., repeat Step (2) using last calculated M * Then repeat Steps (8) through (5). Continue this process until Step (8) is satisfied. 54 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-7.14 PACKED FLOATING TUBESHEET TYPE EXCHANGERS EFFECTIVE PRESSURE RCB-7.141 OUTSIDE PACKED FLOATING HEAD (TYPE P) ‘The thickness of tubesheets in exchangers whose floating heads are packed at the outside diameter of the tubesheet or a cylindrical extension thereof shall be calculated like stationary tubesheets using the formulas for /”as defined below. RCB-7.1411 EFFECTIVE DESIGN PRESSURE - BENDING ‘The effective design pressure to be used with the formula shown in Paragraph RCB-7.132 is given by: pore! 25(D?-D. yo-ba] DF?G? where P= Design pressure, psi (kPa), tube side (For vacuum design, ? is negative.) P, = Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side (For vacuum design, P , is negative.) D = Outside diameter of the floating tubesheet, inches (mm) [aa = x)= Equivalent diameter ofthe tube center limit perimeter, inches (mm), using A as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.133 F and Gare as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.132 RCB-7.1412 EFFECTIVE DESIGN PRESSURE - SHEAR ‘The effective design pressure to be used with the formula shown in Paragraph RCB-7.133 is given De using terms as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1411. RCB-7.142 PACKED FLOATING TUBESHEET WITH LANTERN RING (TYPE W) ‘The thickness of floating tubesheets in exchangers whose floating tubesheets are packed at the outside diameter with return bonnet or channel bolted to the shell fiange, shall be calculated as for gasketed stationary tubesheet exchangers, using P defined as the tube side design pressure, psi (kPa), corrected for vacuum when, present on the shell side. itis incorrect to utilize the shell side pressure, RCB-7.15 DOUBLE TUBESHEETS: Double tubesheets may be used where the operating conditions indicate their desirabilty The diversity of construction types makes it impractical to specify design rules for all cases. Paragraphs RCB-7.154, RCB-7. 155 and RCB-7. 156 provide the design rules for determining the thickness of double tubesheets for some of the most commonly used construction types. RCB-7.151 MINIMUM THICKNESS Neither component of a double tubesheet shall have a thickness less than that required by Paragraph RCB-7.131. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 55SECTIONS MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-7.152 VENTS AND DRAINS Double tubesheets of the edge welded type shall be provided with vent and drain connections at the high and iow points of the enclosed space. RCB-7.153 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS When double tubesheets are used, special attention shall be given to the ability of the tubes to withstand, without damage, the mechanical and thermal loads imposed on them by the construction. RCB-7.154 INTEGRAL DOUBLE TUBESHEETS ‘The tubesheets are connected in a manner which distributes axial load and radial thermal expansion loads between tubesheets by means of an interconnecting element capable of preventing individual radial growth of tubesheets. It is assumed that the element is rigid enough to mutually transfer all thermal and mechanical radial loads between the tubesheets. Additionally, itis understood that the tubes are rigid enough to mutually transfer all mechanical and thermal axial loads between the tubesheets, FIGURE RCB-7.154 RCB 7.1541 TUBESHEET THICKNESS Calculate the total combined tubesheet thickness (7) per Paragraph RCB-7.13. where T= Greater of the thickness, inches (mm), resulting from. Paragraphs RCB-7.132 or ROB.7. 195 using the folowing variable definitions: G= Per Paragraph ROB-7.13, inches (mm), using worst case values of shell side or tube side tubesheets at their respective design temperature. Lower of the Code allowable stress, psi (kPa), for either ‘component tubesheet at its respective design temperature. Per Paragraph RCB-7.13, using worst case values of shell side or tube side tubesheets at their respective design temperature. All other variables are per Paragraph RCB-7. 13. Establish the thickness of each individual tubesheet so that, + ¢, > T and the minimum individual tubesheet thicknesses (and ¢ 2) shall be the greater of Paragraphs RCB-7.13 or RCB.7.134, as applicable. where Thickness of tube side tubesheet, inches (mm). t,= Thickness of shell side tubesheet, inches (mm). 56 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTIONS RCB-7.1842 INTERCONNECTING ELEMENT DESIGN - SHEAR The radial shear stress (v), psi (kPa), at attachment due to differential thermal expansion of tubesheets shall not exceed 80% of the lower Code allowable stress (5) of either of the tubesheet materials or the interconnecting element at their respective design temperature. The shear is defined as: (Metric) L-= Thickness of interconnecting element, inches (mm). where : GE) (Fe) |Ca,AT~a2AT2 (Fi )(t2F2)| zr Fn | RE Se ee i etic) Fe | CE i)* CaF) ce where: F , = Force per unit measure due to differential radial expansion, Ibf/in {kN/mm), EF, = Modulus of Elasticity of tubesheet 1 at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). F,~ Modulus of Elasticity of tubesheet 2 at mean metal temperature psi (KPa), a, = Coefficlent of thermal expansion for tubesheet 1 at mean metal temperature, inches/inch/ ° F (mm/mm/ °C). a, = Coofficient of thermal expansion for tubesheet 2 at mean metal temperature, inches/inch/° F (mm/mm/ °C). Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean metal temperature for tubesheet 1, °F (°C). T= Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean metal temperature for tubesheet 2, °F (0) > ta i RCB-7.1543 INTERCONNECTING ELEMENT DESIGN - BENDING AND TENSILE The combined stresses from bending due to differential thermal expansion of tubesheets and axial tension due to thermal expansion of tubes shall not exceed 1.5 times the Code allowable stress (S) of the interconnecting element. ‘The combined total stress of interconnecting element (6 ,), psi (kPa), is given by; Og = 0545728 1.5S Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 87SECTION 5 58 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB The stress due to axial thermal expansion of tubes (+), psi (kPa), is defined as: oe ere Sr= la, ae GC) Eales (Mettio) ore = |G where (arATr- ae AT e)(ErAr)(Ee Ae) (ErAr)* (Bede) (ar AT r-agATe)(ErAr (Ee Ae) (ErAr)+(EeAe) ‘The stress due to bending caused by differential thermal expansion of tubesheets G z , psi (kPa), is defined as 6Me ne OMe (Metric) 04 = Fx 10° (Metric) Fre = x10°° 6 ‘The bending moment is defined as: Feg 2 Me M,= Bending moment per unit measure acting on interconnecting element, inch-pounds per inch (mm-kN/mm). = Spacing between tubesheets, inches (mm). The spacing between tubesheets for an integral double tubeshest is left to the discretion of the manufacturer. For other types of double tubesheets, the minimum ‘spacing is determined in accordance with Paragraphs RCB-7.1552 or RCB-7.1562, as applicable. Coefficient of thermal expansion of tubes at mean metal temperature, inches/inch/ °F (mm/mm/ °C). Coefficient of thermal expansion of interconnecting element at mean ‘metal temperature, inches/inch/° F (mm/mm/ °C). AT, = Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean metal ‘temperature for tubes, °F (° C). AT ,= Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean metal temperature for interconnecting element, ° F (°C). E , = Modulus of Elasticity of tubes at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa), E , = Modulus of Elasticity of interconnecting element at mean metal temperature, psi (ka). ‘Ar = Total cross sectional ara of tubes between tubesheets, square Inches (mi Ag Talal rss sectional area of rterconnecting element, square inches (rm F +, = Resultant force due to the difference in thermal expansion between tubes and element, Ibf (kN). Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-7.1544 TUBE STRESS CONSIDERATION - AXIAL STRESS ‘The axial stresses in the tubes due to thermal expansion and pressure load shall not exceed the Code allowable stress (S) of the tubes at design temperature. The total combined stress of the tubes (¢), psi (kPa), is given by: Op" Opt Or SS ‘The axial stress due to pressure (o ,), psi (KPa), is defined as: Px(G?~ Nd?) eas where P= Greater of shell side or tube side design pressure, psi (kPa). Per Paragraph RCB-7.13, inches (mm), = Number of tubes. by: (Metric) ory = Ar RCB-7.155 CONNECTED DOUBLE TUBESHEETS: The tubesheets are connected in a manner which distributes axial load between tubesheets by means of an interconnecting cylinder. The effect of the differential radial Growth between tubesheets is a major factor in tube stresses and spacing between tubesheets. It is assumed the interconnecting cylinder and tubes are rigid enough to ‘mutually transfer all mechanical and thermal axial loads between the tubesheets. FIGURE RCB-7.155 RCB-7.1551 TUBESHEET THICKNESS Calculate the total combined tubesheet thickness (7) per Paragraph RCB-7.13 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 59SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B where T = Greater of the thickness, inches (mm), resulting from Paragraphs RCB-7.132 or RCB-7.133 using variables as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1541. Establish the thickness of each individual tubesheet so that‘, + ¢, > T and the minimum individual tubesheet thickness (¢ , and ¢ 2) shall be the greater of Paragraph RCB-7.13 or RCB-7.134, when applicable. where 1, = Thickness of tube side tubesheet, inches (mm). 1, = Thickness of shell side tubesheet, inches (mm) RCB-7.1552 MINIMUM SPACING BETWEEN TUBESHEETS The minimum spacing (g), inches (mm), between tubesheets required to avoid overstress of tubes resulting from differential thermal growth of individual tubesheets is given by: __ [are 9° O27Y, where d,= Tube OD between tubesheets, inches (mm). ¥ r= ld strength ofthe tube material at maximum metal temperature, pl a r= Differential radial expansion between adjacent tubesheet (Measured from center of tubesheet to D r:). inches (mm) ar (72 )caare-e37,)1 where Dy, = Outer tube limit, inches (mm). RCB.-7.1553 INTERCONNECTING ELEMENT DESIGN - AXIAL STRESS The interconnecting element axial stress (3-r-), psi (kPa), due to the thermal expansion of the tubes shall not exceed the Code allowable stress (S) of the interconnecting element at design temperature. The axial stress is defined as: Fre Sua, Bre 6 (Metric) re = G—* 10! where (apAT p-aeAT e)(ErAr)(E ede) (ErAr)+ (Ee Ae) (Motic) Fyp=Ct2OTr=aeOT EAN EAD ge (ErAr)* (Ee Ae) 60 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 RCB-7.1554 TUBE STRESS CONSIDERATIONS - AXIAL STRESS ‘The axial stresses in the tubes due to thermal expansion and pressure load shall not exceed the Code allowable stress (S) of the tubes at design temperature. The total combined stress of tubes (0), psi (kPa), is given by: 6 pt 0778S The axial stress due to pressure (6 ,), psi (kPa), is defined as: _ Pm(G?~ Nd, *) f 4A; where P = Greater of shell side or tube side design pressure, psi (kPa). G = Per Paragraph RCB-7.13, inches (mm). Number of tubes. 1, = Tube OD between tubesheets, Inches (mm). ‘The stress due to axial thermal expansion of tubes (6 ,), psi (kPa), is determined by: (Metric) or, RCB-7.156 SEPARATE DOUBLE TUBESHEETS, ‘The tubesheets are connected only by the interconnecting tubes. The effect of differential radial growth between tubesheets is a major factor in tube stresses and spacing between tubesheets. It is assumed that no loads are transferred between the tubesheets. FIGURE RCB-7.156 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 61SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-7.1561 TUBESHEET THICKNESS Calculate tube side tubesheet thickness per Paragraph RCB-7.13. Use all variables as defined per TEMA, neglecting all considerations of shell side design conditions. Calculate shell side tubeshest thickness per Paragraph RCB-7.13, Use all variables as defined per TEMA, neglecting all considerations of tube side design conditions. RCB-7.1562 MINIMUM SPACING BETWEEN TUBESHEETS ‘The minimum spacing (g), inches (mm), between tubesheets required to avoid overstress of tubes resulting from differential thermal growth of individual tubesheets is given by: [a.ArEy RCB-7.16 FIXED TUBESHEET EFFECTIVE PRESSURE This paragraph shall apply to exchangers having tubesheets fixed to both ends of the shell with or without a shell expansion joint except as required or permitted by Paragraph RCB-7.. Both tubesheets of fixed tubesheet exchangers shall have the same thickness, unless the provisions of Paragraph RCB-7.166 are satisfied, For fixed tubesheet exchangers, the mutually interdependent loads exerted on the tubesheets, tubes, and shell are defined in terms of equivalent and effective design pressures in Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7.165 for use in Paragraphs RCB-7.132 and RCB-7.193, These pressures shall also be used (with J = 1) in Paragraphs RCB-7.22, RCB-7.23 and RCB-7.25 to assess the need for an expansion joint. The designer shall onside the most adverse operating conditions spectied by the purchaser. (See Paragraph 3.2) RCB-7.161 EQUIVALENT DIFFERENTIAL EXPANSION PRESSURE ‘The pressure due to differential thermal expansion, psi (kPa), is given by: 4s 8. t. (#) Pe" -a,) CF JKF,) Note: Algebraic sign must be retained for use in Paragraphs RCB-7.163 through RCB-7.166, RCB-7.22 and RCB-7.23. where J-=1.0 for shells without expansion joints Sik S)l= aD. Tye F, 10" shells with expansion joints. See Note (1) S,= Spring rate of the expansion joint, tbs /inch (kN/mmn) E, t. (D. Et, N (d,- wool ee)” (Use the calculated value of F oF 1.0, whichever is greater.) F and Gare as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.132. F4=0.25+( 62 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTIONS T = Tubeshest thickness used, but not less than 98.5% of the greater of the values defined by Paragraph RCB-7.132 or RCB-7.133. (The value assumed in evalu: ating F , must match the final computed value within a tolerance of + 1.5%) See Note (2). Tube length between inner tubesheet faces, inches (mm). Differential thermal growth (shell - tubes), inches (mm) (See Section 7, Paragraph T-4.5).. Tube length between outer tubeshest faces, inches (mm) Elastic modulus of the shell material at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). (See Paragraph RCB-1.431). See Note (3) E, = Elastic modulus of the tube material at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). (See Paragraph RCB-1.432). Elastic modulus of the tubesheet material at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). (See Paragraph RCB-1.432). Number of tubes in the shell Outside diameter of the shell or port for kettle type exchangers, inches (mm) Outside diameter of the tubes (for integrally finned tubes, cis root diameter of fin), inches (mm). Tube wall thickness (for integrally finned tubes, ¢, is wall thickness under fin), inches (mm). t, = Shell wall thickness, inches (mm). Notes: (1) Jican be assumed equal to zero for shells with expansion joints where —Portteks . 10L (2) Tubesheets thicker than computed are permissible provided neither shell nor tubes are overloaded. See Paragraph RCB-7.2. (3) For Kettle type, Ese Ss Esa adeeeeeeaeeee CL TAL ET Dr (Det DaT 1 * Te Te De)/(DaT ud] where EF zy, = Elastic modulus of the shell material at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). (See Paragraph RCB-1.431), L = Tube length between inner tubesheet faces, inches (mm). Ly T , = Kettle port cylinder thickness, inches (mm), Length of kettle port cylinder, inches (mm), Dp~ Mean diameter of kettle port cylinder, inches (mm) Ly = Length of kettle cylinder, inches (mm). T , = Kettle cylinder thickness, inches (mm), D,, = Mean diameter of kettle cylinder, inches (mm). L¢ = Axial langth of kettle cone, inches (mm), T¢ = Kettle cone thickness, inches (mm). RCB-7.162 EQUIVALENT BOLTING PRESSURE When fixed tubesheets are extended for boting to heads with ring type gaskets, the extension and that portion of the tubesheets inside the shell may differ in thickness. ‘The extension shall be designed in accordance with Paragraph RCB-7.134. The effect Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 63SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B of the moment acting upon the tubesheet extension shall be accounted for in subsequent paragraphs in terms of equivalent tube side and shell side bolting pressures which are defined as: 6.2_My 6.2. Ms Enh Gigs where F and G are defined in Paragraph ROB-7.192, M, = Total moment acting upon the extension under operating conditions, defined by the Code as M , under flange design, inch-pounds (mm-KN). ‘M; = Total moment acting upon the extension under bolting-up conditions, defined by the Code as M . under flange design, inch-pounds (mm-kN). P 2 = Equivalent bolting pressure when tube side pressure is acting, psi (kPa). Po, = Equivalent bolting pressure when tube side pressure is not acting, psi (kPa). RCB-7.163 EFFECTIVE SHELL SIDE DESIGN PRESSURE ‘The effective shell side design pressure is to be taken as the greatest absolute value of the following Py or or or where o4 yus+Ka.s+foi-[(H)(2 4 1k Ry P., = Shell side design pressure, psi (kPa) (For vacuum design, P . is negative). -N (#) Cc G = Inside diameter of the shell, inches (mm). Maximum expansion joint inside diameter, inches (mm) (D , = G when no expansion joint is present) Other symbols are as defined under Paragraphs RCB-7.161 and RCB-7.162 64 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 Notes: (1) Algebraic sign of ? .” must be used above, and must be retained for use in Paragraphs RCB-7.164, RCB-7.165, RCB-7.166, RCB-7.22 and RCB-7.23. (2) When J = 0, formulae containing P 4 will not control (@) Delete the term 5, in the above formulae for use in Paragraph RCB-7.133. (4) For kettle type, G = por inside diameter. RCB-7.164 EFFECTIVE TUBE SIDE DESIGN PRESSURE The effective tube side design pressure is to be taken as the greatest absolute value of the following Pet Pat Pa 7 When P,, “is positive OP = Py Py PHP y+ Pat Pa F P 2 When PIs negative orP = Py P+ Py oop | 140-4 KC.5 +f] P,= Tube side design pressure, psi (kPa) (For vacuum design, P, is, negative). [e247 c fs G = Inside diameter of the shell, inches (mm). Other symbols are as defined under Paragraphs RCB-7.161, RCB-7.162, and RCB-7.163. Notes: (1) Algebraic sign of P,” must be used above, and must be retained for use in Paragraphs RCB-7.165, RCB-7.166, RCB-7.22 and RCB-7.23. (2) When J = 0 ) Formulae containing P 4 will not control. b) When P, and P , are both positive the following formula is controlling PL (D,\* poreB (2) oa form (8) Delete the term ? », in the above formulae for use in Paragraph RCB-7.133, (4) For kettle type, G = port inside diameter. RCB-7.165 EFFECTIVE DIFFERENTIAL DESIGN PRESSURE Under certain circumstances the Code and other regulatory bodies permit design on the basis of simultaneous action of both shell and tube side pressures. The effective differential design pressure for fixed tubesheets under such circumstances is to be taken as the greatest absolute value of the following: Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 65SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B where Notes: Pots, or “+ Pat Pa 2 or P=Py, Put Po or Pane or P= Py Py” Pea Py Pa oP 2 or P=Px Pas Pos» Poe, P, and P,” areas defined in Paragraphs RCB-7.161, RCB-7.162, RCB-7.163 and ROB-7.164, (1) Itis not permissible to use (P, ~ P,) in place of P to calculate P ,~ in Paragraph RCB.7.163, and itis not permissible to use (P,~ Pin Place of to calculate P,” in Paragraph RCB-7.164. (2) When J = 0, the formulae containing P ,will not control. (3) Delete the terms Py, and P », in the above formulae for use in Paragraph ROB-7.133, RCB-7.166 FIXED TUBESHEETS OF DIFFERING THICKNESSES 66 Standards Of ‘The rules presented in Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7.165 and RCB-7.2 are intended for fixed tubesheet exchangers where both tubesheets are the same thickness. Conditions can exist where it's appropiate to use tubesheets of differing thicknesses. These conditions may result from significantly differing elastic moduli and/or allowable stresses. The following procedure may be used for such cases: (1), Separate the design parameters as defined in previous paragraphs for each tubesheet system by assigning subscripts and B to each of the following terms: TasT ,andT LasLand Lawhere L,*Ly=2L Eask sand» F 4 aSF qaand F os Note: The values of My. M2, FG, ML, Ly DosterdesteE as Eu N and S , must remain constant throughout this analysis. Ifa fixed tubesheet exchanger has different bolting moments at each tubesheet, the designer should use the values of IM , and M athat, produce the conservative design, (2) Calculate T , per Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7.165 assuming that both tubesheets have the properties of subscript A and L = L. The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 (3) Calculate 7 » per Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7.165 assuming that both tubesheets have the properties of subscript Band / » (4) Calculate / , and / ; as follows: LaL-T,-T ae 1+(E)(F) | Lys2k-Ly (6) Recalculate T , per Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7.165 using the properties of subscript 4 and ,from step 4. (6) Recalculate T » per Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7.165 using the properties of subscript Band Z «from step 4. (7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 until values assumed in step 4 are within 1.5% of, the values calculated in step 5 for 7. and step 6 for T », (8) Round T , and 7 pup to an appropriate increment and recalculate L , and Laer step 4. (9) Calculate the shell and tube stresses and the tube-to-tubesheet joint loads per Paragraph RCB-7.2 for each tubesheet system using the appropriate ‘subscripted properties. Note: The shell and tube stresses and tube-to-tubesheet j¢ loads for each tubesheet system should theoretically be identical. Small differences may exist, however, Because of rounding the caleulated tubesheet thicknesses in step 8. The tube stress and the tube-to-tubesheot joint loads from the two systems should be averaged before comparing these values to the allowable values as calculated in Paragraph RCB-7.2. * RCB-7.2 SHELL AND TUBE LONGITUDINAL STRESSES - FIXED TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS Shell and tube longitudinal stresses, which depend upon the equivalent and effective pressures determined by Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7. 164, shall be calculated for fixed tubesheet exchangers with or without shell expansion joints by using the following paragraphs. The designer shall consider the most adverse operating conditions specified by the purchaser. (See Paragraph E32) Note: The formulae and design criteria presented in Paragraphs RCB-7.23 through RCB-7.25 consider only the tubes at the periphery of the bundle, which are normally the most highly stressed tubes. Additional consideration of the tube stress distribution throughout the bundle may be of interest to the designer under certain conditions of loading and/or geometry. See the "Recommended Good Practice" section of these Standards for additional information. RCB-7.21 HYDROSTATIC TEST Hydrostatic test conditions can impose excessive shell and/or tube stresses. These stresses can be calculated by substituting the pressures and temperatures at hydrostatic test for the appropriate design pressures and metal temperatures in the paragraphs that follow and in Paragraphs RCB-7.161 through RCB-7.164 where applicable. RCB-7.22 SHELL LONGITUDINAL STRESS The effective longitudinal shell stress is given by: C(Do- bs) Ps _ at where except as noted below PtHP, Note (2) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 67SECTION 5 orP,* =P,” orP.*=-Py orP.t =P) +P,” OP t= Py~ Pa OP t= Pe Pe orP.* = Py + Py’ Pa where Py=P,-Py MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B Note (2) Note (1) Notes (1) and (2) Notes (1) and (2) Note (1) Other symbols are as defined in Paragraphs RCB-7.161, RCB-7.163 and RCB-7.164, using actual shell and tubesheet thicknesses and retaining algebraic signs, Notes: (1) Ifthe algebraic sign of P..* is positive, C, = 0.5 (2) This formula is not applicable for dferential pressure design per Paragraph RCB.7.165. ‘A condition of overstress shall be presumed to exist when the largest absolute value of exceeds the Code allowable stress in tension for the shell material at design temperature, or 90% of yield stress at hydrostatic test, or when the greatest negailve value of sexcoads the Code allowable stress in compression at design temperature. RCB-7.23 TUBE LONGITUDINAL STRESS - PERIPHERY OF BUNDLE ‘The maximum effective longitudinal tube stress, psi (kPa), at the periphery of the bundle is given by: per Cousens “EN t(de-t) where C,= 1.0 PYx=P, orP.t=-Ps orP t= Pa orP*= P2~ Po orP = Pp+ Pa ort =-Po+ Pe or PX= P2-Py* Pa except as noted below Note (2) Note (2) Notes (1) and (2) Notes (1) and (2) Notes (1) and (2) Note (1) Other symbols are as defined in Paragraphs RCB-7.161, RCB-7.163 and RCB-7.164, using ‘actual shell and tubesheet thicknesses and retaining algebraic signs. ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 Notes: (1) Ifthe algebraic sign of P ,*is positive, C, = 0.5 (2) This formula is not applicable for differential pressure design per Paragraph RCB-7.165. A condition of overstress shall be presumed to exist when the largest positive value of 5 exceeds the Code allowable stress in tension for the tube material at design temperature, or ‘90% of yield stress at hydrostatic test, or when the greatest negative value of S ,exceeds the allowable compressive stress as determined in accordance with Paragraph RCB-7.24. RCB-7.24 ALLOWABLE TUBE COMPRESSIVE STRESS - PERIPHERY OF BUNDLE The allowable tube compressive stress, psi (kPa), for the tubes at the periphery of the bundle is given by kt when C.S where Yield stress, psi (kPa), of the tube material at the design metal temperature. (See Paragraph RCB-1.42). r= Radius of gyration of the tube, inches (mm), given by: la, (daa Di)? (See Table D-7) ‘kL= Equivalent unsupported buckling length of the tube, inches (mr). The largest value considering unsupported tube spans shall be used, (= Unsupported tube span, inches (mm). 0.6 for unsupported spans between two tubesheets. k=|0.8 for unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support 1.0 for unsupported spans between two tube supports Factor of safety given by: F,=3.28-0.5F, Note: F shall not be less than 1.25 and need not be taken greater than 2.0. Other symbols ate as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.161 Note: The allowable tube compressive stress shall be limited to the smaller of the Code allowable stress in tension for the tube material at the design metal temperature (see Paragraph RCB-1.42) or the calculated value of 5. RCB-7.25 TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET JOINT LOADS - PERIPHERY OF BUNDLE ‘The maximum effective tube-to-tubesheet joint load, Ibs. (KN), at the periphery of the bundle is given by: mF, Pit G? eee Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 69SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B where P= P, — Note(t) orP,*=-Ps Note (1) orPyt=P2- Ps and Pare as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.23. Other symbols are as defined in Paragraphs RCB-7.161, RCB-7.163 and RCB-7.164, using the actual shell and tubesheet thicknesses, Note: (1) This formulas not applicable for diferent pressure design per Paragraph 7.165. ‘The allowable tube-to-tubeshest joint ioads as calculated by the Code or other means may be used as a guide in evaluating lv’ , The tube-to-tubesheet joint loads calculated above consider only the effects of pressure loadings. The tube-to-tubesheet joint loads caused by restrained differential thermal ‘expansion between shell and tubes are considered to be within acceptable limits ifthe requirements of Paragraph RCB-7.23 are met. RCB-7.3 SPECIAL CASES Special consideration must be given to tubesheet designs with abnormal conditions of support or loading. Following are some typical examples: (1) Tubesheets with portions not adequately stayed by tubes, or with wide untubed rims, (2) Exchangers with large differences in shell and head inside diameters; e.g. fixed tubesheets with kettle type shel. (@) The adequacy of the staying action of the tubes during hydrostatic test; e.g., with test rings for types S and, or types P and W. (4) Vertical exchangers where weight and/or pressure drop loadings produce significant effects relative to the design pressures. (6) Extrome interpass temperature differentials. Consideration may also be given to special design configurations and/or methods of analysis which may justify reduction of the tubesheet thickness requirements. RCB-7.4 TUBE HOLES IN TUBESHEETS RCB-7.41 TUBE HOLE DIAMETERS AND TOLERANCES ‘Tube holes in tubesheets shall be finished to the diameters and tolerances shown in Tables RCB-7.41 and RCB-7.41M, column (a). ‘To minimize work hardening, a closer fit between tube ‘OD and tube ID as shown in column (b) may be provided when specified by the purchaser. RCB-7.42 TUBESHEET LIGAMENTS ‘Tables RCB-7.42 and RCB-7.42M give permissible tubesheet ligaments, drill drift and recommended maximum tube wail thicknesses. *RCB-7.43 TUBE HOLE FINISH ‘The inside edges of tube holes in tubesheets shall be free of burrs to prevent cutting of the ‘tubes, Internal surfaces shall be given a workmanlike finish. 70 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 TABLE RCB-7.41 TUBE HOLE DIAMETERS AND TOLERANCES (All Dimensions in Inches) ‘Nominal Tubs Hole Diameter and Under Tolerance (Over Tolerance: 96% of tube Standard Fit Special Close Fit holes must mest value in column Nominal fa) cy (eh, Remainder may not exceed value in column (2) Tube OD Nominal Nominal ‘under Diameter Diameter _| Tolerance © @ 1a 0.259) 0.257 0.002) 0.002) ‘097 3/8 384) 0.382 o.002 0.002 (0.007 1/2. o510 0.508) o.00e 0.002 0.008, 5/8 0.635; 0633 002 ‘0,002 0.010) 3/8 0.760 0758 0.002, 0.002, 0.010 78 0.885 0.883 0.002) 0.002) 0.010 1 1912 1.010 o.002 0.002, 0.010) 4 1264 1.261 0.008) 0.003) 0.010) 1/2 1518 1514 0.003) 0.008) 0.010 2 2.022, 2018 0.003 0.008 2.010 TABLE RCB-7.41 M TUBE HOLE DIAMETERS AND TOLERANCES (All Dimensions in mm) Nominal Tube Hole Diameter and Under Tolerance Over Tolerance: 96% of tube ‘Standard Fit Special tose holes must mest value in column t ‘Nominal @ (@}: Remainder may not exceed value in column (8) Tube OD Nominal Unger Nominal Under Diameter | Tolerance | _Diameter_| Tolerance © Ce oa 58) 0.10) 653 0.05 0.05) 0.18) 35 975 0.10) 970 0.05 (0.05) 0.18) 727, 12.95 0.10) 12.80 0.05 0.05) (020) 159) 16.13 0.10 16.08 0.05 (0.05) 0.25 194 79.30 0.10 19.25 0.05 (0.05 0.25 222 22.88 0.10 2248) 0.05 (0.05 0.25 254 2570 0.10 2565, 0.05) (0.05 0.25 318 ait 0.15 3208) 0.08) 0.08 0.25 284 3855, 0.18 38.46 0.08 0.08) 025) 508 31.968 0.18 5125 0.08 0.08) 025) RB-7.44 TUBE HOLE GROOVING Tube holes for expanded joints for tubes 5/8" (15.9mm) OD and larger shall be machined with at least two grooves, for addtional longitudinal load resistance, each approximately 1/8" (@.2mm) wide by 1/64" (0.4mm) deep, When integrally clad or applied tubesheets facings are used, all grooves should be in the base material unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. Strength welded tubes do not require grooves. Tubesheets with thicknesses less than 1° (25.4mm) may be provided with one groove. When utilizing hydraulic expansion, grooves shall be 1/4” (6.4mm) wide. C-7.44 TUBE HOLE GROOVING For design pressures over 300 psi (2068 kPa) and/or temperatures in excess of 350° F (177°C), the tube holes for expanded joints for tubes 5/8" (15.9 mm) OD and larger shall be machined with at least two grooves, for additional longitudinal load resistance, each approximately 1/8" (3mm) wide by 1/64" (0.4 mm) deep. When integrally clad or applied tubesheet facings are used, all grooves should be in the base material unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, Strength welded tubes do not require grooves. Tubesheets with thicknesses less than 1° (25.4mm) may be provided with ‘one groove. When utilizing hydraulic expansion, grooves shall be 1/4" (6.4mm) wide. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 7SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B ‘TABLE RCB-7.42 TABLE OF TUBESHEET LIGAMENTS AND RECOMMENDED HEAVIEST TUBE GAGES (All Dimensions in Inches) Minimum Si, Ligaments (06% of igaments must equal or ‘exceed values tabulated below} Tube } Tube Heaviest | Tube | Nomin- Minimum Dia. | ich | pp Recom- | Hole | al Permissible d FF |p-a] mendes} ova. | ioe: Ugament ae "Tube | Sid. | ment ‘Wath Gage | Ft | With Tubesheet Thickness awe T[eel? jee>e]«[sfe v7 [516 | 125 | wie | 22 | 0280| o05e | 0028 | 002s [oes |oozs| - | - | - | ~ | 00a ye | +50 | Ye | 20 o.1%6 | 0083 | 0077 | 0076 | ose] = | = | = | = | o050 we | v2, | 138 | 2/8 | 12 [0268] 0.116 | 0087 | 008s] acre | 0075 | ooo | oos| — | — | oso 7/30] 142 | sf | 18 6.447 | 0.199 | 0.118 | 0.170 | 0.106 | 0.102 | 0.093 | 0.085 | ore | dare v2 | 5/8 | 125 | ye | 18 | 0510] 0115 | 0089 | 003s | 0.082 | 0079 | oo76 | 006s | 008s} ~ | o.060 aise] 131 | sae] 18 6.146 | 0.120 | 0.117 | 0113 | 0140 | 0107 | 0.10% | 0.098 | oes | 07s iiyig | 138 | 3/46 | 18 0.478 | 0.181 | 0.148 | 0148 | 0.142 | 0198 | 0.132 | 0128 | ova | 000 oe [asia2| 125 | 5/2] 15 | 0685] 0146 | 01m: [0109] 0106 | 0103 | 0101 | 0.096 | 009% | 0.085 | ors. 43/16] 130 | ste | 14 O.178 | 0.142 | 0140 | O 197 | 0495 | O92 | Ot27 | O12 | Otr7 | 9.090 Te | a0 | Wa | ta 6.240 | 0:205 | 0.202 | 0200 | 0.187 | 0.195 | 0.189 | 014 | otra | 0.120 ‘a [isis] 125 | aye | 13 | o7e0| o17e | 0.143 | 0.141 | 0199 | ora7 | 0735 | 0.130 | 0128 | 0.122] 0000 | 133 | Va | 12 (0.240 | 6.208 | 0.204 | 0201 | 0-190 | 0.197 | 0.193 | 0.109 | O04 | 0.120 sayte| 142 | s/o] 12 1.303 | 0.268 | 0.268 | 0.268 | 0.262 | 0.260 | 0285 | O2s1 | o2a7 | 0.150 ‘fe | 130 | Ye | 2 0.368 | 01381 | 01329 | 0.386 | 0.304 | 0.392 | 0316 | o3i4 | 0.300 | _ 0-165 778 [arse] s25 | 7/2 | 12 | 0888] 0200 | 0175 | 0.173 [0.171 [0.170] 0168 | 0164 | 0160 | 0157 | 0.105, sje | 120 | a] 12 6.240 | 0.208 | 0.208 | 0.203 | 0.20" | 0.199 | 0.198 | o.182 | 0.188 | 0.120 13/6] 138 | 5/16 | 10 8303 | 0.260 | 0267 | 0.208 | 0263 | 0262 | 0.258 | 0256 | ost | O.r50 ie | 493 | Be | 10 0368 | 0.331 | 0.390 | 0.328 | 0.326 | 0324 | 0.320 | 0317 [0313 | O.188 7 [raya] 125 | aya | 10 | 012 | 0236 | 0205 | 020 | 0.202 | 0.200 | 0.108 [0.105 [o192 [oie9 | 0.120 s3/r6] 131 | s/t] 9 0301 | 0.267 | 0.266 | ose | 0.253 | O26 | 0258 | 025s | O25: | 0150 ‘3/6 | 13a | Ye | 9 0363 | 6.330 | 0.308 | 0.397 | 0.395 | 0.333 | 0.200.317 | osia| 0.185 Tis [v9/s6| 125 | 5/16 | 9 | 1264 | 0200 [0.256 | 0265 | 0269 | 0.262 | 0.61 | 0256 | 0256 | 0253 | 0.150 nya [ ize 125 | se |e [1518] 0367 [0.325 | 0324 | 0323 | ose | oz [oste|osie| 0314 | 0.160 2 [evel 12s] se] 6 [20m| cave] ~ [oss] oes | ocas | 044s | 0.442 | 0.440 | 0.498 | 0.250 Notes: The above table of minimum standard ligaments is based on a ligament tolerance not exceeding the sum of twice the dill itt tolerance plus 0,020" for tubes less than 9/8" OD and 0,030" for tube holes 6/8" OD and larger Dri dat Slerance = 0.0016 (hickness of tubosheet in tube diameters), inches *RCB-7.5 TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET JOINTS RCB-7.51 EXPANDED TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET JOINTS Expanded tube-to-tubesheet joints are standard. RB-7.511 LENGTH OF EXPANSION Tubes shall be expanded into the tubesheet for a length no less than 2" (50.8 mm) or the tubesheet thickness minus 1/8" (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller. In no case shall the expanded portion extend beyond the shell side face of the tubesheet. When specified by the purchaser, tubes may be expanded for the full thickness of the tubesheet. C-7.511 LENGTH OF EXPANSION Tubes shall be expanded into the tubesheet for a length no less than two tube diameters, 2° (50.8 mm), or the tubesheet thickness minus 1/8" (3.2 mm). whichever is, smaller. In no case shali the expanded portion extend beyond the shell side face of the tubesheet. When specified by the purchaser, tubes may be expanded for the full thickness of the tubesheet. 72 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 TABLE RCB-7.42 M TABLE OF TUBESHEET LIGAMENTS AND RECOMMENDED HEAVIEST TUBE GAGES: (All Dimensions in mm) Tainimum Sia, Ligaments G6% of igarente must equal or ‘exabed values tabulated below) Tupe | Tune Heaviest] Tube | Nomin Morimum a. | ich |p Fecom-| Hole | a Permissible de} p | o [e-44 mended) Dia. | une garment ° “tube | Std. | ment ‘Wath age | rit | wath “Tubesheet Thickness ewe Za] aes | eo0 | cos | 72 [iors] wo] ize oa [rae] is] ase] 2 | 6570] 1381 [oss5| 089s [osss [oss -{-]- | oss 383 | 430|3%8|_ 0 2951 [203] 9.6 | $770 | Seas | : ‘528 25 [1270] 123 317] 18 | 754] 2006 [2210] 2108 [2007 | 1.905 | 1770 | 17s 1526 1349] 142 | 39618 5.736 [3.003] 2.903 | 2704 | 2602 | 2555 | 2562 | 2is0| 1990 | S08 727 [1598] 125] ase] 18 [72954] 2905 [2251] 2150] 2089 | 2007 | rsa0 T1755] reo | ze ieer| 131 | a97| te 378 [3000] 2972 | Baro | 270s | 27 | 2965 | 2500 | 2235] Sos iraa| 197 | 876] 16 3506 [3835] 3.759 | Sas | S¢07 | 350s | 335s | S200 | S023 | 2286 758 | 1984] 128 | 396 | 15 [16129] a711 [2sral 2700 | 2002 | 2616 | 2565 | 2435/2511 | 2188 | 1008 2084| 120] 476 | 14 3511 |3e0r| 3586 | 3800 | S429 | S53 | S226 | S098 | 2072 | 2286 2253] 190 | 835 | 14 801 [S207] 8.19" | 8.000 | 008 | $053 | dan: | Sora | Sar | Sosa var [23st] s25[476| 19 [v9504] «506 |aes2} aser | ass: | s4a0 | 3420 [3.02 |s200| 3000] 2206 2340] 133 | 635 | 12 8006 [S232] 8102 | s.10s | s0ss | 500s | e902 | 407 | aara| Sse 200] 142 | 708] 12 ‘86 |8.807| 6756 | e708 | 605s | 8005 | 6477 |e37s|e2rs| 3810 zase| 1s0| 953 | 12 3.276 [sor] 8.357 | 8.200 | 8230 | 8170 | 8arr|Fore| va0a| a0 ze |ar73] 125 [555 | 12 [2279] 5201 [a5] 204 faa | «10 207 | 4108 | 4004 | ase0 | 2007 2858| 129635] 12 8101 |232| Saor | Sse | sos | 5055 | 4059 | 2877 [4775 | Sou o%8| 138] 795) 10 7881 [8635] 9702 6721 | sge0 | 8085 | 553 |e.4sz |esrs| 3810 sr7s| 193 | 982| 10 5271 [ear] 8.52 | 85 | 8200 | 8.290 | € 128 | 8082 | 7200 | S600 24 |s175] 125] 625] 10 Jes705] e0ss |5207| 5156] 5191] 5000] s0z0 | «05a | earz | 160,%= 2.92(G/1,) 9"! The final stifnress multiplior is represented by the product, K = «rn y..Y, RCB-8.53 If both r,and r-, are present, Fig. RCB-8.21 (a), but not equal, determine m.,,, from Fig. ROB-8.52 using r“,, 7 from Fig, RCB-8.51 using r, , and m7,» from Figure RCB-8.52 using 1r’. Caloulate = as shown in Paragraph RCB-8.52 above. ‘The final stiffness mult ris represented by the product, =MMeVeYe Ka TMs VaVe Tez RCB-8.54 if onlyr, is present, Fig. RCB-8.21 (b) , determine m from Figure RCB-8.52 and calculate the term, , according to the following equations: c For <160,A=2.13(G/te) 7 « ° For= 2 160,A= 1.86(G/t_) = The final stfiness multiplier is represented by the product, K = Amy. V» RCB-8.55 If only zis present, Fig. RCB-8.21 (c) determine m from Figure RCB-8.51 using”, and calculate «, from Paragraph RCB-8.52. Determine m..from Figure RCB-8.52 using“, =r. and calculate, X , from Paragraph RCB-8.54 The final stiffness multiplier is represented by the product, =MAMoVaYo Kes =m*emhm, RCB-8.56 If both .and r, equal 0, Fig. RCB-8.21 (4), K = Ya» Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 81MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5S (enba 1 jonuy 104NG pus oUU)) Sieyoulesed SsejuossueUiq jweue!3 1194s 9Iq)x91,4 Jo UONOUN, & se JoNdNINW SsoUNNS tge-aou aunDi4 yw $0 svo a) seo £0 sto v0 sv'o ro so’o — See ecees ee pst =v tay — stu e=yx— | Seay en | payer \ 4 9= ya 7 Leu ‘sisAjeue siyi jo edoos ey) @pIsjno pasepjsu0d 324 ‘aye uMOYs sanjeA Y/J pue 3/1 BY jo @BueL uA UI Jou sone 000° 007'T 00r'T 009°T rz 009° 008% 000° ur ‘sondnmy ssouygag Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 82SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B (epjonuy souuy ON) susjaueieg ss9luojsuewig wews3 !oUS eIq)xo14 JO UONOUN, & Se JoNdNINWN SsOUNNS GOH TUNIS 1 0 000°T oOr'l Stays 00e'T e=yr : seaye 00E'T bry O0r'T 00st gay 009°T Ss ee 00L'T all 008'T Ly ae awe one SST a ae cost seu EI —__L 000% 83 Pourg usu SSomEn TAA SSoUNS Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB RCB-8.6 EQUIVALENT FLEXIBLE ELEMENT STIFFNESS When there is only one flexible shell element (See Paragraph RCB-8.2) in a shell, the spring rate, Ibs/inch (N/mm), fs given by. 2naD; K S$ ge BNO Ps Bx7d*Xeda* Is where the terms are defined in Paragraphs RCB-8.22, RCB-8.3, RCB-8.4, and ROB-8.5, When two or more flexible elements are used in a shell, the overall effective spring rate of the system. of flexible elements is given by: = _ Respective spring rates of each flexible shell element, calculated individually from the above formula, Ibs/inch (kN/mm) Note: A single convolute consists of two flexible shell elements. RCB-8.7 INDUCED AXIAL FORCE The calculation of the flexible shell element stresses is contingent upon calculating an induced axial force acting on each element. This axial force on the inner shell citcumference shall be calculated for each condition as described in Paragraphs RCB-8.11 through RCB-8.13 and is given by: _aP.* Sizer S jee F + lbs. finch ea (Metric) x10-% —, KN/mm where P,*=P, +P and Py=Py- Py TABLE RCB-8.7 F ax PARAMETER VARIATIONS CONDITION PPP. |Pa| Differential Expansion Only O| 0 |Pa Shell side Pressure Only, Note (1) o}P.|0 ‘Tube side Pressure Only, Note (1) Pil 0 [0 ‘Shell side Pressure + Tube side Pressure. Py) Py |0: Shell side Pressure Only + Differential Expansion, Note (1) ofr. [Pe Tube side Pressure Only + Differential Expansion, Note (1) Pil O [Pa : Shell side Pressure + Tube side Pressure + Differential Expansion [P| P. "| « Notes: (1) This condition is not applicable for differential pressure design per Paragraph RCB-7.165. (2) c1is defined in Paragraph RCB-8.22. 84 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 (3) Other symbols are as defined in Paragraphs RCB-7.161, RCB-7.163 and RCB-7.164, using actual shell and tubesheet thicknesses for each condition under consideration per Paragraphs RCB-8.11 through RCB-8.13, ALGEBRAIC SIGNS MUST BE RETAINED. RCB-8.8 FLEXIBLE ELEMENT MOMENTS AND STRESSES The following paragraphs provide the formulae to calculate the predicted stress levels in each flexible element, Each flexible element configuration wil have a unique set of stresses for each condtion analyzed. RCB-8.81 MOMENTS AT THE JUNCTIONS The stresses in the annular flat plate and the cylindrical portions of a flexible element are dependent upon the moments, inch-bs per inch (mm-kN per mm) of circumference, at the inside and outside junctions. The moments are given by: (5+ ¥2)(-0~ Fou o~ BaZa) *¥ el Face 8p") a Mo (71=x1)(804 Favre Et) + x CF aca Oat BaZ0) where A sg on 2 -2gm,-M-L-29" na?) q Pb? BD, (-2m,-my+0.5-g7) P.,~ Shell side design pressure, psi (kPa), for the condition under consideration (including 0 or negative value if vacuum, as applicable) 1.7 The term as calculated in Paragraph RCB-8.7 dependent upon the condition under consideration k,and kz = The terms as calculated in Paragraph RCB-8.3, using at the outer cylinder The remaining terms are as defined in Paragraphs RCB-8.22, RCB-8.3 and RCB-8.4. RCB-8.82 ANNULAR PLATE ELEMENT STRESSES. ‘The annular plate meridional bending stress, psi (kPa), shall be calculated for each condition specified in Paragraphs RCB-8.11, RCB-8.12 and RCB-8.13 from the following formula san hal aveBbeaurteata(2)} cM, +cd®M,+0.6SacF 4.In(g)~ P,(0.325m,b* + 0.41254") A,=b?(cM,-cM,~0.65acF ..In(g)+0.0875iP,b*) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 85SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B Ay~0.206P, A= 0.65a(F g¢~0.SaP,) F gx = The term as calculated in Paragraph RCB-8.7 dependent upon the condition under consideration. P= Shell side design pressure, psi (kPa), for the condltion under consideration (including 0 or negative value if vacuum, as applicable). Radial distance, from the shell centerline to the point under consideration, inches (mm). ‘The remaining terms are as defined in Paragraphs RCB-8.22, RCB-8.4 and RCB-8.81 Note: (1) Simp = S» calculated for the shell side pressure only condition. (2) Sma * S» calculated for the differential expansion only or tube side pressure only ‘condition (3) S,, = S,calculated for all conditions as specified in Table RCB-8.7. 4) Semp + Smmp 2d S mma aS defined by the Code, are negligible for the annular plate element within the scope of Paragraph RCB-8. (6) The maximum annular plate stress will be located where: 2 [Ai+ 164A, (When P, isnot) As orrea orr=b RCB-8.83 CYLINDRICAL ELEMENT STRESSES The circumferential membrane stresses, psi (kPa), in the cylinders shall be calculated for each ccondtion specified in Paragraphs RCB-8.11, RCB'8.12 and RCB-6.13 from the following formula: E(+v2) where vy =Bly-x) v2" B,sin(v, )sinh(v, )+ Bycos(v,)cosh(u,) X = The distance under consideration, as shown in Figure RCB-8.22, inches (mm) ‘The remaining terms are as defined in Paragraphs RCB-8.21, RCB-8.22, RCB-8.9 and RCB8.7. 86 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 where For the inner oylinder For the outer cylinder ’ ofor(ye-X) lo t= smaller off, or t, for Oro xa te tyfor(ye-x)< hs t= tefor(ye-x)> 4, t= smaller of {oF t, for(ya~ x)" E-E, M=M, ynye Note: (1) S emp = Sm Calculated for the shell side pressure only condition. Calculated for the differential expansion only or tube side pressure only condition, (8) S empa = Sm Calculated for the combined pressure and differential expansion condition. (4) The maximum value of S ,. will be located where x = 7,0 = Lefor the inner oylinder and where x = ys of x = 1, for the outer eylinder. 2) Sema RCB-8.84 MAXIMUM CYLINDER STRESS FOR CYCLE LIFE CALCULATIONS The maximum stress, psi (kPa), fora particular set of conditions, for use in the evaluation of cycle life is given by: 6M 7 |£s| tI where F 2 is defined in Paragraph RCB-8.83 and For the inner junction M=M, he smaller of ror ta For the outer junction M=M, t= the smaller of sor ty Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 87SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B Note: (1) A postive value of M establishes a compressive stress in the outer fiber of the cylinder under consideration 2) S.:is a possible outer limit for establishing a stress range. (9) S «for the cylindrical element is equal to S «. RCB-8.9 ALLOWABLE STRESSES ‘The allowable flexible element stresses shall be as defined by the Code, using an appropriate stress. concentration factor for the geometry under consideration. RCB-8.10 MINIMUM THICKNESS ‘The minimum thickness of flexible shell elements shall be as determined by the rules of Paragraphs RCB-8.1 through RCB-8.9. However, in no case shall the thickness in the uncorraded condition be less than 1/8° (3.2 mm) for nominal diameters 18" (457 mm) and smaller, 3/16" (4.8 mm) for nominal diameters 19° (483 mm) through 30" (762 mm), or 1/4" (6.4 mm) for nominal diameters greater than 30" (762 mm). RCB-9 CHANNELS, COVERS, AND BONNETS RCB-9.1 CHANNELS AND BONNETS R-9.11 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF CHANNELS AND BONNETS Channel and bonnet thickness is determined by the Code design formulae, plus corrosion allowance, but in no case shall the nominal thickness of channels and bonnets be less than the minimum shell thicknesses shown in Table R-3.13. The nominal total thickness for clad channels and bonnets shall be the same as for carbon steel channels. CB-9.11 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF CHANNELS AND BONNETS Channel and bonnet thickness is determined by the Code design formulae, plus corrosion allowance, but in no case shall the nominal thickness of channels and bonnets be less than the minimum shell thicknesses shown in Table CB-3.13. The nominal total thickness for clad channels and bonnets shall be the same as for carbon steel channels. RCB-9.12 MINIMUM INSIDE DEPTH For multipass channels and bonnets the inside depth shall be such that the minimum cross-over area {or flow between successive tube passes is at least equal to 1.3 times the flow area through the tubes of one pass. When an axial nozzle is used, the depth at the nozzle centerline shall be a minimum of one-third the inside diameter of the nozzle. RCB-9.13 PASS PARTITION PLATES, RCB-9.131 MINIMUM THICKNESS, The thickness of pass partitions shall not be less than the greater of that shown in Table RCB-9.131 of calculated in Paragraph RCB-9.132. Pass partition plates may be tapered to gasket width at the contact surface. TABLE RCB-9.131 NOMINAL PASS PARTITION PLATE THICKNESS Dimensions are in Inches (mm) Nominal Size Carbon Stee! Alloy Material Less than 24 3/8 1/4 (610) (95) (6.4) 24 10 60 12 3/8 (610-1524) 2.7) 5) 61 10 100 5/8 12 (1549-2540) (59) 27) 88 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 RCB-9.132 PASS PARTITION PLATE FORMULA, t= Minimum pass partition plate thickness, inches (mm) B= Table value (linear interpolation may be used) @= Pressure drop across plate, psi (kPa) S= Code allowable stress in tension, at design metal temperature, psi (kPa) = Plate dimension. See Table RCB-9.132, inches (mm) TABLE RCB-9.132 PASS PARTITION DIMENSION FACTORS Ty 7S Three sides fixed Long sides fixed Short sides fixed One side simply supported Short sides simply Long sides simply supported 1.5 0.539 18 0.4971 18 0.6912 RCB-9.133 PASS PARTITION WELD SIZE ‘The pass partition plate shall be attached with filet welds on each side with a minimum. leg of 3/47 from Paragraph RCB-9.132. Other types of attachments are allowed but shall be of equivalent strength. RCB-9.134 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS ‘Special consideration must be given to reinforcement or thickness requirements for internal partitions subjected to pulsating fluids, extreme differential pressures and/or temperatures, undue restraints or detrimental deflections under specified operating conditions or unusual start-up or maintenance conditions specified by the purchaser. Consideration may also be given to special design configurations and/or methods of analysis which may justify reduction of pass partion plate thickness requirements. ‘Also, consideration should be given to potential bypass of tubeside fluid where the ppass partition might pull away from the gasket due to deflection. RCB-9.14 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT Fabricated channels and bonnets shall be postweld heat treated when required by the Code or specified by the purchaser. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 89SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-9.2 FLAT.CHANNEL COVER *RCB-9.21 FLAT CHANNEL COVER DEFLECTION - MULTIPASS UNITS ‘The effective thickness of a flat channel cover shall be the thickness at the bottom of the pass panttion groove (or the face if there is no groove) minus corrosion allowance in excess of groove depth. The thickness is to be at least that required by the appropriate Code formula nd thicker f required to meet proper deflection criteria The recommended limit for channel cover deflection is: 0.03" (0.8 mm) for nominal diameters thru 24” (610 mm) 0.125% of nominal diameter (nominal diameter/800) for larger sizes. ‘Amethod for calculation of channel cover deflection is: c a ¥=—25(0.04356°P +0.55,Agh, Fr’ ) where Channel cover deflection at the center, inches (mn) G = Gasket load reaction diameter as defined by the Code, inches (mm) = Modulus of elasticity at design temperature, pst (kPa) = Thickness under consideration, inches (mm) = Design pressure, psi (kPa) S5= Allowable bolting stress at design temperature, psi (kPa) Ag™ Actual total cross-sectional root area of bolts, square inches (mm2) hh, = Radial distance from diameter Go bolt cice, inches (mm) Ifthe calculated deflection is greater than the recommended limit, the deflection may be reduced by acceptable methods such as: Increase channel cover thickness by the cube root of the ratio of calculated deflection to the recommended limit. Use of strong backs. Change type of construction. Note: For single pass channels, or others in which there is no pass partition gasket seal against the channel cover, no deflection criteria need be considered. R-9.22 CHANNEL COVER PASS PARTITION GROOVES Channel covers shall be provided with approximately 3/16" (4.8 mm) deep grooves for pass partitions. In clad or applied facings, all surfaces exposed to the fluid, including gasket seating surfaces, shall have at least 1/8" (3.2 mm) nominal thickness of cladding. (CB-9.22 CHANNEL COVER PASS PARTITION GROOVES For design pressures over 300 psi (2068 kPa), channel covers shall be provided with approximately 3/16" (4.8 mm) deep grooves for pass partitions, or other suitable means for holding the gasket in place. In clad or applied facings, all surfaces exposed to fluid, including gasket seating surfaces, shall have at least 1/8" (3.2mm) nominal thickness of cladding. 90 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Asso«MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RCB SECTION 5. RCB-10 NOZZLES RCB-10.1 NOZZLE CONSTRUCTION Nozzle construction shall be in accordance with Code requirements. Shell nozzles shall not protrude beyond the inside contour of the shell if they interfere with bundle insertion or removal. Shell or channel nozzles which protrude beyond the inside contour of the main cylinder wall must be self Venting or draining by notching at their intersection with the high or low point of the cylinder. If separate vent and drain connections are used, they shall be flush with the inside contour of the shell ‘or channel wall. Flange dimensions and facing shall comply with ASME 816.5. Bolt holes shall glade natura comer ines. Flanges ouside the scope of ASME BIE 5 shal ben accordance with code. RCB-10.2 NOZZLE INSTALLATION Radial nozzles shall be considered as standard. Other types of nozzles may be used, by agreement between manufacturer and purchaser. R-10.3 PIPE TAP CONNECTIONS Al pipe tap connections shall be a minimum of 6000 psi standard couplings or equivalent. Each connection shall be fitted with a round head bar stock plug conforming to ASME B16.11 of the same ‘material as the connection. Alternate plug materials may be used when galling is anticipated, except cast iron plugs shall not be used. €-10.3 PIPE TAP CONNECTIONS All pipe tap connections shall be a minimum of 3000 psi standard couplings or equivalent. B-10.3 PIPE TAP CONNECTIONS All pipe tap connections shall be a minimum of 3000 psi standard couplings or equivalent, Each ‘connection shall be fitted with a bar stock plug of the same material as the connection. Alternate plug materials may be used when galling is anticipated, except cast iron plugs shall not be used. RCB-10.31 VENT AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS ‘All high and low points on shell and tube sides of an exchanger not otherwise vented or ‘drained by nozzles shall be provided with 3/4” minimum NPS connections for vent and drain. R-10.32 PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTIONS. All flanged nozzles 2" NPS or larger shall be provided with one connection of 3/4” minimum NPS for a pressure gage unless special considerations allow it to be omitted. See Paragraph RB-10.4. ©-10.32 PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTIONS Pressure gage connections shall be as specified by the purchaser. See Paragraph C-10.4. B-10.32 PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTIONS All anged nozzles 2° NPS or larger shall be provided with one connection of 1/2" minimum NPS for a pressure gage unless special considerations allow it to be omitted. See Paragraph RB-10.4. RB-10.33 THERMOMETER CONNECTIONS, All flanged nozzles 4" NPS or larger shall be provided with one connection of 1" minimum NPS for a thermometer unless special considerations allow it to be omitted. See Paragraph RB-10.4 C-10.33 THERMOMETER CONNECTIONS ‘Thermometer connections shall be as specified by the purchaser. See Paragraph C-10.4. RB-10.4 STACKED UNITS Intermediate nozzles between units shall have flat or raised face flanges. Pressure gage and thermometer connections may be omitted in one of the two mating connections of units connected in series, Bolting in flanges of mating connections between stacked exchangers shall be removable without moving the exchangers. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association a1SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB C-10.4 STACKED UNITS Intermediate nozzles between units shall have flat or raised face flanges. Pressure gage and thermometer connections may be omitted in one of the two mating connections of units connected in series. RCB-10.5 SPLIT FLANGE DESIGN Circumstances of fabrication, installation, or maintenance may preclude the use of the normal integral or loose full ring nozzle flanges. Under these conditions, double split ring flanges may be used in accordance with the Code. *RCB-10.6 NOZZLES LOADINGS Heat exchangers are not intended to serve as anchor points for piping: therefore, for purposes of design, nozzle loads are assumed to be negligible, unless the purchaser specifically detalis such loads in his inquiry as indicated in Figure RGP-RCB-10.6. The analysis and any modifications in the design or construction of the exchanger to cope with these loads shall be to the purchaser's account. ‘The "Recommended Good Practice” section of these standards provides the designer with additional information regarding imposed piping loads. 92 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 RCB-11 END FLANGES AND BOLTING Flanges and bolting for external joints shall be in accordance with Code design rules, subject to the limitations set forth in the following paragraphs 11.1 MINIMUM BOLT SIZE ‘The minimum permissible bolt diameter is 3/4° (M20). Sizes 1° and smaller shall be Coarse Thread Series, and larger sizes shall be &-Pich Thread Series, Dimensional standards ao included in Section 9, Table D-5. Metric thread pitch is shown in Section 9, Table D-5M. C-11.1 MINIMUM BOLT SIZE The minimum recommended bolt diameter is 1/2" (M14). If bolting smaller than 1/2" (M14) is used, Brecautions shal be taken to avoid overstressing the bolting. Dimensional standards are included in ion 9, Table D-5. Metric bolting is shown in Section 9, Table D-5M. B-11.1 MINIMUM BOLT SIZE ‘The minimum permissible bolt diameter shall be 8/8" (M16). Dimensional standards are included in Section 9, Table D-5. Metric bolting is shown in Section 9, Table D-5M, RCB-11.2 BOLT CIRCLE LAYOUT RCB-11.21 MINIMUM RECOMMENDED BOLT SPACING Ths minimum recommenced spacing between bolt centers is given in Section, Table D5 or RCB-11.22 MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED BOLT SPACING ‘The maximum recommended spacing between bolt centers is: ot Gm+05) Bra= 2dy+ where B = Bolt spacing, centerline to centerline, inches (mm) ig Nominal bolt diameter, inches (mm) t= Flange thickness, inches (mm) m= Gasket factor used in Code flange calculations RCB-11.23 LOAD CONCENTRATION FACTOR ‘When the distance between bolt centerlines exceeds recommended B ,.., the total flange moment determined by Code design methods shall be multiplied by a correction factor equal to: Bax where B is the actual bolt spacing as defined by Paragraph RCB-1 1.22. RCB-11.24 BOLT ORIENTATION Bolts shall be evenly spaced and normally shall straddle both natural centertines of the exchanger. For horizontal units, the natural centerlines shall be considered to be the horizontal and vertical centertings of the exchanger. In special cases, the bolt count may be changed from a multiple of four. RCB-11,3 MINIMUM RECOMMENDED WRENCH AND NUT CLEARANCES Minimum recommended wrench and nut clearances are given in Section 9, Table D-5 and Table D-5M. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 93SECTIONS MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-11.4 BOLT TYPE Except for special design considerations, flanges shall be through-bolted with stud bolts, threaded full length with a removable nut on each end. One full stud thread shall extend beyond each nut to indicate full engagement, *RCB-11.5 LARGE DIAMETER LOW PRESSURE FLANGES ‘See "Recommended Good Practice" section, *RCB-11.6 BOLTING-ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE ‘See "Recommended Good Practice" section, 94 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION6 (Note: This section is not metricated.) V-1 SCOPE AND GENERAL V-1.1 SCOPE Fluid flow, inter-related with heat exchanger geometry, can cause heat exchanger tubes to vibrate. This phenomenon is highly complex and the present state-of-the-art is such that the solution to this problem is difficult to define. This section defines the basic data which should be considered when Bvaluating potential flow induced vibration problems associated with heat exchangers. When potential flow induced vibration problems are requested to be evaluated, the relationships presented in this section and/or other methods may be used. Due to the complexity of the problem, the TEMA Guarantee does not cover vibration damage. V-1.2 GENERAL, Damaging tube vibration can ocour under certain conditions of shell side flow relative to baffle configuration and unsupported tube span. The maximum unsupported tube spans in Table RCB-4.52 do not consider potential flow induced vibration problems. In those cases, where the analysis indicates the probability of destructive vibration, the user should refer to Paragraph V-13. \V-2 VIBRATION DAMAGE PATTERNS Mechanical failure of tubes resulting from flow induced vibration may occur in various forms. Damage can result from any of the following independent conditions, or combinations thereof. V-2.1 COLLISION DAMAGE Impact of the tubes against each other or against the vessel wall, due to large amplitudes of the vibrating tube, can result in failure. The impacted area of the tube develops the characteris flattened, boat shape spot, generally at the mid-span of the unsupported length. The tube wall eventually wears thin, causing failure. \V-2.2 BAFFLE DAMAGE Baffle tube holes require a manufacturing clearance (see Paragraph RCB-4.2) over the tube outer diameter to facilitate fabrication. When large fluid forces are present, the tube can impact the batfie hole causing thinning of the tube wall in a circumferential, uneven manner, usually the width of the baffle thickness. Continuous thinning aver a period of time results in tube failure. \V-2.3 TUBESHEET CLAMPING EFFECT ‘Tubes may be expanded into the tubesheet to minimize the crevice between the outer tube wall and the tubesheet hole. The natural frequency of the tube span adjacent to the tubesheet is increased by the clamping effect. However, the stresses due to any lateral deflection of the tube are also maximum at the location where the tube emerges from the tubesheet, contributing to possible tube breakage. \V-2.4 MATERIAL DEFECT PROPAGATION Designs which were determined to be free of harmful vibrations will contain tubes that vibrate with very small amplitude due to the baffle tube hole clearances and the flexibility of the tube span. Such low level stress fluctuations are harmless in homogeneous material. Flaws contained within the ‘material and strategically oriented with respect to the stress field, can readily propagate and actuate tube failure. Corrosion and erosion can add to such failure mechanisms. \V-2.5 ACOUSTIC VIBRATION Acoustic resonance is due to gas column oscillation and is excited by phased vortex shedding. The oscillation creates an acoustic vibration of a standing wave type. The generated sound wave will not affect the tube bundle unless the acoustic resonant frequency approaches the tube natural frequency, although the heat exchanger shel and the atached ping may vibrate, accompanied with ioud noise. When the acoustic resonant frequency approaches the tube natural frequency, any tendency toward tube vibration will be accentuated with possible tube failure. V-3 FAILURE REGIONS Tube failures have been reported in nearly all locations within a heat exchanger. Locations of relatively flexible tube spans and/or high flow velocities are regions of primary concern. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 95SECTION6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION V-3.1 U-BENDS, Outer rows of U-bends have a lower natural frequency of vibration and, therefore, are more susceptible to flow induced vibration failures than the inner rows. \V-3.2 NOZZLE ENTRANCE AND EXIT AREA Impingement plates, large outer tube limits and small nozzle diameters can contribute to restricted entranice and exit areas. These restricted areas usually create high local velocities which can result in producing damaging flow induced vibration. V-3.3 TUBESHEET REGION Unsupported tube spans adjacent to the tubesheet are frequently longer than those in the baffled region of the heat exchanger, and result in lower natural frequencies. Entrance and exit areas are ‘common to this region. The possible high local veloctties, in conjunction with the lower natural frequency, make this a region of primary concem in preventing damaging vibrations. V-3.4 BAFFLE REGION Tubes located in batfle windows have unsupported spans equal to multiples of the baffle spacing. Long unsupported tube spans result in reduced natural frequency of vibration and have a greater tendency to vibrate. V-3.5 OBSTRUCTIONS ‘Any obstruction to flow such as tie rods, sealing strips and impingement plates may cause high localized velocities which can initiate vibration in the immediate vicinity of the obstruction. \V-4 DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS V-4.1 STROUHAL NUMBER ‘Shedding of vortices from isolated tubes in a fluid medium is correlated by the Strouhal Number, which is given by: Vortex shedding frequency, cycles/sec Crossflow velocity ofthe fluid relative to the tube, ft/sec Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: clo= Fin root diameter, ches. Note: In closely spaced tube arrays, the rhythmic shedding of vortices degenerates into a broad turbulence and a correlation based on Strouhal Number alone is inadequate. \-4.2 FLUID ELASTIC PARAMETER ‘A dimensionless parameter used in the correlations to predict flow induced vibration is given by: 144w by Podlo® x 96 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 where Wo™ Effective weight of the tube per unit length, defined in Paragraph V-7.1, lb/ft 5, = Logarithmic decrement in the tube unsupported span (see Paragraph V-8) p= Density of the shell side fluid at its local bulk temperature, Ib/t® cl, = Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: c= Fin root diameter, inches \-5 NATURAL FREQUENCY V-5.1 GENERAL ‘Most heat exchangers have multiple baffle supports and vatied individual unsupported spans. Calculation of the natural frequency of the heat exchanger tube is an essential step in estimating its potential for low induced vibration failure. The current state-of-the-art flow induced vibration Correlations are not sophisticated enough to warrant treating the mult-span tube vibration problem (or mode shapes other than the fundamental) in one comprehensive analysis. Therefore, the potential for vibration is evaluated for each individual unsupported span, with the velocity and natural frequency considered being that of the unsupported span under examination. For more complex mode shapes and mutti-spans of unequal lengths, see Paragraph V-14 Reference (10). \V-5.2 FACTORS AFFECTING NATURAL FREQUENCY ‘The individual unsupported span natural frequency is affected by: (1) Tube elastic and inertial properties and tube geometry. (2) Span shape. (8) Type of support at each end of the unsupported span. (4). Axial loading on the tube unsupported span. (see Paragraph V-6) V-5.21 SPAN SHAPES ‘The basic span shapes are the straight span and the U-bend span, \V-5.22 SPAN SUPPORTS The common support conditions are: (1) Fixed at the tubesheet and simply supported at the baffle (2) Simply supported at each baffle. ‘The baffle supports have clearances which render them non-linear when analyzed as a support. The tubesheet is not rigid and, therefore, the “built-in” assumption is only approximate. These approximations are known to have minor effects on the calculated natural frequency. \V-5.3 FUNDAMENTAL NATURAL FREQUENCY CALCULATION ‘The value of the fundamental natural frequency of a tube unsupported span can be calculated for the combinations of span shape and end support conditions using Table V-5.3, where ‘> Fundamental natural frequency of the tube unsupported span, cycles/sec {= Tube unsupported span as shown in Table V-5.3, inches E Elastic modulus of tube material at the tube metal temperature, psi (see Paragraph RCB-1.43) Effective weight of the tube per unit length, defined in Paragraph V-7.1, lb/ft Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 97SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION inches “is gh = Moment of inertia of the tube cross section, inches * is given by: Mg. ta,* ea de ite), d,= Tube inside diameter, inches a Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: do Fin root diameter, inches 98 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 TABLE V-5.3 FUNDAMENTAL NATURAL FREQUENCY Span Geometry Equation Nomenclature ® Bates I q cS A= Tube axial stress multiplier. See : Paragraph V-6 age coneon: both ends ‘Simply supported @ C= Constant depending on edge Tubesheet Ee Edge condition: both lends fixed A ary}? f= 10.8844] £1) we. condition geomet, ‘Span Geometry € 1 99 2 15.42 3 22.37 « ey r Edge condition: Both ends simply supported © Bs Edge condition: both ends simply supported © 4 FX r Edge condition: both ends simply supported 0 es Edge condition: both ends simply ‘supported r= Mean bend radius, inches C,.= Mode constant of U-bend Span Geometry C, Figure 4 V53 5 v5.34 6 Vs53.2 7 v5.3.3 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 99SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-5.3 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, ae ° © 2 6 °e8 oe 2 5 3 g é < $ eg oS = a wy 2 z = g a 2 oi 3: ole m mM EAA }—t p » | Lt 1 4 2 TTT 5 8 & a 3 2 8 o ° 3 ° ° 3 100 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-5.3.1 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, C ole 7 T ° ° ° i. a 8 8 8 g 8 8 ° 6 o 6 ° Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association SECTION 6 6.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 sarFLe spactnc/naorus (Ap/r ) 101SECTION6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-5.3.2 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, ( 0.20 0.00 0.0 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association BAFFLE SPACING/RADIUS (Lb/r )FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 FIGURE V-5.3.3 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, C ° © BS ° 1A \ 3 = 1 parrLe spactnc/raorus (Lp/r) 0.80 | 6 | ° ai ale SJ ! ‘oA 2 ° 3 3 i ° 8 & 8 © os ° Cu 0.40 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 103SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION V-6 AXIAL TUBE STRESS \V-6.1 AXIAL TUBE STRESS MULTIPLIER By the very function of a heat exchanger, the tubes are subjected to axial loads. Compressive axial loads decrease the tube natural frequency, and tensile loads tend to increase it. The resulting tube axial stress multiplier for a given tube unsupported span is determined by the tube end support conditions. fy Ae ( 1+ cr) where F Tube longitudinal stress, ps! (for fixed tubesheet exchanger, S may be calculated from Paragraph RCB-7.23) A, = Tube metal cross sectional area, inches“ (see Table D-7) Frege KtEL = K = 3Ufor both ends simply supported K = 4.49 for one end fixed, other end simply supported = 21 for both ends fixed E = Elastic modulus of tube material at the tube metal temperature, psl (see Paragraph RCB-1.43) 1= Tube unsupported span, inches 1 = Moment of inertia of the tube cross-section, inches * (see Paragraph V-6.3 and Table D-7) V-6.2 U-TUBES For some applications U-tubes may develop high levels of axial stress. A method to compute the tube axial stresses in the legs of U-tube exchangers is given in Paragraph V-14, Reference (1). \V-7 EFFECTIVE TUBE MASS Te simpity the application ofthe formulae, the constants have been modified to enable the use of weight instead of mass. V-7.1 EFFECTIVE TUBE WEIGHT Effective tube weight is defined as: WoW tt He where Ww, = Total metal weight per unit length of tube, lb/ft (see Table D-7) wp. = 0.00545 p ,Cl, * = Weight of fluid inside the tube per unit length of tube, Ib/ft Hm = Hydrodynamic mass from Paragraph V-7.11 104 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 where ©. = Density of fluid inside the tube at the local tube side fluid bulk temperature, Ib/tt® cl, = Inside diameter of tube, inches \V-7.11 HYDRODYNAMIC MASS Hydrodynamic mass is an effect which increases the apparent weight of the vibrating body due to the displacement of the shell side fluid resulting from: (1), Motion of the vibrating tube (2) The proximity of other tubes within the bundle (@) The relative location of the shell wall Hydrodynamic mass is defined as: Hn =CuWyo where Cm = Added mass coefficient from Figure V-7.11 2 40 = 0.00545 Po Cl, ‘Weight of fluid displaced by the tube per unit length of tube, Ibyft where Po = Density of fluid outside the tube at the local shell side fluid bulk temperature, Ib/tt® (For two phase fluids, use two phase density.) do = Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: do = Finroot diameter, inches Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 105SECTION 6 106 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-7.11 TT Thai hlnier ADDED MASS COEFFICIENT -C»!| TT i771 eb J a [sh Tee 4 1 1 T | & a S & a 3 8 = 5 a a 8 z t ‘ - fat = ‘SQUARE PITCH (45, 90°) | | 1.2 [ [ieee a ea ea P| el | feelea| | ft | t a Tot P= | - 1 t | [3 hry Letopeter | 1.0 | td oe eee eee TUBE PITCH TUBE OD Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 \V-8 DAMPING ‘The mechanisms involved in damping are numerous, and the various effects are not readily measured or quantified. The following expressions for logarithmic decrement, 5 ;, are based strictly on experimental observations and idealized models. For shell side liquids, 8 ; is equal to the greater of , or 5 » 3.41 dy 0.012 dy — or Wofs wo [] Shell side liquid viscosity, at the local shell side liquid bulk temperature, centipoise Outside diameter of tube, inches. For integrally finned tubes, do = Fin root diameter, inches where KH do Po =Density of shell side fluid at the local bulk temperature, Ib/tt® f , = Fundamental natural frequency of the tube span, cycles/sec Wo = Effective weight of the tube as defined in Paragraph V-7.1, Ibyft For shell side vapors 6 = 6 as follows 1(te\ by oss (#) where N= Number of spans ty = Baffle or support plate thickness, inches 1 =Tube unsupported span, inches For two phase shell side media pido Bry 0.00221 F (Eg) F (Sr) —— ](Cru)] where f(€,) = Void fraction function rw for €,<0.4 Volume flowrate of gas, tt*/sec V,= Volume flowrate of liquid, ft?/sec f(s,)= Surface tension function Sr Sto Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 107SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION = Surface tension of shell side liquid at the local bulk temperature. (See Paragraph V-14, Reference (20)) Syro= Surface tension of shell side liquid at ambient temperature. (See Paragraph \V-14, Reference (20)) Density of shell side li = Density of shell side gas at the local bulk temperature, Ib/ft® id at the local bulk temperature, Ib/ft® Outside diameter of tube, inches. For integrally finned tubes, cl. = Fin root diameter, inches Effective tube weight as defined in Paragraph V-7.1, lb/ft Note: Use two phase density in the calculation for hydrodynamic mass P rr = Two phase density at local bulk temperature Ib/ft? =P (1 €,)* Poke Cry = Confinement function, see Table V-8 Total two phase damping by = Bre + By + by Note: Use two phase properties for density and hydrodynamic mass. TABLE V-8 CONFINEMENT FUNCTION Cry ‘Tube Pitch Triangular Pitch ‘Square Pitch Tube OD Cru Cry 1.20 2.25 1.87 125 2.03 1.72 1.33 178 1.56 4.50 147 1.35 108 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 \V-9 SHELL SIDE VELOCITY DISTRIBUTION V-9.1 GENERAL, One of the most important and least predictable parameters of flow induced vibration is fluid velocity. To calculate the local fiuid velocity ata particular point in the heat exchanger is a dificult task. Very complex flow patterns are present ina heat exchanger shell. Various amounts of fluid bypass the tube bundle of leak through clearances between baifles and shell, or tube and baffle tube holes. Until methods are developed to accurately calculate local fluid velocities, the designer may use average crossfiow velocities based on available empirical methods. V-9.2 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY The crossflow velocity in the bundle varies from span to span, from row to row within a span, and from tube to tube within a row. The reference crossfiow velocity is calculated for each region of interest (see Paragraph V-3) and is based on the average velocity across a representative tube row in that region ‘The presence of pass partition lanes aligned in the crossflow direction, clearance between the bundle and the shell, tube-to-baffle hole annular clearances, etc. reduce the net flow rate of the shell side fluid in crosstiow. This should be considered in computing the reference crossflow velocity. \V-9.21 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY CALCULATIONS ‘The following method of calculating a reference crossfiow velocity takes into account fluid bypass and leakage which are related to heat exchanger geometry. The method is valid for single phase shell side fluid with single segmental battles in TEMA E shells. Other methods may be used to evaluate reference crossflow veloctties. Reference crossfiow velocity is given by: Fs) (M) (ay) (P 0)(3600) V-9.211 CALCULATION OF CONSTANTS: ‘The constants used in the calculation of the reference crosstlow velocity are given by: ft/sec Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Associ 109SECTION6 110 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION TABLE V-9.2114 TUBE PATTERN (See Figure RCB-2.4) 30° 60° 90° 45° Cy 1.26 1.09 4.26 0.90 Ce 0.82 Gt 0.66 0.56 Cs 1.48 1.28 1.38 117 m 0.85 0.87 0.93 0.80 TABLE V-9.211B at Cx vscutto-diameter ratio Dy h 0.10 | 015 | 020 | 025 | 090 | 035 | 040 | 045 | 050 Di Ce 094 | 090 | 085 | 0.80 | 074 | 068 | 062 | 054 | 049 Linear interpolation is permitted M. a «| SEES rand 22) (a) “lea nF MCrd* Fa(A)+ Fa) sea rs cnn Z)” ee (my(C)" a= (s)(Ps)(Ca) where D4 = Outer tube limit (OTL), inches cl, = Tube hole diameter in baffle, inches Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 dg = Outside dlameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: d= Fin outside diameter, inches P= Tube pitch, inches y= Baffle spacing, inches ®o= Density of shell side fluid at the local bulk temperature, Ib/ft* WW = Shell fiuid flow rate, lb/hr /h = Height from baffle cut to shell inside diameter, inches V-9.3 SEAL STRIPS. Seal strips are often used to help block the circumferential bypass space between a tube bundle and is iocrecoas te relerencs ctssfow wocly and ou be considered in vbvaion shale fon analysis Local fluid velocity in the vicinity of seal strips may be significantly higher than the average crossflow velocity. (See Paragraph V-14, Reference 6) V-9.31 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY WITH SEAL STRIPS ‘The reference crossfiow velocity is calculated by using a modified value for C , in the equations in Paragraph V-9.211 [asses V-9.4 PASS LANES PARALLEL TO FLOW When pass lanes are oriented paralle! to flow (at 90° to the baffle cut) they create a relatively low resistance path for fluid to follow. The net effect is for less fluid to cross the tube bundle, resulting in a lower average crossflow velocity. However, tubes adjacent to these lanes may be subjected to high local velocities. The number and width of these lanes should be considered when the reference crossfiow velocity is calculated. \V-9.41 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY WITH PASS LANES PARALLEL TO FLOW Toaccount for pass lanes parallel to flow if they are not blocked by some typeof special baffle, a modified value of D can be used where D3 = Outer tube limit minus (number of parallel pass lanes x width of pass lanes), inches V-9.5 BUNDLE ENTRANCE REGION AND IMPINGEMENT PLATES. Tubes directly beneath inlet nozzles and impingement plates can be subjected to local fluid velocities greater than those in other parts of the bundle, A number of documented vibration problems have been caused by high inlet fuid veloctties. These standards provide guidelines for maximum velocity in this region and set criteria for the use of impingement plates. The 0 I” limits in Paragraph RCB-4.6 are furnished for protection against tube erosion, but do not necessarily prevent vibration damage. \V-9.6 INTEGRALLY FINNED TUBES In computing the reference crossflow velocity, the presence of fins shall be taken into account. For the purposes of using the equations in Paragraph V-9.2 to calculate a reference crossflow velocity, the fin diameter should be used in place of the nominal tube OD for integrally finned tubes. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association aSECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION \V-10 ESTIMATE OF CRITICAL FLOW VELOCITY The critical low velocity, Vc, for a tube span is the minimum cross-flow velocity at which that span may vibrate with unacceptably large amplitudes. The critical flow velocity for tube spans in the window, overlap, inlet and outlet regions, U-bends, and all atypical locations should be calculated. The critical velocity, Vc, is defined by: Diato f/sec 12 where = Value obtained from Table V-10.1 f= Fundamental natural frequency, cycles/sec (see Paragraph V-6.3) do™ Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: d.= Finroot diameter, inches ‘The user should ensure that the reference crossfiow velocity /, at every location, is less than 1” for that location. 112 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 TABLE V-10.1 FORMULAE FOR CRITICAL FLOW VELOCITY FACTOR, D Tube Pattern Parameter (See Figure RB-2.4) | lange for Dimensionless Critical Flow Velocity Factor, D x Oitot See) 30) -86( ‘over 1 t0.800 Eanes 8.86| —-0.9 ]x°® Rass 0.01 tot 2.80x°"" 60° over 1 to.300 2.80x°8 0.03 100.7 2.10% 90° ‘over 0.7 to 300 2.38x%* 0.1 t0. 800 4° 4.13 P = Tube pitch, inches dy = Tube OD or fin root diameter for integrally finned tubes, inches 144w by x= "7" = Fluid elastic parameter Potto where Po = Shall side fluid density at the corresponding local shell side bulk temperature, Ib/tt ® 5; = Logarithmic decrement (See Paragraph V-8) Wo = Effective weight of the tube per unit length, ib/ft (See Paragraph V-7.1) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 113SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION 114 V-11 VIBRATION AMPLITUDE V-11.1 GENERAL ‘There are four basic flow induced vibration mechanisms that can occur in a tube bundle. These are the fluidelastic instability, vortex shedding, turbulent buffeting, and acoustic resonance. The first three mechanisms are accompanied by a tube vibration amplitude while acoustic resonance causes a loud acoustic noise with virtually no increase in tube amplitude. Fluidetastic instability is the most damaging in that it results in extremely large amplitudes of vibration with ultimate damage patterns as described in Paragraph V-2. The design approach in this case is to ayoid the fuldelstic instablty stuation thereby avoiding the accompanying large ampitude of vibration (see Paragraph V-10). Vortex shedding may be a problem when there isa frequency match with the natural frequency of the tube. Vibration due to vortex shedding is expected when fn <2f ve, where f. " 12SV /d, (see Paragraph V-12.2), Only then should the amplitude be calculated. This frequency match may result in a vibration amplitude which can be damaging to tubes in the vicinity of the shell inlet and outlet connections. Vortex shedding degenerates into broad band turbulence and both mechanisms are intertwined deep inside the bundle. Vortex shedding and turbulent buffeting vibration amplitudes are tolerable within specified limits. Estimation of amplitude and respective limits are shown below. V-11.2 VORTEX SHEDDING AMPLITUDE Cup od oY? where Peak amplitude of vibration at midspan for the first mode, for single phase fluids, inches C= Litt coefficient for vortex shedding, (see Table V-11.2) by = Density of fluid outside the tube at the local shell side fluid bulk temperature, Ib/tt® dg = Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally inned tubes, cl =fin root diameter, inches V = Reference crosstiow velocity, ft/sec (see Paragraph V-9.2) 6, = Logarithmic decrement (see Paragraph V-8) {a= Fundamental natural frequency of the tube span, cycles/sec (see Paragraph V-5.3) w= Effective tube weight per unit length of tube, Ib/t (see Paragraph V-7.1) ‘V-11.21 RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE Ye $0,020, V-11.3 TURBULENT BUFFETING AMPLITUDE CrP oleV* “nb, Fw, Yee where yg Maximum amplitude of vibration for single phase fluids, inches C, = Force coefficient (see Table V-11.3) \V-11.31 RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE. Yue $ 0-02d, , inches Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION TABLE V-11.2 LIFT COEFFICIENTS Cr TUBE PATTERN (See Figure RCB-2.4) Pp 30° 60° 0° 45° a, 1.20 ‘0.090 0.090 0.070 0.070 1.25 0.091 0.091 0.070 0.070 1.33 0.065 0.017 0.070 0.010 4150 0.025, 0.047 0.068 0.049 TABLE V-11.3 FORCE COEFFICENTS Cr Location r Bundle Entrance Tubes $40 0.022 >40<88 0.00045 f, + 0.04 288 0 Interior Tubes <40 0.012 >40<88 -0,00025 f, + 0.022 288 o Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association SECTION 6 115SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION V-12 ACOUSTIC VIBRATION ‘Acoustic resonance is due to a gas column oscillation. Gas column oscillation can be excited by phased vortex shedding or turbulent buffeting. Oscillation normally occurs perpendicular to both the tube axis and flow direction. When the natural acoustic frequency of the shell approaches the exciting frequency of the tubes, a coupling may occur and kinetic energy in the flow stream is converted into acoustic pressure waves. Acoustic resonance may occur independently of mechanical tube vibration, V-12.1 ACOUSTIC FREQUENCY OF SHELL Acoustic frequency is given by: woof bat? a laisse) | oytes/eee se) where w = Distance between reflecting walls measured parallel to segmental baffle cut, inches P., = Operating shell side pressure, psia ‘y= Specific heat ratio of shell side gas, dimensionless = Shell side fluid density at local fluid bulk temperature, Ib/it® x =P! ma Br a, x p, = Longitudinal pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) _p, = Transverse pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.28) 1. = Outside diameter of tube, inches. For integrally finned tubes, cl, = Fin outer diameter, inches i= mode (1, 2,3, 4) V-12.2 VORTEX SHEDDING FREQUENCY The vortex shedding frequency is given by: 12sv fu= “Ga .cycles/sec where V = Reference crossfiow velocity, ft/sec (see Paragraph V-9.2) S = Strouhal number (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) 1) = Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: y= Fin outer diameter, inches 116 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 V-12.3 TURBULENT BUFFETING FREQUENCY ‘The turbulent buffeting frequency is given by: 120 [s.oo(1-3.) +028] ome where y= Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: d= Fin outer diameter, inches Pe alarr x, =P! "a, P< Longitudinal pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.28) P.= Transverse pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) V = Reference crossflow velocity, ft/sec (see Paragraph V-9.2) V-12.4 ACOUSTIC RESONANCE Incidence of acoustic resonance is possible if any one of the following conditions is satisfied at any operating condition. V-12.41 CONDITION A PARAMETER, OB F< fa< 12h uy or O.Bfe 2 nN rs ° °o 3 ° HOLIVS NOILO3YYOD GLI #4 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 137SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2E 0.8 lo io 10 OR MORE EVEN NUMBER OF TUBE PASSES 05 LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR 03 04 P= TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY 5 SHELL PASSES 0.2 i a HELLS 2 | ° 3 3 YOLOV4 NOILO3NYOD LWT =4 lo a 2 5 2 a 2 ° o 138 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.2F 10 09 0.8 or 06 P=: TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY 12 OR MORE EVEN NUMBER OF TUBE PASSES. 05 LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR 04 6 SHELL PASSES r 03 te ty 02 Tit On jo @ 2 ° 3 YOLOVS NOILOZNNOD GLNT = 3 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 139SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2G ‘3 TUBE PASSES (2 COUNTER AND 1 COCURRENT) LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR P= TEMPERATURE EFFECTIVENESS. T, 1 t 1 SHELL PASS 7 1.00 90 3 g a ‘WOLOVs NOMORWOD GWT = 4 050 140 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 + 8 z= & g 2 « 5 = S = - = oe 2 - 8 & . gle gla le Z10 oe 5|° at E|2 : : z “iE d gl- 8 a) e | a a e) 3 = 5 a |e - co > o ° o o Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 1441SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.21 g = Fr 3 8 2 © ° 5 8 =z é 2 i gir 2/6 lu 2 Ja elec 2/8 B fie oe Bia § wile s|= = gla g|? = = i) | oc _ Qo 8 eee 7 2 5 Kd ja Le Spe ay Wou2V4 NOIL93N¥O9 O1W7 i e a y ee é e é o 142 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.2J 2 a 2 a 2 o. = S wi 3 5 2 pepe IS Sa ES Oo 5 =< 2 ~ |e = iS |2 8 se 2 1 2 B13 orle 2 ule a G6 wi o BSla z Pale & g = as a" 2 zZ ge a on aw a| 3 = 6 in a io lv |e Ss |o= Ke iS e e m ~ 5 ° 3 3 YOLOV4 NOILOBHHOO QLW1=4 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 143SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2K : 7 7 2 7 z : s 8 2 cn °o e oO zt z 2 S als aiw Z| Feit ze LO ae w/o we wo Peeecs Els g| * | = be | a 3} & el a) 5 = 5 KALE YOLOVS NOILI3HHOD OLWT=4 144 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2L, tact 1-1 a eu J Pee ere eee SaSSvd 3NL (py 40 FALLIN HO) TIBHS MOT LNas ——— y 4OLOVS NOILOZYYOD OLWT ut SSANFAILI9443 IUNLVUIMWTL = d 3 145 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS 146 FIGURE T-3.2M 2 TUBE PASSES LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR Pp = TEMPERATURE EFFECTIVENESS DOUBLE SPLIT FLOW SHELL te aa ls ae & if T fo da L 1 1 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association07] 06 05} oa] 0a 02 on oF THERMAL RELATIONS SECTION7 FIGURE T-3.3A ‘TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY 10 COUNTERFLOW EXCHANGERS: Pe tert Tt R= wo)WC ‘See Par. 73.3 = Overall heat transfer coeticient os Ax Total Surtace w= Flow rate of tube fluid = Flow rate of shel fui 08 c= Specific heat of tube fluid C= Soecitic heat of shel fluid 0203 (Ost 2 3.4 66. 8D UAswe Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 147SECTION 7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.3B 10 ‘TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY "| SHELL PASS. EVEN NUMBER OF TUBE PASSES 300 Pay. 7.33 Fig. 73.24 os] U = Overall he transfer coefficient A ~ Total Surtace tw = Flow rate of tube fluid 08) Wy = Flow rato of shel fluid = Speciic heat of tube fluid C= Specific heat of shel fui 07; 06; 0s} oa] 0] 0 | ‘On 0203 «Os SO 2 > 4 5 6 8 W UA/we 148 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Assoc!07, o| os| 03] 03] oa 0 THERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.3C 19 ‘TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY 2 SHELL PASSES 4 OR MULTIPLE OF 4 TUBE PASSES Pe tent seePar.138 Tit hg 1328 ‘a a= woe : = Overall heat transercotfiient ‘Ax Total Surace w= Flow ate of tube fis aa lw = Flow ate of shel is = Spectc heat of tube tid © = Specific heat of sell suis a 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 VA/we Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 149SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS (Note: This section is not metricated) P-1 FLUID DENSITY P-1.1 SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF LIQUID PETROLEUM FRACTIONS. ‘The spectfic gravities of liquid petroleum fractions and saturated light hydrocarbons are shown in Figure P-1.1 P-1.2 DENSITY OF ORGANIC LIQUIDS The general density nomograph Fig. P-1.2 permits the approximation of the density of organic liquids at temperatures between -150° F and +500” F, if densities at two temperatures are known. Table P-1.2 lists the coordinates on the center grid for locating the reference points for 65 compounds. ‘The reference point for a substance may be determined if the density is known for two different temperatures. The intersection point of the two straight lines joining the corresponding values of the known temperatures and densities is the desired reference point of the substance, P-1.3 COMPRESSIBILITY FACTORS FOR GASES AND VAPORS ‘The P - v~T relationships for gases and vapors may conveniently be expressed by the equation Pu ZRT, where Pis the absolute pressure, vis the specific volume, Tis the absolute temperature, Risa constant which may be found by dividing the universal gas constant J by the molecular weight of the gas, and Z is the compressibility factor. Z has the value of unity for an ideal gas under all conditions and, therefore, is a measure of the extent of the deviation of a real gas or vapor from the ideal state. Figures P-1.3A, P-1.9B, P-1.9C are generalized plots of compressibility factor as a function of reduced pressure, ?/ P., and reduced temperature, T/T .. The dotted curves represent constant values of the pseudo-reduced volume v,“= v/( RT 1.2and AC, <2,AC,~=5.03P,/T, °,forl, <1.2and AC,<2.5,4C,=9P,/T, * For critical property data, see Paragraph P-6.1 and P-6.2. P-3 HEAT CONTENT Heat content of petroleum fractions, including the effect of pressure, are shown as functions of temperature and API gravity for various UOP K values in Figure P-3.1 The latent heats of vaporization of various liquids may be estimated by the use of Figure P-3.2. The recommended range of use is indicated for the compounds listed. ‘See Table P-3.3 for heat capacity ratios for various gases. P-4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY P-4.1 CONVERSION OF UNITS Table P-4.1 gives factors for converting thermal conductivity values from one set of units to another. P-4,2 HYDROCARBON LIQUIDS ‘The thermal conductivities of liquid normal paraffinic hydrocarbons are shown in Figure P-4.2. P-4.3 MISCELLANEOUS LIQUIDS AND GASES, Tables P-4.3A and P-4.3B give tabulated values of thermal conductivity for a number of liquids and ‘gases at atmospheric pressure. P-4.4 GASES AND LIQUIDS AT ELEVATED PRESSURES ‘Thermal conductivity for gases at elevated pressure can be corrected by the use of Figure P-4.4A. ‘Thermal conductivity for liquids at elevated pressure can be corrected by the use of Figure P-4.4B. ‘This chart is intended for use above 500 psia and when 7/T is less than 0.95, P-5 VISCOSITY P.5.1 VISCOSITY CONVERSION A viscosity conversion plot, Figure P51 provides a means of converting viscosity from Saybolt Redwood or Engler time to kinematic viscosity in centistokes. The absolute viscosity in centipoises may be determined by multiplying the kinematic viscosity in centistokes by the specific gravity Table P-5.1 gives factors for converting viscosity values to various systems of units. P-5.2 PETROLEUM OILS The viscosities of petroleum oils having Watson and Netson (UOP) characterization factors of 10.0, 41.0, 11.8 and 12.5 are shown plotted against temperatures in Figures P-5.2A, P-5.2B, P-5.2C and P5.20. P-5.3 LIQUID PETROLEUM FRACTIONS Figures P-5.3A and P-5.3B give viscosity data for a number of typical petroleum fractions plotted as straight lines on ASTM viscosity charts. These charts are so constructed that for any given petroleum oil the viscosity-temperature points lie on a straight line. They are, therefore, a convenient means for determining the viscosity of a petroleum oil at any temperature, provided viscosities at two temperatures are known. Streams of similar API gravity may have widely different viscosities; therefore, values of viscosity shown here should be considered as typical only. P-5.4 MISCELLANEOUS LIQUIDS AND GASES ‘The viscosities of certain liquids are shown as functions of temperature in Figure P-5.4A. The viscosities of certain gases and vapors at one atmosphere pressure are given by Figure P-5.4B. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 151SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS P.5.5 EFFECT OF PRESSURE ON GAS VISCOSITY Figure P-S.5 is a generalized chart which may be used to estimate the viscosities of gases and vapors at elevated pressure if the critical temperature and pressure and the viscosity at low pressure are known, The viscosity ratio, 1, Loin, 1S plotted against reduced pressure, ?, , with reduced temperature, 7, as a parameter, where, 1 a;n€Nd 1, are respectively the viscosities at atmospheric pressure and at pressure P. For critical property data, see Paragraph P-6, P-6 CRITICAL PROPERTIES P-6.1 PURE SUBSTANCES Table P-6.1 gives values of the molecular weights, critical temperatures, and critical pressures for a Variety of pure compounds. For the calculation of compressibility factor, it is recommended that the critical pressures and temperatures of hydrogen, helium, and neon be increased by 118 psi and 14.4" Rirespectively. P-6.2 GAS AND VAPOR MIXTURES Figures P-1.3, P-2.5, and P-5.5 may be used to estimate the properties of gas mixtures as well as pure substances if pseudo-oritical properties are used in place of the critical values. The pseudo-critical temperature and pressure are defined as follows: Tye YT ert ¥ aT eat Val eg Poet Yi Per tVaPeatenrntY Pew where ¥ ,, 2, etc. are the mole fractions of the individual components and 7, . T0s099y) ‘SauNLVeadWAL HOI, wv SNOUDVad WASTOULd 40 ALIAVEO DusIDads JLVWIXOUddY 008 oot oe 10 40 aaMsaL 000 08 40 3u0uvaaaiaL oon 008 =losto Atavas 91419306 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 154PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-1.2 i ri 8 Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Centigrade Grams per ml GENERAL DENSITY NOMOGRAPH 75-09 Density ‘Temperature 0 10 20 30 40 x ut naa ya 100 E150 X AND Y VALUES FOR DENSITY NOMOGRAPH 50 60 70 80° ‘compound x oy xy ‘compound x ¥ ‘eae Acid 496 935 23 G4 Methyl aut ug a4 esis Be iS 22e 388 etadecone 12 408 ioe it Bs Bh zt By 38 Ba Re BI Ss ibe 442 Be 8S Bo 33 He 26 Be oe ey abs. HS iS By go Bo Be Bs 28 3 ee he ie? 367 1038 By ies Be a 30 "2a ab BS BS io He ie Be be Hs 0 abo BE A 1088 ga Bs Be Se ise “ao oi 03 i RE iS 3e2 Be i 30 see Bedarane Ho ag See eee Be ie Belgians = HR BS Bo etl Se cer peetrane He a7 Bo 9 Be 83 Ethanetniot, Bo ogs Men ay is Bo Ethyl acetate, 30 950 © Metmyl formate aga 74.6 nUndeeane’ 1s 382 Etnj atcanst 2S Meth propionate | 365 685 Ret: Otvmer, Josefoite & Schmutle, I Engr. Chem, Vol. 405,868:5 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 155PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-1.3A, SECTION 8 @ ‘aunssaud a390nd3y ° 60 80 Lo 20 so vo £0 z0 bo oo BONY BUNSSBed MOT | | = nome fi 4, “suouvuaamas 0200034 oN ALUWHO ‘aunssaue o3on034 SLUVHO ALITISISSSYdNOD a3zI1vu3N39 4.4380 — NOS13N %O1CNOTLVIAIO——— cores =s1 ALIMIGISS3HdWOD Z ‘woLows Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 156PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-1.38 Bez 4.7 ‘woLvs Aurweiss3uano9 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association SECTION 8 ® REDUCED PRESSURE, 157SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS 158 FIGURE P-1.3C GENERALIZED NELSON— OBERT ‘COMPRESSI HIGH PRESSURE RANGE eoveto entoine, ¢ a 2 to} ABLz ‘uoiova A1reissauano ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association Ey 30 35 70. 20 REDUCED PRESSURE, 16 ®PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.1 SPECIFIC HEATS OF PETROLEUM FRACTIONS. aes LiQuiD STATE {cp = (0.6811 0.005) + 10.000015-0.900045)) x (9055K + 035) SP. OR AT 40" R40" F ae = CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR 1 peonees 1.000 NOTE: FOR MIDCONTINENT STOCKS (WHERE K = 11.8) 900 0900 070 BTU/LB.x DEGREE F. 070 o 0690 oso 000 CORMECTION FACTOR (0.055 + 035) 0400 © 10 200 310 woos aam 700800900 T00D1100, TEMPERATURE - DEGREES F. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association SECTION 8 1200 159SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.2 090 ca SPECIFIC HEATS OF PETROLEUM FRACTIONS ‘VAPOR PHASE 070 06s ‘SPECIFIC HEAT - BTU/LB. X DEGREE F. 03s LUNES OF CONSTANT WATSON ta NEFERENCE, (CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR = FALION & WATSON, as SF ORG 60" F NATIONAL PETROLEUM NEWS ‘Te = MEAN BOILING POINT, DEG. RANKINE JUNE 7, 1944S. R372, RIT (WEG. R= DEG. F160) 01m) ameter. ‘TEMPERATURE - DEGREES F. 160 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-2.3A ¢,- BTU/LB, XDEGREE F. SPECIFIC HEATS oF N-PARAFFINIC GASES Narionat 0 Wo aw «0 S«OSC«SSCat 00S S« ODOC TEMPERATURE DEGREES F. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 161SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.38 treNTENE aUTENE, 730 rit onthe Ciel F 409 BTU/LB, X DEGREE o g i" + SPECIFIC HEATS. 0.300 Be N-MONO-OLEFINIC GASES NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS 000 a er a a) wo 900 =O 100 ao TEMPERATURE. DEGREES F. 162 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationG,- BTU/LB. X DEGREE F. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-2.3C 0800 CYCLOHEANE 400 HENZENE 0450 SPECIFIC HEAT oF AROMATIC AND CYCLO-PARAFFINIC GASES 0380 Apr mosey 4 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS 02% 0.200 a a TEMPERATURE DEGREES F. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 163SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.40 SPECIFIC HEATS OF LIQUIDS Tau mE eg FEETIC AciO 100 Ra me BI SPECIFIC HEAT DEG F 800, BENSYL ALC BEN Sse Ree BRINE 25% Ne set heated EARHON TETeAGHLORIOE SHLgRgpRNENe BestlBeoe THANE, BettoroneTeane DIBHENY BIPHENY CHE THANE BIPHENYL ODE 2 DowTHERM A. Ho of, O18 300 04 708. 05 Ee seuss s 00 ,-BTU/1B. X DEGREE F. Tiguib Fea Feo ach FRE ai a faerie rr 07 510 08 eee ee ee rae beta parece Fen aco en BIS caro Ny Baan 1 Pevtene Para fy permision trom Heat Transmission, by Wo H, McAdams. Copyrighted 1954. McGraw Hull Book Company. Ine ~100 0°, 30 Sea al ES Be Be. 164 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTIONS FIGURE P-2.48 SPECIFIC HEATS-GASES 1 ATM. C= Specific heat = Btu/Lb) (Deg F) + Peu/(Lb) (DeqC) Deg F F-20 0 200 400 600 800 J px: rr 1 | RETYLENE E o7 tooo] ig}. [06 1 AxfHona F 4200 & ‘ARGON DIOKIDE EOS v4oo 4] # ExEBaNe Hoe 20 F-04 ay ° weoo 4} Sf E™ANE E 4 13% 3 E- 03 1800 Bee ieee 2000 ARS, rae 2200 | anata nn 20004} af 2600 8 METHANE 8 25 | niraic oxioe on asta" Ca Bled E Batt omen E oor if eice Fave — 05, By pormission om Heat Transmission, by W. H. McAdams. Copyrighted 1954. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Ine. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 165SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P.2.5 ,— 6, (BTU/MOL x °R) 02 o1 oon Correction to Molal Heat Capacity ‘ot Gases Co Molo Hest Copecity at High Presvre Co" Mola Heat Copocit ot Low Pressure 16 Baduced Temperate Pr Reduced Pressure 09, or cr a bs a8 10 2 7 Reprinted by permission from Indust and Enaineering Chemisty, vol 49. p. le 987. A. H. Weins ond J. Tote 166 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-3.1 HEAT CONTENT OF PETROLEUM FRACTIONS INCLUDING THE EFFECT OF PRESSURE a a a a a TEMPERATURE, “F a 8 8 8 Reprinted by permission of Shell Development Company. Copraht 1948 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 167SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS 168 00 1300 L 3 Lilititit it a & riiitiititt a FIGURE P-3.2 LATENT HEATS OF VAPORIZATION OF VARIOUS LIQUIDS +. | Range Frean'td cer) Freon. (ecury Freon i (GHC Freon.92(eHCIFs) Freon is (ccuFccir Freon.Li4 ecinccie) Heptone (2 LiguID Se RY Tents Aeld woo [212392 [5 Smphateahel 506 | 392572 | 60 Serene 552 | “sore | 38 Botan m) Sor | 1oeig8 | 28 Butane ays | leraes [3 508 | 302.302 | 17 ‘uy seh Best | 63 Butyl steshet (see) | soe | 387.817 | 36 Burytatconet caen) | $38 | 302392 | 39 Carbon dosice 31 | sozie |33 Se: | “S057? | 38 Dreniroetnylone cle) | 888 | 392572 | 94 Diphenyt 22 Bipneny! 3s Bipheny 88 Biohen onde 3 Eth ateshel a 30 2 Ethyl ether a Etnyt etner is Methyt enone Methyl enlorise Methy! formate Netyane chore Nitrous oxide em Frchioroetytene Water BOE DE ESSE ESEEGRESBEREEEESE: Berguseaseagcoeeanseess Example:—For water at 212°F, t.—t = 707-212 = 495 and the latent heat per Ib is 970 Btu (Latent heat accurate within + 10 per cent) fx! 1st E6, Donald Q, Kern; McGraw-Hill Bock Company, reprinted by permission. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association F 3300 E1500 E we Latent heat, Btu/tTo convert the mi numerical value expr Block common to both PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTIONS TABLE P-3.3 HEAT CAPACITY RATIOS (C,/C,) Acetylene 1.26 Air 1.403 ‘Ammonia 1.310 Argon 1.688 Benzene 41.10 (200° F) Carbon Dioxide 1.04 Chlorine 1.856 Dichlorodifiouromethane 1.139 (77°F) Ethane 1.22 Ethy| Alcohol 1.13 (200° F) Ethyl Ether 1.08 (05°F) Ethylene 1.255 Helium 1.860 (292° F) Hexane (n-) 1.08 (176 °F) Hydrogen 1.410 Methane 1.31 Methyl Alcohol 1.208 (171 °F) Nitrogen 1.404 Oxygen 1.401 Pentane (n+) 1.086 (189 °F) Sulfur Dioxide 1.29 (All values at 60°F and one atmosphere unless otherwise noted) TABLE P-4.1 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY CONVERSION FACTORS erical value of c property expressed in one of the unite in the lefthhand column of the table to the fed im one of the unite in the top. row of tne table, multiply the lormer value by the fecter in the ie Be cal esa watt Tecag deg Pein | Renan tog Poort bocvay cmmaeg Opera) Weg dey Opera | Wemcdea prom ase 1 0.08898 3.445 X10 0.1240 1422 X 107 See 1200 1 4.194 10 1488 ooi7an 2203 mais Hl 60 4187 nee osn 2778x107 1 cores aaa 778 0.7388 e599 1 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 169SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-4.2 aaa aa as THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF NORMAL PARAFFINIC HYDROCARBON LIQUIDS ETE HIE ett aS ES 13 fant, Robert W. "Physical Properties of Hydrocarbon Gulf Publishing Company (1968) 12 Michaelian, M.S. & Lockhart, F. J, “Liquid "Thermal Conductiltis” Univ. of Southern Californla (1968) HIETE a 10 Ee aw Wa or TEE THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY 06 EEE 170 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-4.38 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF LIQUIDS B= Baa Morag. 01°F. /M) A linear she data are recommended fnton wih temperature may be assumed. The extreme valier given cons SECTION 8. Iso the tompersuze limite over which Liquid k Liquid k Acetic Acid 62 | .092|| Formaldehyde no | 18s 300 | ‘078 0} 92 Aeotone 0 | 083 ea | 6 170 | 076 |} Glycerine 88] 161 Acetylene: 200 | 97 390 | 181 110} (089]] Hepiane (N) so | 074 a2 | os7' 300 | 050 Acrylic Acid 32 | 144|| Hoxano (N) so | 72 toa | “32a! son | 046 320 | (086|| Heptyl Alcohol 68 | 077 Allyl. Alcohol a | 095, 230 | 971 212 | 082|| Hexy! Alcohol 68 | 077 Amyl Alcohol 8 | 089) 250 | 074 212 | .085|| Methylethy!-Ketone (MEK) 0 | 089 Aniline 68 | 133] 20 | 067 300 | (089|| Mothy1 Alcohol (Methanol) 2 | 13 Benzene 68 | o8s| 300 | 095 220 | 059]] nonane (N) so | 07 Bromebenzene 32 | ‘o8s| 300 | 038 320 | .059|| Octane so | 076 Butyl Aeotate (N) 32 | o8a| 00 | 054 320 | .056|| Para Xylene 58 | 075 Buty! Alcohol (ISO) =< | 100 176 | 06s so. | 057 390 | 047 160 | .077|| Pentane 0 | 068 300 | (075! 250 | 098 Butyl Alcohol (0) 40 | 104[} Propy! Alcohol m) =40 | 105 00 | ‘084 00 | 072 Carbon Disullide 112 | 084} Propy! Alcohol (ISO) 40 | 092 62 | 72 ao | 075, Carbon Tetrachloride 2 | on 300 | 072 212 | ‘082|} Toluene ‘32 | 083 Chlorobenzene 32 | 075, 390 | 050 320 | (068]] trichlorcethyiene 40 | 08 Chloroform 100 | 083 a5 | 06s iz | 0s6. 300 | 046 Camene 32 | .075]| Vinyl Acetate 32 | 988 380 | 050] za0 | 065 Cyctohexane 40 | 089] water 32 | 343 oo | 081 oo | 353 20 | 080] 200 | 383 Dichlorodiflucromethane 20 | 068; 300 | 395 so | 083 420 | 376 u4o | ose 20 | 275 hy! Acotate 32 | ‘088 Xylene (Ortho) 32 | 087 200 | o6s| 176 | 088 Ethyl Alcohol =o | no 320 | ose 00 | 080] Xviene (Meta) 32 | 080 Eihyt Benzene 32 | 080 176 | 062 390 | 045! 300 | ove Txtacted from "Physical Propaies of Hydrocarbons” BPR. W. Gallant Copyright 1863, Gal Publihing Co. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 171SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-4.38 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITIES OF GASES AND VAPORS [k = BTU /(hri(sq fi)(deg. F per ft)] TEMPERATURE. Substance 38 | 18 32 122 212 392 S72 782 Acetone o0s7 | .0078 | .o09s Acetylene 0056 | 0108, o140 | 0172 Air 0040 ‘0081 0140 ‘0184 0260 Ammonia 00s?" | 0126 “0192 ‘o3a5 | 0509 Argon :9063__| 0095 0123 ‘171 Benzene 0052 | 0075 | 0103 Butane (n) 0078 0135 Butane (iso) 0080 0138 Carbon dioxide ‘oss | .0084 o1ze | 0177 | 0228 Carbon disulfide ‘0040 Carbon monoxide 0037 oes | 0134 0176 Carbon tetrachloride 9042 | ‘0052 | 0068 Chlorine 0049 Chloroform 0038 | 0047 | .00s8 | 0081 Cyclohexane “0034 Dichlorodifluoromethane| ooae_[~006¢ [0080 [0115 Ethane 0085 | .0108 0175 Ethyl aceiate 0074 | ‘0098 | 0180 Ethyl alcohol 0081 ‘oi24 Ethyl chloride “0058 ‘gos | 914s, Ethyl ether 0077 | .o1or | ‘0131 | 0200 Ethylene gost | ‘101 | ‘oisi_| ‘ove Helium ose [0612 | ose 0988 Hepiane (n-) ‘0103 «| one Hexane (n-) 0072 | 00804 Hexene 0061 0109 Hydrogen ozs3 | 0652 | .0966 ‘240 | .a4ea | 1705 Hydrogen sulfide 0076 Mercury “0187 Methane os | ors | 0176 oss | 0358 | 0480 Methyl acetate ‘0059 | 0068; Methyl alcohol 0083 0128 ‘Methyl chloride ‘o0s3 | 007 | ‘cos¢ | .o140 Methylene chloride 0038 (0080_| ‘0063 ‘0031 0026 goa | 10198 | © oie (0040 ost | 0139 gist | 0220 | 0255 0287 Nitrous oxide 0047 | ‘0088 0138 Oxygen 0038 0091 o1a2 [ones [0188 Pentane (7) 0074 | 00837 Pentane (iso-) ‘0072 0127 Propane ‘0087 0151 Sulfur dioxide 0050 0068 Water vapor. zero pressure __|_.0136__|_.ore2_| 0230 0273 ‘Adaptod from Heat Transmission, by W. H. McAdams. Copyrighted 1954, McGraw-Hill Book Company. Incorporated, 172 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-4.4A ‘4 eanssaid peonpay or 80 90 vo 0 zo nsep poo (visd £71) 91 ‘duos ‘asorsasd poo sisouadusy passep. Aud (6c61) tye 60s “6r “008d "ONE “WAH ‘SONIWOD 9 ANN "HONST F4N4 NOWYiaOD GIZNIVABNIO-NOUDRUOD TNSSHAE ‘S3SYOAUIAUDNGNOD TWHAGHE 173 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL CONDUCTIVITY FACTOR @, & € SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS 174 FIGURE P-4.4B ‘THEWAL CONDUCTIVITY—LiQUIDS PRESSURE CORRECTION™GENERALIZED CORRELATION EF. LENOIR, J. M, PET. REF. 36, 162.164 (1957) Note: To find thermal conductiiy ke smulply known value ky by rato ressure Pond temperatoreT, own thermal conductivity at any pressure Py and temperature T Desied thermal conductviy ot Pr and T ivy factor ot () ond Te ical temperotare, UT dimensionless REDUCED PRESSURE, P, [is DERE SA Bic 6 SPs BRO. SAO dd ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 32PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 TABLE P-5.1 VISCOSITY CONVERSION FACTORS fee ee ee rs is = 1 a1 conse | eon aaa cooica S| 1 oor ons 2 ove ae va age on oom 1317 tes «7900 ‘ maa 1 ead 408 a aa ous come | onomec : coon wee aaa 1 oo aoe arco 1 To convert the numerical value of ¢ property ex numerical value expressed in one 4! the unite ia the Block common to Both units vis sed in one of the unite in the Jelt-hand column of the table to the {op row of the ‘able, multiply the former value by the fcetor in the FIGURE P-5.1 COSITY CONVERSION PLOT ENGLER DEGREES TY (CENTPO'SES, ‘SPECFIC GRAVITY ute A i ” SAYBLE UNIVERSAL Rixxe “esgere' (o enogen oanees KINEMATIC VISCOSITY.CENTISTOKES = soins ee THESE CURVES ARE ORAWN TO FIT THE FOLLOWING USED FOR EXTRAPOLATION OM EXPERIMENTAL OATA |e savaour uno. "FROM EXPERIMENTAL DATA WHEN =40 TO 45 $60, (9 REDNCOD no,» Keaam-$? WHEN (et TO m0 eee (6 REOWOOD Wo. ? i/onREDWOOD NO TIME 2 on tent eas ENTIsTOnES. cae TIME IN SECONDS.SAYBOLT i Standards Of The Tubular Excl (UNIVERSAL & FUROL), REDWOOD N. hanger Manufacturers Association 182, ENGLER TIME 175SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.2A VISCOSITY — TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP FOR PETROLEUM O LUNES OF CONSTANT DEGREES AP. ‘CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR, Ret: Watzon, Wien & Murphy, Indutial & Engineering Chemistry 28405: (1898) TEMPERATURE °F bbe UR ce eo ee 1, CENTISTOKES SSybOuT FORE SECS FIGURE P-5.28 VISCOSITY — TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP FOR PETROLEUM OILS LINES OF CONSTANT DEGREES AP ‘CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR, K= 1.0 ‘Murphy, Industral 6 Engineering Chemistry 28.6089 (1808), B eb BRERE TEMPERATURE °F eb eeeeas be ew CENTISTOKES sarbout UvegsL, oS iy ee ee as oe SBYBOUT FURL SNS 176 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-5.2C VISCOSITY — TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP FOR PETROLEUM OILS HEAP sy Walton, Wien & Murphy, Indus & Enginesng Chemistry 2860591806 TEMPERATURE °F | CENTISTOKES sbeo me fe me FIGURE P-5.2D VISCOSITY — TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP FOR PETROLEUM OILS LNCS OF CONSTANT DEGREES CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR, K= 125, Rel: Wation, Wien & Murphy, Industil 6 Engineering Chemistry 28.605 (186) °F ‘TEMPERATURE Pea CENTISTOKES SSYBCUT TORE SOS oo, ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 177PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-5.3A ‘gst, (HOA, sey fuduion punneoN, aa “usa srt Aq ,wwoquosoHPhyt 80 Yoog iL, oN “LN “UepANT "oD Exuooibug puD yosoeey ink Tauho nibuitdos aah eopetied Ka pared y a 8 2 oz I 2 ewntawa ‘als we se : OFT ec-nco siya aunuasanal-susoosn cvvownis is “SEND or| i os cs 09] 09 o8| ioe oy Eo. 3 Es: oz Boz a ios #4001 01 8 002| Booz cos| 008 00011 Foot 0002! joo 5000 LIVES E 2008 000 i = Hoooot coved wonaisay ld 202 jooooe poi WO and tev oll i foods Seas (A001 OL 3VS) IO 38M lV COE Sogo) Gna lav cor loooooz 3ONVY HOH ALISODSIA SILWWANDL 1000008, SNOILDVad WNSTOUL3E GNY SNOBIYIONGAH jooo000! J1UVHD JYNLvaadWAl — ALISODSIA 08 L G08 Gos Osh OO ® ie joodod'ot ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 178SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS. FIGURE P-5.3B ovo} oso} oxo} 80} oso) oot ost! roduco pubnson, UDA, a omanye sr Aq ,'suoarasorpy uo 909% Iba, io ae woot A pov ozo Han (egencoa'ea wav “13 OM IMGUNN ONY NIK "KOSI ayen ioy9 wow 8018 woe ION 6e-iyt sium aunuva3endi -ALISO26A OMROWS LEY loco lovo oso lovo oxo. los Jos 001 BIVMISIG IV OE i Bana IdV OF *E i # i ANSSOWIN IdV OY et H BNMIOSV9 Id of SHEMET 3ONVY MOT ALISOISIA SILWWANDY oe SNOULDVas WNFOLId GNY SNORIVIOUGAH i AYVHD JYNLVYadW3L — ALISODSIA ‘O07 ° “O0S > oz ont 179 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-5.40, VISCOSITIES OF LIQUIDS AT 1 ATM. out “kuodarog yoo tt MOIOSH “P38 P=INELAeS or os 03 % ‘podiyuay sos “keodmog 4008 ITH MDIDEM “O56 PEERS (COMANVHE SUZINIONE TOURED #04 uojnute A Basaaeeessasaeseeessessesees Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 180SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.48 VISCOSITIES OF GASES AND VAPORS AT 1 ATM. “uopyoe 14 Aq 'NOISSINEN YUL LVGH Hon WOWONTEINS A 5000 9000 1000 8000 4000 100 200 200 #00 00 “nt “kuoa09 # x as wuae os +20 0% 01 ‘say -kundeg 400g MIEE-MOADH “st PAINE “ausg WT AR “HOORINYE SUEENIONE THOONGHD wou WymEHeS 181 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.5 HIGH PRESSURE GAS VISCOSITY 10 peers _—_ ~ Te a oa 02 03 04 08 os 1 2 3.4) 86) 8 10 REDUCED PRESSURE — P, - Reprinted by permision trom Chemical Engineering Progress Symposium Sores, S1, No, 16, 1985, N.L, Carr, 1D. Pare, and R.E, Peck ‘TABLE P-6.1 CRITICAL PROPERTY DATA Aoouc Acid 1g 40 [atenane 1092 om Aestone a8 GM | Rep Riconat ez | oar Acetone a 0 | niece 62 ‘ae Aetna 1 Bt | Besar Risonot ag | 108s Ay Alesha EA SL Hretogen Za | ss rimonis a 1683 Ryogen cuore | gas’ | set Raine 8 73 |BYsrosentiucnde =| oat | 0 irae a Hs || Hycrogen toate 8 S Betaene i Be iYsrosen settee ‘hos | ae Brometenzene ta &§ | Bbutene ser a 3 Betadione 18 ge | Eebutens #1 a :astone ms 5 BI & Este 8 s ee re 1048 “e oe | is Ibe & # & Sac Alshet ‘ Gis [stipietyiKetone | Ey Gerben ‘Dione 1a | Nese ae (y Sareea bale Ea 103 ie zo | w Esroon Monoxide FA 319 Mirsgen Onde mo | im Seren Teahionde oor Ga | ntlonane vs | age fied Ta iis [adeene Ta | tes erebensene ae 85 Oxygen 2 ae Sterters ‘= |p Pettane mh a Eumene re 7 | Bronot oe 10 Eyelobesane = 33 | Fone fe ‘e Secane ue BL [Propriene @1 Ea Bickcrodituoromethane| te Br [erie cota! 1 oe Ethane 50 the | trop acon! ft ais Eyiene So | Sullene waz |e Ett Alcohol & @ | Satr Dionae att fa Eth Acetate oe 37 | Reltene o 1088 Eth Benson a $35 | Thetleroetnyene a ai Fuori ‘te Be | Vier Restos ‘et a6 Formaldehyde is St | int Chionse es | ute Holm fi 332_| Water Hee [ites 182 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 CONTENTS TABLE TITLE PAGE D-1__ Dimensions of Welded and Seamless Pipe... é ca +184 D2 Dimensions of Welded Fittings... : oe ies D3 Dimensions of ASME Standard Flanges... : . 186.187 DS _Bolting Data - Recommended Minimum... a ABB DSM Metric Boting Data - Recommended Minimum... aie 189 D6 Pressure - Temperature Ratings for Valves, Fittings and Flanges. 190-229, D7 Characteristics of Tubing 230 D-7M Characteristics of Tubing (Metric)... 231 D8 Hardness Conversion Table....n:nnnnmnntninennnnnnnanannnn 232 D9 Internal Working Pressures of Tubes At Various Values of Alowable Stress 233-235 D-10 Modulus of Elasticity. : eerie ee son 286 D-10M Modulus of Elasticity (Metro). a e3i. D-11__ Mean Coefficients of Thermal Expansion... eed D-1M_ Mean Coefficients of Thermal Expansion (Metric) i 239 D12 Thermal Conductivity of Metals.. ee : 240 D-12M Thermal Conductivity of Metals (Metric) eee Oa D-13 Weights of Circular Rings and Discs.. eee snes 242-247 D-14 Chord Lengths and Areas of Circular Segments... ee 248, D5 Conversion Factors. : 249-250 D6 Conversion Table for Wire and Sheet Metal Gages. 251 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 183SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE Dt DIMENSIONS OF WELDED AND SEAMLESS PIPE size | DIAM. |ss* | 10s | 10 20 go | ARDS | 40 oO ‘80 woo | 120 | 140 | 160 STRONG aoe onus [oes cons [ors ous estes | auas [anes cam | aoe eas: [ose aus [exis case fanaa one eat ose Joase fans [ont aes [oases one [owe ars [oss 303 [0-30 ozs [eae cae [0300 ase [o.600 cues fossa] | cao foaso cas [oaaa| Jose oases cise 008] Joaso|ea07 | 026s [0.208 | 000 [ose vaoe | [200 ass[oteo| —_[easo[oase | oars [eos | asst [ose Berd bere bed a1se|osa8] 0390] 0a1a] oars [ears |ease | oar |asw Torso [esse vor | 1250] 120s ‘aes eaten] 0330] eat2| ease] 0375] 0202 | o720 [oon | onm | vase] az: vase | n titas [outa [oase| aazs [aces | ears [esse | waralesen | navv| van (rae | tase | tage b.ars [oaso |/oaso| o.7s [ose | 07s | oan ioe | tae: | tase [ven | zoer | 2ase aav1|ose0] ears rey oan2] ose] eaas | ears [oases All dimensions ere given In Inches: ‘The decimal theknenes ted forthe reese ie Setust* thicknesses may, Se ae ‘much ae “ Romina! thesmess because of mil tolerance, ‘heuer n Bod faee are more readily ovals ntod by permission of T 184 se 2 unger the * Schedules 58 and 108 are avaiable ‘aterale and Sched + Thlenersee shown in Italics are ‘Tos uner the Sesignation Sched SRSGUURGEE A aealganion schedule 83S. sizes igbe also in ‘ae (ube Turns Dwvision of Chemetran Corporation 108 ie also available in carton steel. ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 02 DIMENSIONS OF WELDING FITTINGS {All Dimensions in Inches) ral Long Radius Weld ils ; I To [27% Short Radius Weld Ells | ae a wom | ars T ows! A | D | Pe | owt | A] D | L | mm | ay |e ‘ uw {aw fa | it | ie a ae a |e aes no a | ea ates 6 6 2 | 8 7 HL BRL H : 4% 18 | 13% , 4 | 8% 1 2 13% 4 |B] 1b |B erat ie | 20 20 1s, Se hy) [BR Bole ays +e Yas hecpachacd 8 % | mi 7 | oy a ji | | a 1 | mis x | is | | we] 2 3 hatate Aa TO) Be Bae | Be eee 8 i) LiL fe | eel & See ee la ee Te : apn by pon LM |, LH Le tt | Le Le ‘ Taylor Forge & Pipe Werk ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 185SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION Tame D3 DIMENSIONS OF ASME STANDARD FLANGES Saco {All Dimensions in Inches) jole eo navct t ine Za 3® Ey 7 Ey % % % i Fs iy 4 % M% &% Ke | 2 os % | 2 2s 2 41m 3 a 413 m : KR | a ‘ 0 % | 4 5 a % |e é 2s R16 : | coma 2% [is* | aa | o wo | we | 1% | at | et | 9d | isy | ity | a0 a aon | 2" | 84 | an [a and [end | « wm fa |e la | a a 6 33 | 2% | 8 | ae | a 1% @ a | od | 34 | 5% ie 2 aos | 25 | ody | oe | ot 2 u ge | 28 fee | a [8 a Bee | A | TO Thee, A % | eT he o% 3% a1 a & ve) me oh % y | se oF 4 | om o% 2 | 8% e% 8 by | 08 eh a a" | aM eh % |e en 5 «bho an 10% 1 1 3 12% 12 4 fi 12% 16% 1 ease 20 20% 161% 2 Fy 201% 0% 354 ao. B 28 2a 29% 0% aah @ nu | a a [a | wim ” Reprinted by permission of Taylor Forge & Pipe Works 186 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-3—|Contnued) DIMENSIONS OF ASME STANDARD FLANGES 1800 LB. FLANGES Bott aa did yes [pe M ese! (1) Bore to match schedule of attached pipe. ‘ (2) Includes 1/16" raised face in 150 | & : 7 pound and 300 pound standard. J ty | ae | 34 | aan Does not include raised face in 400, 1% | 8 ay | $M | aa 600, 900, 1500 and 2500 pound 2 | 3% mL oy | at standard. 2y | 10's ag | OM | eile } 24 |194 34 | S16 (3) Inside pipe diameters are also pro: tite UE hate | ong vided by this table. Los [tas 5h | 2M | 8K 6 | 19 6 22% 8 [ay 4 122 io | deh 3 12a Reprinted by permission of Taylor Forge & Pipe Works [50 0 ae WELDING NECK FLANGE BORES' Size |Srameter| “We. | 20" [ah | Wall | "a8 | 60" | Strong schaa.|sene.| sohes. | Sonaa Tha |e" | Pata $ fi sais vo | 8 ie 18.83 [18 ie rites Ba [Ie me Te S00 ear [i a ie 185 [IE 56 Hae isi [18 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 187SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-5 BOLTING DATA - RECOMMENDED MINIMUM. (All Dimensions in Inches Unless Noted) S| vane | aoe ‘ees | ea = % | 098 ™ | ie | 1 ™ | # im | 188 Be % oa | m | 18 mm | ® 0.551 wi | 1798 Be 1 one | 1%] 2m | mm | | | | | ose | 2 | 2m | aml m | om | im | [im uass || ane [am [am | me | mw | oe | om ros | mm | 2 [| me [ 2 | mw | mw | | Tao | ai | ome | | tm i i ee 7 % zat | 2%e| see [4 Oh vm | | Ue 2.652 Mm | 39 ca % [2 aK 2 xe |e | oe [me | tm mm] | 4292 wa | 4275 mM Me [Tm | m me 5,259 Mm | 4888 oH Ba mm | oe | & 6.324 am | 502 oH * [om Li 3 ver |= [se | | x > fm fm 8749 om | 5826 i mo mM 8 | roscoe | om [ son | mm | 8% | tm | % 1565 om | 6758 m % mo 4 Nut dimensions are based on American National Standard B18.2.2 ‘Toraade are National Coarse seree below I inch and eight-pitch thread erie | inch and above 188 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-5M METRIC BOLTING DATA - RECOMMENDED MINIMUM (All Dimensions in Millimeters Unless Noted) Threads (Nut Dimensions: Boitsiee | pach | Root Agee [Across Flats] Across | _ Bolt Radial | Radial | Edge | Bolt Sie 3 rms Corners | spacing | oistance | Ostance | oistance | ag 5 Fie Fe = mia a7s__| vases | 2100 | 2425 | st75 | 2068 15.88 16.88 wie M6. 200 | 12624 [27.00 site| 4445 | 2056 | 2064 | 2068 Mis: 20) 250__| 217051 | 9600 | 026 | saso | st75_ | 23et 2381 MeO. a2. 250 | 272419 | 9600 | ats7 | sssa_ | sase | 2540 25.40 Maz, Ma 300] sia7aa | 4100 | a7ss_| sara | _s651 2858 2058 Mae Mar 300 | 413862 | 4600 | 3.12 | e250 | 9810 | 2900 2300 Nar M30 350 | s0zees | 5000 s774_| 7303 | 4608 | s3sa | aa.se 30 M36 400 | 736015 [6000 ozs | esis | sae7_| sco | s060 a6, aa. 450 | 1018216 | 7000 | 6083 | 10000 | 6191 4921 Maa, Mas. 300 | 192950 | 6000 | 9238 | tart | 6826 3556 Mas, MB6. 550 | 1e62725 | 9000 | 10892 | 27.00 | 7620 6350 eB MBs eco | 2467.50 | 10000 | 11547 | 19070 | 6a.14 e568) Mee Mr eco | azzi77s | 11000 | 2702 | 15556 | 68.90 e085, Mr a0 600 | aoveasi | 12000 | 19856 | 16569 | 9368 7461 Me0 Meo 600 | szeross | 13500 | 15588 | e891 | 107.95 B48 G0 M00 600 | 6651526 | 15000 | 17321 | 20796 | 11908 385 M00 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 189SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION D6 TABLES FOR PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATINGS: FOR VALVES, FITTINGS, AND FLANGES: INTRODUCTORY NOTES. 1. Products used within the jurisdiction of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the ASME Standard for pressure piping are subject to the ‘maximum temperature and stress imtations upon the materia and piping stated therein 2. The ratings at -20° F to 100 °F, given for the materials covered on pages 194 to 229 inclusive, shall also apply at lower temperatures. The ratings for low temperature service of the cast and forged materials listed in ASTM A852 and ‘A350 shall be taken the same as the -20 °F to 100 °F ratings for carbon steel! on pages 194 to 229 inclusive. ‘Some of the materials listed in the rating tables undergo a decrease in impact resistance at temperatures lower than -20 ° F to such an extent as to be unable to safely resist shock loadings, sudden changes of stress or high stress concentrations. Therefore, products that are to operate at temperatures below -20°°F shall conform to the rules of the applicable Codes under which they are to be used. 8. The pressure-temperatute ratings in the tables apply to all products, covered by this ASME Standard. Valves conforming to the requirements of this ASME Standard must, in other respects, merit these ratings. All ratings are the maximum allowable nonshock pressures (psig) at the tabulated temperature (degrees F) and may be interpoated between the temperatures shown. The primary service pressure ratings (150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 2500) are those at the head of the tables and shown in bold face type in the body of the tables. ‘Temperatures (degrees F) shown inthe tables, used in determining these rating tables, were temperatures on the inside of the pressure retaining structure, ‘The use of these ratings require gaskets conforming to the requirements of Paragraph 5.4 of ASME B16.5-(1996). The user is responsible for selecting gaskets of dimensions and materials to withstand the required bolt loading without injurious crushing, and suitable for the service conditions in all other respects. Reference: American Society of Mechanical Engineers Standard Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged {1996 and 1998) reprinted with te permission of The American United Engineering Center, 348 & 47th Steet, New York, NY 10017. Al rights reserved. 190 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 1A _LIST OF MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Pressure= ‘Applicable ASTM Specifications? Material Nominal Temperature Group Designation Rating Table Forgings Castings Plat 1 csi 24a A105 ‘A216 Gr. WB A518 Gr. 70 Mn-Si ‘A350 Gr. LF2 A516 Gr. 70 A897 Ct C-Mn-Si-V ‘A 350 Gr. LFB Cl. 12 CMn-Si 242 A216 Gr. WCC A382 Gr. LCC coMn-si-V A350 Gr. LFB Cl 24Ni A382 Gr. LZ A203 Gr. B SN A350 Gr. LFS A382 Gr. LCS ‘A203 GE 13 csi 243 A352 Gr. LCB A515 Gr. 65 CoMn-Si A516 Gr. 65 2u4Ni A203 Gr. A 34Ni ‘A203 Gr. D 14 csi 24 A518 Gr. 60 C-Mn-Si 4.350 Gr. LFI Cl. A516 Gr. 60 18 cM 218 | Ate2GrFt ‘A217 Gr. WOT A204 Gr. A A382 Gr LCt ‘A204 Gr. B Ww c-¥iMo 247 ‘A204 Gr. C YeCr—14Mo A 182 Gr.F2 NinCr-YMo A217 Gr. Wes SaNi-%4Cr=-1Mo ‘A217 Gr. WCS 1 1Cr-%Mo 219 | Ave2Gr Fiz cr-%Mo A217 Gr. wos, 1Y46r-%4Mo-Si A182.Gr.F11C1.2 A387 Gr. 11.0.2 110 | 2%Cr-1Mo. 2410 | A 18266. A217 Gr. WCS A387 Gr. 22 C2 13 5cr-1Mo zits | a 182Gr. A182 Gr A217 Gr. C5 114__| 9cr-1Mto 2ata | Are2Gr. Fo A217 Gr. C12 115 | 9cr-1Mo-v 2415 | A 182Gr. £91 A217 Gr. C128, A387 Gr. 91.CL.2 24 18Cr-8Ni 224 A102Gr.F204 | A351 Gr. CFS A240 Gr. 304 ‘A162Gr F20aH | A351 Gr. CFB ‘A240 Gr. 30H 22 222 1A 182 Gr. F316 cram — | A200Gr. 316 A182 Gr. F316H_ cram — | A240 Gr. 3164 38Cr-19Ni-3Mo ‘A240 Gr. 317 18C1-10Ni-3Mo A351 Gr. CGEM 23 18Cr-8Ni 223 A182 Gr. F204L ‘A240 Gr. 3041, 16Cr—12Ni-2Mo A182 Gr. F316. ‘A240 Gr. 316 24 18Cr-10Ni-Ti 1A 182 Gr. F321 ‘A240 Gr. 321 A182 Gr. F321H, ‘A240 Gr. 321H, Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Allrights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 191SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 1A _LIST OF MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D) Pressure ‘Applicable ASTM Specifications” Material Nominal ‘Temperatur Group Rating Table Forgings. Castings Plates 25 18Cr-10Ni-Cb 225 182Gr.F947 | A351 Gr. CFBC ‘A240 Gr. 347 ‘A 182 Gr. F347H ‘A240 Gr. 347H 182 Gr Fae ‘A240 Gr. 348. A182 Gr. F34@H ‘A240 Gr. 348H 26 28Cr-12Ni 226 ‘A 981 Gr. CHB 4.381 Gr. CH20 A 240 Gr. 3098, A240 Gr. 30H 27 28Cr-20Ni 227 A 182Gr.F310 | A351 Gr. CK20 ‘A240 Gr. 3108 ‘A240 Gr. 310H 28 20Cr-18Ni-6Mo 228 | A182Gr. Fas ‘A351 Gr. CKAMCUN | A 240 Gr. S31254 22Cr-SNi-3Mo-N ‘8-182 Gr. F51 A240 Gr. $31803 ‘A 182 Gr. F53 ‘A240 Gr. $32750 A381 Gr. CEBMN ‘8.381 Gr. CD4MCu A381 Gr. coaMWCuN 25Cr~7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W A182 Gr, F55 A240 Gr. $32760 34 35Ni-38Fe-20Cr-Cb 231 462 Gr. NOBO20 8 463 Gr. NO8020 32 99.0Ni 232 B 160 Gr. No2200 8 162 Gr. NO2200 33 99.0Ni-Low C 233 8 160 Gr. No2201 8 162 Gr. Noz201 34 67Ni-30Cu 234 8 564 Gr. Nos4o0 8 127 Gr. Nosao0 67Ni~30Gu-S B 164 Gr. NOsaos 35 T2Ni~18Cr-8Fe 235 8 564 Gr. NOSE00 B 168 Gr. NOS6O0 36 S3Ni~42Fe-21Cr 236 | 8 566 Gr. NoBa00 8 409 Gr. NOBBOO a7 6ENI-28Mo-2Fe 237 8 995 Gr. N10665 8333 Gr. N10665 38 sani 238 B 564 Gr. N10276 8575 Gr. N10276 eon 8 564 Gr. Nos625 B 443 Gr. NOBE25 ei B 335 Gr. N10001 8 333 Gr. N10001 70Ni 8 573 Gr. N10003 B 434 Gr. N10003 enn 8 574 Gr. Nosass B 675 Gr. NOSA55 42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3Cu 8 864 Gr. NOBB25 8 424 Gr. NOBB25 39 ATNi-22Cr-9Mo-18Fe 239 8 572 Gr. Noso02 8 435 Gr. NO6OO2 3.10 _| 26Ni~a6Fe-21cr-sMo 23.10 _ | 8 672Gr. NoB700 8 599 Gr. NO8700 341 ‘44Fe-25Ni-21Cr-Mo 23.11 | 8 649 Gr. Nog904 8 625 Gr. Nos908 3.12 | 26Ni-43Fe-22Cr-5Mo 23.12 — | B 621 Gr. NoB320 8 620 Gr. NoB320 7Ni~22Cr-20Fe-7Mo B 581 Gr. Nosees 8 582 Gr. NO59@5 (Table 1A continues on next page; Notes follow at end of Table) Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al ights reserved 192 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 1A _LIST OF MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D) Pressure. ‘Applicable ASTM Specifications? Material Nominal Temperature Group Designation Rating Table Forgings Castings Plates 3.3 | 49Ni-25Cr-18Fe-6Mo 23.13 | 8 581 Gr. Nos975 18 582 Gr. NOSB75 Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Low Cu 8 564 Gr. NOB031 8 625 Gr. NoBO31 314_| 47Ni-22Cr-19Fe-6Mo zara | 8 581 Gr. Nos007 8 $82 Gr. NO5007 315 _| saNi-aare-21cr 23.15 | 8 564.Gr. NosB10 8 409 Gr. Nosst0 3.16 | asNi-19Cr-1%Si 2316 | 8511 Gr. Nos330 5 536 Gr. No330 317__| 2eni-zoscr-s.scu-25Mo | 23.17 ‘A361 Gr. CNIM GENERAL NOTES: {a) For temperature limitations, see Notes in Table 2. {(b) Plate materials are listed only for use as blind flanges (see para. 6.1). Additional plate msterials listed in ASME B16.34 may also be used with corresponding 816.34 Standard Class ratings. (6) Material Groups not listed in Table 1A are intended for use in valves. See ASME B16.34, NOTE: (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Il materials, which also m fications, may also be used. tthe requirements ofthe listed ASTM spe eprint rom ASME B16.-1086 and 1998, by piston of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights reserved free Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 193SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLES 2 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR GROUPS 1.1 THROUGH 3.17 MATERIALS. TABLE 2-1.1_RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.1 MATERIALS: Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates c-si A108 (1) A216Gr.weB (1) | A816 Gr. 70) CoMn-si A350 Gr. LF2 (1) A516 Gr. 70 (1)12) A837 C.1(3) coMn-si-v_| A350 Gr. LFS CL.1 (4) NOTES: (1) Upon prolonged exposure tote converted to graphite. Permissi (2) Not to be used over 850°F. (3) Not to be used over 700°F. () Not to be used over 500°F. atures above 800°F, the carbide phase of steel may be but not recommended for prolonged use above 800°F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 285 740 990 1480 2220 3708 6170 260 615 ‘900 1380 2028 3375 5625 230 655 875 1315 i870 3280 5470 200 635 845 1270 1300 3170 5280 170 600 800 1200 1795 2995 4990 600 140 550 730 1098 1640 2735 4550 650 125 535 ns 1075 1610 2685 4475 700 110 535 710 1065 1600 2585 ‘aaao 750 95 505 670 1010 as10 2520 4200 800 80 410 550 825 1298 2060 3430 880 65 270 355 535 805 1340 2230 900 50 170 230 345 515 860 1430 950 35 105 140 205 310 515 360 1000 20 50 70 105 155 260 430 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1995 and 1968, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved 194 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-1.2 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.2 MATERIALS Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates C-Mn-Si A216 Gr. WCC (1) ‘A352 Gr. LCC (2) c-Mn-Si-v | A350 Gr. LF6 Cl.2 (3) DYN A352 Gr. LC2 4.203 Gr. (1) 34Ni A350 Gr. LFS A.352.Gr.LC3 A203 Gr. E (1) NOTES: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800°F, the carbide phase of steel may be converted to graphite. Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged use above 800°F. (2) Not to be used over 650°F. (3) Not to be used over 500°F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Clase Temp. °F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 -20 to 100 290 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 200 260 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 300 230 730 970 1485 2185 3640 6070 +400 200 705 940 1410 ams 3530 5880 500 70 65 885 1330 1995, 3325 ‘5540 600 140 605 805, 1210 1815, 3025 5040 650 125 590 785 1175 1765, 2940 4905 700 10 570 755 1135, 1705 2840 4730 750 95 505 670 1010 1510 2520 4200 800 80 410 550 825 1235, 2060 3430 850 65 270 355 535 805 1340 2230 900 50 70 230 365 515 860 1430 950 35 105 10 205 310 515 860 1000 20 50 70 408 155 260 430 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Alrights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 195SECTIONS TABLE 2-1.3 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.3 MATERIALS GENERAL INFORMATION ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates c-si A362Gr.L0B (3) | A St5 Gr. 65 (1) c-Mn-Si ‘A516 Gr. 65 (112), 24Ni ‘A208 Gr. A (1) YN A208 Gr. D (1) Notes: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800°F, the carbide phase of steel may be Converted to graphite. Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged use above 800°F. (2) Not to be used over 850°F, (3) Not 10 be used over 650°. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig lass Temp. F 150 300 400 600 00 | _1500 2500 20 10 100 265 695 925 1390 2085 3470 5785 200 250 655 875 1315 1970 3280 5470 300 230 640 850 1215 re15 3190 5315 ‘400 200 620 825 1208, 1850 3085 5145 500 170 585 75 1165, 1745, 210 4860 600 140 535 70 1085, 1600 2685 4040 650 125 525 695 1085, 1870 2615 4355 700 110 520 690 1035, 1555 | 2500 4320 750 95 475 630 985 1420 | 2365, 3945 800 80 380 520 780 1175 1955 3260 850 85 270 355 535 805 1340 2230 900 50 170 230 345 515 360 1430 950 35 105 140 205 310 515 860 1000 20 50 7 105 155 260 430 196 Beprinted ram ASME B16.5-1096 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Alvights Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTIONS TABLE 2-1.4 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.4 MATERIALS Nominal Onigeation Forgings caxinge Petes c-Si | A515 Gr. 60 (1) cxtnsi__ | AssoGr tr, c410 A510 600 (1 notes (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 60°F, the carbide phase of steel may be converted to raph Pras, bat not recommended for prolonged use above SOO (2) Not to be used over 850°F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, pla os T Tope wo_| 00 | ao | oo oo | 1500 | 2500 waywio | ase | co | oa | we | too | ome | sues 209 zs | seo || ttas, | tees | ao | aoe 300 zo | so | 7 | tos | to | me | sen ‘00 zo | su | fos | toe | tes | aoe | aoe fe im | fo | oes sos | wes | temo | ata «00 wo | ass | oto os | sm | ams | ans 0 i | so | 60 ws | ts | zs | ato 700 wo | | 800 ws | ts | ae | Sra 0 | aes |B ws | tos | ato | seas oo | fm | ae mo | tm | tes | Soe eso es | zo | oss sas wos | 1a | ze 200 so | tm | as as Bs sco | tase 28 = | om | ie Fd mo a8 300 1209, 2 so 0 ies 188 20 = Reotinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1968, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 197SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-1.5 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.5 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates c-Y4Mo ArwezcrFri) | A217 Gr wera) | A20aGr Ac A352 Gr. LC1 (3), A204 Gr. B (1) NoTES: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875°F, the carbide phase of carbon-molyb- donum steel may be converted to graphite. Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged se above 875°F. (2) Use normalized and tempered material only. (8) Not to be used over 650°F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig ‘Class Temp. °F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 -20 t0 100 265 695 925 1390 2085 3470 5785 200 260 680 ‘905 1360 2035 3395 5660 300 230 655 870 1305 1955 3260 5435 4400 200 640 855 1280 1920 3200 5330 500 70 20 830 1285, 1865 3105 5180 600 140 605 805 1210 1815, 3025 040 650 125 590 785 a5 1765 2940 4905 700 10 570 755 1135, 1705 2840 4730 750 95, 530 no 1065. 1595 2660 4430 200 80 510 675 1018 1525 2540 4230 850 6 495 650 975 1460 2835 4060 ‘900 50 450 600 900 1350 2285 3745 950 35 280 375 560 845 1405 2345 3000 20 165 20 330 495 825 1370 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechenical Engineers. Allrights reserved 198 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-1.7 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.7 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates c-%Mo ‘A208 Gr. C(1) ‘yer-%Mo A182 Gr. F2 (3) Ni-%4Cr-%Mo A217 Gr, We4 (213) 3ANi-%ACr~1Mo A217 Gr. WES (2), NoTES: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875°F, the carbide phase of carbon-molyb- si|8i]|2]B8 2) 8B | Bl) i CO patie t-te eee eae ee Bol OR | i] B B) a | 8 | # | # |) # 1 ou 27 n 2 § g 3 i # | B | | & Bee Bag ge Bis) aR | Bol oe) a g wile | wl 2B ae gfe eR |e |G SoBe Ae oR |e we | w | ap | 2 2 |e |e | =e |e | ow ® | # |B | g SR Be a oat B |e |B | | B)# )# | Bi) # | ® w | ag | g ake Sem ae lego t te 2 || é feb h sy el Boe B | | 3 Beda] Hels a 33 & 3 8 B Be B |i | 8 Bal$s| Bete 2] HO | | BY) & H » | @ | ae |g |e | ay 3 i s #1 | iz 5 ee | 2 g geile | ¢ | is | i | #8) eg 8 | q i | ER |e i 4 | ass 2 2 | os Zz u a H i g | eo) @ 5 520 aw Sd aw ~o | & ie | 3 | 4 eB | a | NOTE: rine 128 to 48 with Stondord Ball. Sena SL 42 601 wath Hultoren ll. Brgell 27 to 62 with Carbide Ball. Hefcrencer ASTI ElG0%, SM alotle Handooek Vat" 1, 6H Eaton 232 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE DS INTERNAL WORKING PRESSURES (PSI) OF TUBES AT VARIOUS VALUES OF ALLOWABLE STRESS Tube | Tube Code Allowable Stes (PSD. OD. | Gage = tnches | BWG [2000 | 4000 | 6000 | 9.000 | 10,000 | 12000 | 14,000 | 6,000 | 18.000 | 20,000 v4 az | 269 | 550 | 000 | 107 | 1s40 | te | 1988 | 2158 | 248 | 2008 2 | 25 | 1 | or | 1222 | 1528 | 1933 | 2ta9 | 24ea | 2750 | s058 26 | are | 757 | 1195 | 1614 | 1093 | 2271 | 2650 | 3029 | ato7 | 3708 23 | asa | 909 | 1904 | 1730 | a17a | 2608 | 203 | 9478 | 9019 | aa47 zz | 42 | a4 | t47e | to0a | 2480 | 2052 | saga | 096 | 4¢oe | 4900 at emo | 140 | 171 | 2281 | zase | s4z2 | 3002 | asea | 5193 | 5704 20 | ea | 12st | teot | 2522 | atss | s7es | aaa | sods | 5675 | 6208 18 | 776 | 1552 | 2329 | stos | seat | assa | sae | e210 | 6907 | 7769 18 | 20 | e590 | 2709 | aio | aeia | s57e | e508 | 7438 | ess | 9297 38 2s | 24s | aoe | 708 | oa | tom | sa77 | 72a | 1069 | 2216 | 2462 ze | si7 | 635 | 952 | tao | 1588 | 1005 | 2023 | 2541 | 2058 | a176 at sss | 732 | tooo | 145 | test | 2198 | 2564 | 2900 | 207 | 2669 20 | 403 | 05 | 1210 | tes | 2017 | 2420 | 2a | 207 | 9631 | 4004 19 | 492 | 004 | 1478 | 1968 | 2460 | 2052 | sate | 3036 | 4420 | 4920 se | ses | 167 | 1751 | 2204 | 2019 | 3502 | 4085 | 4650 | 5253 | 5836 17 | 78 | 1412 | atte | 2524 | 3590 | 4206 | 4942 | seas | 6354 | 7060 16 | aoe | 1609 | asia | sate | 02a | seo | sae | 6499 | 7244 | e049 1s | 07 | tate | 2722 | 3620 | asa5 | sted | east | 7258 | tes | 9079 14 | 1075 | atst | 3227 | 4303 | 5370 | e454 | 7530 | e606 | 9682 | 10758 12 ze | 2s | asa | 70s | a8 | 172 | t4o7 | s681 | 176 | 210 | 2005 20 | 26 | 503 | a8 | 1106 | tes | 1779 | 2076 | 2972 | 2669 | 2066 19 | 360 | 720 | 1080 | t440 | 1001 | ater | 2521 | 2aar | sos | 2602 se | 425 | 50 | 1276 | s701 | ates | asse | 2077 | s4c2 | 3020 | 4259 17 | sit | toz2 | 1834 | 2045 | 2557 | 068 | 2680 | 4001 | 4602 | site 16 | sao | 1160 | 1741 | 2az1 | 2001 | sesz | 4oee | 4642 | 5229 | 5009 1s | eo | 1301 | 1952 | 203 | a2s4 | 005 | 4556 | szo7 | sess | 6500 4 7es | 1531 | 2297 | 3062 | 828 | 4504 | soso | 6125 | cas | 7656 13 | 06 | 17e2 | 2608 | 35a | 41 | 5377 | 6273 | 7169 | 008 | e962 12 | 1058 | 212 | ates | zoe | sot | 6937 | 7993 | e449 | 50s | 10562 58 20 | 236 | 460 | 703 | oa8 | 172 | t4o7 | 1641 | 176 | 2110 | 2305 19 | 254 | ses | 52 | 1136 | 1420 | 1704 | 1988 | 2272 | ass | 2840 1a | a3¢ | 669 | 1003 | 1398 | 1672 | 2007 | 2342 | 2676 | ao11 | 945 17 | 40 | aor | 1202 | 60s | 2004 | 240s | 2806 | 9207 | 9608 | 4009 16 | 453 | 907 | 1961 | ters | 2288 | a7ee | 3176 | 3620 | oss | 4597 15 | sor | 101s | 122 | 2030 | 2507 | 305 | 3553 | 4060 | 456s | so75 4 sos | 113s | 1763 | 2377 | 2071 | 566 | ateo | 4754 | soso | sods 13 | ez | 1984 | 2076 | 2763 | s4s0 | atss | ass | 5597 | e209 | eoar 12 | ato | tear | 24a | sede | oss | ace | 674 | e485 | 7206 | e107 " vo7 | 1814 | 2722 | 3520 | 4505 | suse | ogs1 | 7258 | 166 | 9079 to | 1038 | 2070 | 310s | 4140 | 517s | e210 | 72 | e281 | sae | 10351 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 233SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE D42{Cortinued) INTERNAL WORKING PRESSURES (PS!) OF TUBES AT VARIOUS VALUES OF ALLOWABLE STRESS Tae | ike Code lowe Suess SI) inches | BNE [72000 | 4000 [| 000 | 0000 | 10000 | 12000 | 14c00 | 16c00 | 10000 | e000 sa | 2 | 1s | ser | sor | 77s | oso | ates | tas7 | ssi | tza5 | 1000 we | 275 | ssi | ser | ioe | sar | ese | 1930 | 220s | ams | aver 1 | x | 659 | 900 | ase | 64 | t07@ | 2000 | asor | 267 | csr we | azz | me | avr | eo | 962 | zza4 | asor | zara | case | o7ze ws | 45 | ost | tzar | 669 | 20m | 2405 | aon | aor | oma | ate0 1 | aes | or | 1455 | soa | 2420 | aera | sooo | 605 | 4970 | dese sa | seo | naz | too | 2255 | ete | ane | aoa | 4510 | som | sas7 v2 | 57 | sats | 1973 | 261 | 2260 | sos | aoe | ase | soz | 570 a1 | 7x | er | zor | 2505 | 9560 | 44a | s1e7 | soz | oc0s | 7300 so | @3 | 1667 | asot | sans | are | sono | sea | csr | 7504 | oxs0 9 | sar | ters | ast | sro | 4505 | sea | osst | rse | oxss | g270 8 | tor | 2105 | 3203 | eer | sao | enor | 7475 | osc | oot | 10570 me | 2» | 5 | so | 45 | cor | ox | oor | assy | tae | ser | ese re | ze | aco | 7a | ox | a7 | aor | tea | tere | 2110 | ons w | 27 | ss | eo | imo | i990 | te | 1959 | 2290 | asio | 2700 ws | as | oat | 947 | i263 | asm | ess | cars | zser | 2esa | oto ss | sz | 706 | 1057 | ion | aver | ars | case | zoe | air | aes we | ato | sat | tear | tee | 2ose | ates | zara | aze4 | 2608 | aio ws | as | ost | 1425 | 002 | zor | 053 | sxco | soos | 4200 | 4755 v2 | 55 | 1106 | 1060 | zar3 | are | saxo | sare | ater | 4900 | 5504 it | ete | i252 | teas | ance | 2000 | cer | 4219 | 4oeo | sous | stot to | es | is96 | 2004 | arse | 2400 | aieo | aos | 5504 | 202 | 0060 9 | 72 | i568 | 2x47 | stzo | oie | aooe | sar | caso | rouz | Tore @ | abe | 1776 | ase | sso | aus | saea | core | 7100 | 7004 | eoce 1 zo | 1a | za | ase | 576 | 720 | 60 | 1008 | i152 | 1296 | 1440 we | 2 | aor | oi | ets | tow | vzzs | s4o7 | tear | 1905 | 20an 7 | ms | 496 | zo | ov | tate | aso | 1703 | tse | 2199 | ance ts | 27 | saa | eee | soo | to | seas | vero | zios | 2ase | are 15 | 25 | eu | s16 | 122 | 1520 | 000 | 2120 | 24a | 2750 | 2056 | a8 | mit | toes | sae | ame | atsa | 2400 | 2044 | 3200 | 2556 wa | at | ox | tz | 1548 | 2055 | aue7 | 2070 | axa | amor | aii2 2 | a7 | 955 | v4 | soi | aoe | 2565 ] asa | ec1 | aco | 4776 si | sao | tosr | tse2 | arza | aos | aves | arte | azz | a7re | soe to | 00 | 1200 | 1001 | aot | aoor | sece ] «202 | 4802 | 5409 | 6008 9 | er | 1303 | aoe | 2505 | 2057 | 4029 | aro | sav | cows | ors 8 | 70 | 1520 | 2261 | aoa | abo: | sez | sace | oe | cass | 7000 234 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-${Cominuod) INTERNAL WORKING PRESSURES (PSI) OF TUBES AT VARIOUS VALUES OF ALLOWABLE STRESS: Tue | Tide ‘Code Allowable Suess PSD OD. Gage tnckes | BWG | 2000 | 4000 | 6000 | 8000 | 10,000 | 12.000 | 14,000 | 16,000 | 18,000 | 20,000 148 zo | im | 220 | 3469 | asa | 572 | esr | oor | sie | oar | t145, we | te | s23 | 405 | 647 | ooo | on | 1193 | 1205 | 1456 | 1610 te | ai7 | 434 | 651 | 6s | toes | 1302 | te | 1795 | 1953 | e170 ws | 21 | 4a | 724 | 968 | 1207 | 1449 | 1090 | 1932 | 2173 | 245 14 | 20 | ser | oat | 1122 | 1402 | 1683 | 1963 | 224 | 2se4 | 2005 1a | a3 | 6a7 | om | 1204 | tee | 1042 | 2065 | 2589 | 201 | 9206 ve | ae | 749 | 11s | 1499 | 1974 | cog | 2604 | 2000 | sara | aro "1 ais | 31 | 1247 | 1603 | 2070 | 2ac5 | 2011 | sar | gms | 4159 so | 40 | 908 | 407 | 1976 | 2x45 | zeta | 9293 | 752 | acer | 4600 9 | sza | 104 | 1560 | 2002 | 26s | size | see2 | 4195 | 4708 | 5201 8 |. sao | 10 | 1771 | 2361 | 2051 | as42 | aise | 4722 | 5313 | 5008 7 | @50 | 1901 | 1052 | 2603 | 254 | 00s | 4556 | 5207 509 112 4 | 21 | 46a | cos | 926 | 1157 | 1900 | 1621 | 1052 | 2004 | 2015 re | m0 | 617 | 925 | 1234 | 1543 | test | 2160 | 2468 | a777 | 3008 " sat | 683 | 1025 | 1967 | 1709 | 2051 | 2393 | 272s | a076 | sate to | 204 | 70 | 1154 | 1520 | 1024 | 2909 | 2603 | so7e | 2463 | aes 9 | 428 | ass | 125 | 1713 | 2142 | 2570 | 2900 | 427 | e558 | 4286 e | 492 | 064 | 1447 | 1920 | 242 | 2004 | 9377 | 9050 | as42 | 004 2 wu | aw | a | sts | eae | ase | tos0 | szor | 1973 | 1845 | aziz 2 | 27 | 455 | cas | o1r | 1199 | 1967 | 1505 | 1823 | 2081 | 2279 "1 252 | sor | 756 | 100@ | 1260 | 1512 | 1764 | 2018 | 2268 | ase to | 23 | ss | of | 1192 | 145 | 1609 | 1902 | 2085 | 2548 | 2891 9 | a4 | 629 | 043 | 1258 | 1573 | 1987 | 2002 | 2517 | zest | 14s 2 | asa | os | tos | sats | tes | aio | 2473 | 2526 | 3179 | 9509 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 235SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-10 MODULUS OF ELASTICITY Ta Pix 10 © MATERIAL 70 | 100 | 200 | 300 | 400 | 500 | 600 | 700 | 800] 900 | 1000] 1100] 1200 © STL, C-WO, WN=MO 792 | 29.0 | 285 | 280 | 274 | 27.0 | 264 | 25.3) 259] 222| 20.1 | 178 | 153 ‘AUSTENTIC STN STL 203 | 28.1 | 276 | 27.0 | 265 | 258 | 253 | 248| 24.1 | 23.5| 228 | 22.1 | 21.2 LOW CHROMES THRU 2% 29.7 | 295 | 29.0 | 285 | 279 | 27.5 | 269 | 26.3] 255 | 248 | 259 | 230 | 21.8 2-1/4 CR-1 MO & 3 CR-1 MO | 30.6 | 304 | 298 | 29.4 | 28.8 | 283 | 27.7 | 27.1| 26.3) 25.6 | 24.6 | 23.7 | 225 INT CR-MO_(5-9% CR) 30.9 | 30.7 | 30.1 } 29.7 | 29.0 | 286 | 28.0 | 27.3] 261 | 24.7 22.7 | 20.4 | 182 12, 13, 15 & 17% CR 292 | 290 | 285 | 279 | 27.3| 267 | 26.1| 256 | 247 | 232 | 215 [19.1 [166 Low Ni STEELS THRU 3-1/2x [278 | 27.6 | 27.1 | 26.7 | 26.1 | 25.7 | 25.2| 24.6 | 230 | 21.4 | 19.7 | 17.5 | 15.3 NICU ALLOY 400 (NO4400) 260 | 258 | 254 | 25.0 | 24.7| 243 | 24.1 | 23.7] 23.1 | 22.6 | 22.1 | 21.7 | 21.2 ‘90-10 CU-N! (C70600) 180 | 179] 176 | 17.3 169] 166] 160] 15.4 ALUMINUM too | 99] 96] 92] a7] 81 N=CR-FE ALLOY 600 (wo5600) [31.0 | 308| 30.2 [299 295] 290] 267 |262[27.6) 270 | 264 | 259 N-FE-CR (wogB00 & NosBto) | 285 | 283 | 278] 27.4 | 27.1] 266] 26.4 | 25.9] 25.4) 24.8 | 24.2 | 23.8 N-WO ALLOY B (N10001) 31.1 | 309 | 30.3 | 299 | 295] 29.1 | 288 } 28.3] 27.7] 27.1 | 26.4 | 26.0 N-MO-CR ALLOY C-276 (N10276} 29.8 | 23.6 | 29.1 | 286 | 28.3] 27.9] 27.6 |27.1| 26] 253 | 25.3 | 24.9 NICKEL 200 (N02200) 300 | 238 | 29.3 | 288 | 285| 281] 27.8 [27.3] 26.7| 26.1 | 255 | 25.1 (COPPER & AL—BRONZE 170 | 169| 166] 163 | 160] 156] 15.1 [145 COMMERCIAL BRASS 150 | 149] 146 | 144] 14.1] 138] 134] 128 OMRALTY 160 | 159] 156] 154 | 150] 14.7 | 14.2 113.7 TAN 155 | 154] 150] 146 | 140] 13.3] 126] 119] 11.2 70-30 CU-N! (C71500) 220 | 219 | 21.5 | 21.1 | 20.7| 202 | 19.6 | 188 NWO ALLOY B-2 (wi0s65) 314 | 31.2] 306] 30.1 | 29.8] 295 | 290) 286279] 27.3| 267 | 262 | 256 Ni-FE-CR-Mo-CU (Nogs25) | 280 | 278 | 27.3 | 269 | 26.6] 26.2 | 259 | 25.5] 24.9] 24.4] 238 MUNTZ (C36500) 150 | 149] 146 | 144 | 14.1] 138 | 13.4 | 128 ZIRCONIUM (R60702) 144 | 139] 134] 124| 115] 10.7] 99 N-CR-MO~CB (NO6625) 30.0 | 29.3 | 288 | 285 | 28.1] 27.8 | 27.3 | 26.7 | 26.1 | 25:5] 25.1 | 245 | 2460 7 NO ($32300) 280 | 275 7_Mo PLUS (S32950) 17-19 CR SIN STL AL-6XN STN STL (NO8367) 28.3 | 28.1 | 274 | 268 | 26.1} 255 | 248 }24.1 | 23.4 | 228] 22.1 N-29-4-2 29.0 SEA-CURE 31.0 2205 (531803) 29.0 | 288 | 28.2 | 27.6 | 27.0] 266 | 26.2 3REBO ($3150) 29.0 | 28.7 | 27.5 | 268 | 26.0| 253 | 245] 238] 230 REFERENCES: ASME SECTION 1, 0, 1998 EDITION INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. RA MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION # 181 HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN #15M1-76T-42 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY ALLEGHENY LUDLUM ‘STEEL CORP. TRENT TUBE CABOT-STELLITE ARCO, INC. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY SANDWIK TUBE 236 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-10M MODULUS OF ELASTICITY TEWP. DEG. C. woes WATER 2i.t | 378 | 933 [148.9 [204-4] 260.0] 315.6] 371.1] *26.7| 482.2] 557-8] 595.5] 6489 © STL, C-MO, WN-MO 201.3} 199.9] 196.5] 195.1] 168.9 | 186.2| 182.0]174.4| 164.8] 153.1 198.6 | 122.7 [1055 AUSTENTIC STN STL 195.1] 193.7| 190.3} 186.2 182.7 | 177.9 | 174.4 171.0] 166.2|162.0]157.2|152.4 | 146.2 LOW CHROMES THRU 2% 204.8}203.4] 199.9] 196.5|192.4 | 189.6] 185.5 181.3]175.8]171.0]164.8 | 1586 |150.3 2-1/4 CR=1 MO & 3 CR-1 Mo | 211.0}209.6] 205 5| 202.7] 198.6 | 195.1 | 191.0 186.8] 181.3}176.5| 169.6 | 163.4 |155.1 INT CR-MO (5~9% CR) [ 2180[211.7] 2075] 2043} 993 | 197.2] 193.1 188.2 |180.0]170.3 156.5 |14027 [1255 12, 13, 15 & 17% CR 201.3] 99.9 | 196.5 |192-4 | 188.2 | 164.1 |180.0|176.5[170.5|1600 [1482 [131.7 [145 LOW Ni STEELS THRU 3-1/2% | 191.7]190.3 186.8 184.1 [180.0] 177.2 ]173.7 169.6]158.6] 147-5 13535 | 120.7) 1055 M=CU ALOT 400 (No4soa) | 179.3]177.9 ]175.1 [172.4 170.3] 167.5 |166.2|165.4159.5]155.6 152.4 | 149.6] 146.2 ‘90-10 CU-N! (C7000) 124.1f123-41121:3]119.3 [1165] 114.5 |110.3 108.2 ALUMINUM 689| 68.3 | 662| 634| 600] 558 NI=CR-FE ALLOY 600 (wos6O0) | 213.7|212.4] 208.2 ]206.2|203.4] 199.9 | 197.9] 194.4] 190.3] 186.2 [762.0 [1786 [1744 NI-FE-cR (W080 a Nogst0) | 196.5] 195.1] 191.7| 188.9] 186.8] 183.4 | 182.0]178.6]175.1]171.0|166.9|164.1 | 1600 NI-MO ALLOY B (N10001) 214.41213.0] 208.9 206.2| 203.4 | 200.6 | 198.6] 195.1| 191.0] 186.8] 162.0 179.3 174.4 NI=WO-CR ALLOY C-276 (N10276)| 205.5] 204.1] 200.6] 197.2] 195.1] 192.4 190.3 ]186.8]182.7]178.6]174.4 1171.7 | 1675 NICKEL 200 (NO2200) 206.8| 205.5| 202.0] 198.6] 196.5] 193.7 | 191.7]188.2|184.1|180.0|175.8|173.1 | 1689 COPPER & AL-BRONZE 117.2) 1165]1145] 1124 [110.3 [107.6 [04.1 [109.9 COMMERCIAL BRASS 103.4] 102.7]100.7| 99.3] 97.2] 95.1 | 92.4] 88.3 AOMRATY 110.3] 109.6] 107.6] 106.2 103.4 101.4 | 97.9] 945] ‘TANUM 106.9] 106.2] 103.4]100.7 | 965] 91.7 | 86.9] 82.0] 77.2 70-30 CU-M! (C71500) 151.7] 151.0] 148.2 | 145.5 [142.7 [139.3 |135.1 |129.6 WI-MO ALLOY B=2 (N10665) 7165] 215.1|211.0] 207.5 [2055 |202.0 | 199.9 |197.2]192.4]188.2 | 184.1 1180.6 [1765 | N-FE-cR-wo~CU (NoB825) | 193.1] 191.7] 188.2] 185.5 |183.4 | 180.6 1786 |175.8)171.7]168.2| 164.1 MUNTZ (C36500) 103.4] 102.7] 100.7] 99.3] 972} 95.1 | 92.4] 88.2 ZIRCONUM (REO702) 99.3] 95.2] 92.4| 855] 79.3] 738) 68.3 NI-CR-MO-CB (NO6525) 206.8] 202.0| 198.6] 196.5 |193.7 |191.7 |188.2 184.1 |180.0|175.8]173.1|168. | 165.5 7 wo (532900) 199.9 [198.6] 193.1 | 189.6 7 Wo PWS (532950) 1999 TP 439 SIN STL 1998 ‘AL-6XN STN STL (NOB367) 195.1 | 193.7] 1889] 184.8| 180.0 175.8 |171.0)166.2|161.3]157.2] 152.4 N-29-4-2 1999 SEACURE 2137 2208 (531803) 199.9)198.5 | 194.4]190.3]186.1 |183.4 | 180.6 ‘3RE6O (31500) 199.9 |197.9 | 189.6] 184.8|179.2 |174.« | 168.9]164.1]158.6 REFERENCES: ASME SECTION Il, D, 1998 EDITION RA MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN. f15M1~76T-42 ALLEGHENY LUDLUM ‘STEEL CORP. CABOT-STELLITE, TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION f 181 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY TRENT TUBE ‘ARCO, INC. ‘SANDVIK TUBE Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 237SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-11 MEAN COEFFICIENTS OF THERMAL EXPANSION rae TNOHES PER INCH PER DEG FX 10° BCIWEEN 70 F ND. MATER “200]-100] 100 | 200 | 300 | +00] soo] ooo | 700] s00] 900 | 1000] vi00 [1200 | 1300 | 1400 PLAN CAREON SL & C-AN STL fs60 | 530] 620] car] 6ar| 707] 725] 742] 735] 776] 705 C81 SH, 6-1/2 wo & 1 cR-1/2 wo 45.60 | 5.64 | 573] 609 | 643 | 674] 708] 728]751| 7.71] 786 | 00 COWN=SISTL, 1 1/4-1/2 MO &3 CRI WO 553] sao | 625 | 661 739] 27| 296 [aor | 82+ wv-wo StL }s.50 | 6208 | 7.05] 725 | 7.43 | 758) 805| are | 23 20172 & 3-1/2 M 627| 634 | 678 | 698) 781 2-1/4 cR-1 40 [x60 | $20 | 650] 670 [ 690] 7.07 Taa[ 772 | Taz | 790 | 797 5-1/2 MO [560 | 5.90 | 650] 6.73 67] 697 732) 741} 748 | 756 | 756 7 R-1/2 MO & 9 OR-1 MO 5:0] 5.58 | 53s} 690 | 700 | 708 RAR 5.10 8.38 | 598) 6.15 | 6.30] 640 67 | 68s | 688 150R ATR [510 | 5.19 | 537] 630 | 637 | eae 17-19 OR (IP 439) 4s [ese | aes | 624 | as TAL GRUDES OF TP 316 & 317 STH STL ry 16 [1029/1040 | 1032 | oR ‘AL GRADES OF TP 304 STH ST. 835 10.07 | 1018 1029 | 10.38 | 1049 ‘AL GOES OF TP 321 SIN ST. 02 973| 979] sa5| 990 | 995, ‘AL GRADES OF TP 347 STH STL 882 10.33 | 1045 | 1056 | 1086 | 10.75 25 CR-12 M, 23 CR=12 M & 25 CR-20 WI 387 937 | sai] sar] ose | 9.62 N-6n (W087) 218 | 920| suo] 951 | 968 ‘ALUMINUM (3003) pro T254) ‘Aa (6061) 80] 1206] 126 ‘TAMU (GRADES 1.2.3 & 7) 4 CU (NO4400) 17 MCR-FE (Nose00) TW=FE-CR (608800 & NOBETO) 7: 70 -FE-CR-MO-CU (06825) 2: New (LOY 8) N-MO-CR (ALLOY C-276) (N10276) 6.04 NcxEL (ALY 200) (n0Z200) 620] 639] 671 50] 270] aso] 290 | as0 27205 (531803) 709) SREBO (531500) ‘eo 025] 345] asi] a76| 890 | 90+] 9.16 70-30 CU-M! (C71500) 850] 870] 890] 910 90-10 & 80-20 CU-NI 950] ‘orPeR 8a) 2x0] sag 250] 270] san] ean|ias0}ozoio3|roloso Bess, 10] 9.30] 3.60) 9.70]10.00|10.20|1050]10.70)10.9011.20) 11.40]11.80 | 17.90] 12.10, ‘MUM BRONZE 00 7 wo (S32000) 360] 6.00] 6.10] 620] s.3s| 650] 669) sal 705 | 725] 246 | 763 | 721 wo Pus (532950) 839] 667] 694] 722] 749] 7.68] 788 | 798] a00| az | 216 ‘coPPER-SUICON ra00| pouraury 1.20 ‘zReoNA 32] | 350] 370] 390] | aro} (CR-M-FE-wo-CU=CB (ALLOY 20¢8) 83] 8.0 a0 950 520] 620] 670] 7:12] 720] 730] 735| 745] 752] 760] 7.70] 720 | 800] 820] 3.35 | 250 320 538] 543] 52| 521 | sa8| 5.95} REFERENCES: ASME SECTION 1, D, 1998 EDITION INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. R.A. MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) ‘ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION f 181 HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN #15M1~761~42 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY ALLEGHENY LUDLUM STEEL CORP. TRENT TUBE CABOT-STELLITE ‘AIRCO, INC. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY SANDVIK TUBE BRIDGEPORT BRASS COMPANY NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS SABIN CROCKER, PIPING HANDBOOK, 4TH EDITION .G. FURMAN, JOURNAL OF METALS 238 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-11 M MEAN COEFFICIENTS OF THERMAL EXPANSION =a Tan an PREC 1 SEMEL OS Cm ara ans] 735 7a] 933 [von] z044[ ena] se] 71] 267] 822] 5378] 5935] eras] Tova] 7600 a NT ws Fas foes ficahaor cs] 5p sos] seh oe ar] Ue ee awe c/a wo fos assist ise|ian| naar [iso] 3s sn] 4350 Cmca ha woe oo feos ao [tae |ion}s es] 135510] va wea st 008 foot rns sas far se [sae cian aaa tessa rae iaw rede fags faa oss cas tare sa to Tift 0 ram fom .afzos| aa] 273s] 10] vom ere Scteyeuo toes fins [oro a esr|as| res anaes 1334| S| 30 [1375 TGC wo a9 oe wo aoe fos [oz om [ors sez a al r2ze| tac] iaga [ia wae isee re ae sa gyrase a0 | 20] aaa fran | rae eoeve aie Boe leer fase fro] osstossfaroa}ras| vo|riae far [ise nS ce 8) 2%ef 22 ioasieefoas ash 2s | tas|rtas frat rar | 213 | aan A OOO OF 6 TW Rear hanr fess|iess haseh aahiayrae|waoe[oz fase pare [ese] we At Gaus oF a S's iets leas [ean fice aes cl vad as] tet tea ese pace | se | tse A noes or set sm st raze foe fer|ieat [ieaera zante 7] ne |r A Goo OF 3075 SH S22 |saefesa|irax [ray [ral nates | tcolaso| raat for | a | ss BS oeiem 2 rom 25 20 Say fea fese|ions ese hese| eater tsetse 7a] 9 | tesa 8 03) [Ss seis [tea stra | vest tesa | oar | ae TN (55) be ease Ear Pome pias eles ‘ma (ees 123 & 7) ta [oss [ase [ars fos [as oon mn ome) tee tea tse eae ree, wy Ss a age Tea Goo & MEST) 501] sels] oooh eof 65 foe nicer oe) ae) *Bayfreof es] elie ted 8 vou Gr has} af nash a SE ABs c-2r9 cam "n3e| oan asa so vox (uy 20) ez) vise} sol te 23] tse [ef iesf ted | fis [sa vee] sz] soe 28 8) "aga 30{ roe} ao sre (500) Tea fico) era zo oo (780) "sate tea] 9 wus oc a oa sseahan] suf 72] tse sez fran ea nse paso buss reaalie wa ‘col t36|as0| tf oad ane 2st Poss [2.22] 2124 ‘ie ero rea ‘sue snot sofas]. 204 rasa |s303 va 1 fas fio) 1S aan wed Sa a0 pee [ese va coPPER-SLCON | 800 omer og oo sa] | 20] 0] 202" aad Bron re-w0-1-c8 (aor 208 bla vase na Manu ior 6) omens) fae fr] tae tae] asl 3.143234] 354 aa 1 foe [44a] 70] 803130 ree Fl Seccre 385] 977 ora} ns fos 07 REFERENCES: ‘ASME SECTION 1, D, 1998 EDITION INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. RA MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION # 181 HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN #15M1-76T-42 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY ALLEGHENY LUDLUM STEEL CORP. TRENT TUBE ‘CABOT—STELLITE. AIRCO, INC. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY ‘SANDVIK TUBE BRIDGEPORT BRASS COMPANY NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS SABIN CROCKER, PIPING HANDBOOK, 4TH EDITION D.G. FURMAN, JOURNAL OF METALS Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 239SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-12 ‘THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF METALS Tew OE F BUR FT_DEG. F MATERAL 70_[ v00 | 200 | 360 | 400 00 600 | 706 [ a00 [00 | vo00] 100 | ¥200 | 1300] r400 [1300 ‘CARBON STEEL 300 | 298] 29.2] 204] 276] 266] 256] 248 | 235 | 225 702 | 190 | 178 {162 [156 6-1/2 MOLY STEEL 248 | 250] 252| 25:1] 248| 243) 237] 280 | 222 | 214 195] 184 | 167153 | 150 1 R-1/2 Mo & 1-1/4 cR-1/2 wo] 21.3 | 215] 219] 220] 219] 217| 21.3] 208 | 202 | 19.7 195] 177 | 165 ]150 | 148 2-1/4 CRT WO 208 | 210] 213] 215] 205] 204] 213 | 202 | 202 | 197 185] 180 | 172] 156 | 153, 5 0R-1/2 wo 19 | 173] 181] 187] 191 192| 192] 190 | 107 | tas 175 ]171 | 165 | 160 | 158 var | v44] 153] 160] 165] v69] 171] 172 | 123 | 172 128} 131] 140} 147] 152] 158] 159] 160 | 161 | 161 v8 [166 | 162/156 [155 160] 158 | 158] 152 | 150 3-1/2 eRe. 223 | 232| 238| 241] 238 234] 2291223 | 216 | 209 192 | 182 | 169] 155 | 153 12 R & 13 8 152 | 153] 155] 156] 158] 158] 159] 159 | 159 | 159 156 | 153 | 151 | 150 | 51 15 .0R 142 | 142] ra] 145] 146 | 14.27] 147] 48 | 148 | v4.8 | 148 | 148 | 148 | 148] 48 | 48 7 v6 | 127] 128) to} 11] 132] 133] iS4 | 185] 196] 7] BLISS | las [as 17-19 68 (IP 438) 140 1 304 SW SH. as| a7] 93) 98} 104] 109] 113]118 | 122] 127] 132] 136] 140 | 465} 149 TP 316 & S17 SIN SL 77} 79] a4] 90] 95] too] 1a5]r10 | 115 | 120] 124] 129] 133 | 138] 42 WP 321 & 47 SH STL. ar} aa] as] 94] 99] 104) roo]iva | rng] 123 | 128] 133] 137 | 41 | 45 tp 310 SW St 73} 75] ao] a6] 91} 95] 101] r08 | rr} 118 | 121] 126] 131 | 136] 14.1 2205 (831803) 0] 85] 90] 95} 100] 105] 110/115 | 129 ‘3860 (551500) a4] 85] 90] 94] 98] 102] 106] r10 | 113 TNOKEL 200, 388] 372] 354| 34a] 325 [sre [32s] 331 | a -cu (wo44a0) 126 | 129] 139] 150] 16:| 170] 179] 189 | 198 | 209 | 220 NIOR-FE (06800) as] 87] 1] 96] 101] 106) ria }ars | 121 | 126] 132] 138] 143 | 149 | 155 | 160 M-FE-CR (408800) 67] 6a] 74] ao] as} a1] s6}ror| io] 112] 115] 121127 | 132 | 138 | 45 MIFE-C2-VO-CU (08825) za} 7s] ar] as] 1] 96 | 100] 104 | 109] r4] 118 | 124] 129 | 136 TW-WO ALOY B eif 64] sa] 70] zal 7] az a7] 93| 100 N-MO-CR AULOY C-276 (W10278) sol sa] 7ol 75] ax! a7| 2] 98} 104] r10| 115] 120 ‘AMINO ALOY 3003 1023 | 1028 1042}105.2}1061 ‘AUN ALLOY 6061 961 | 969] 950]1008 or) TAMU (GOES 12.3 & 7) 127 | 125] 120] 1.2] 15] 13] n2]in2 | 2] ns] na] ns MRT 70] 750| 720] 640] 09.0 Nain, RASS 710] 740] 770] soo] a30 core 2280}2250]2240 |z240 2230 90-10 cu-m ‘300 31.0] 340] 370] 420470 | 490] s10 | 530 70-30 CU-N' (C7150) 180] 190] 210| 230] 250|270 | soo} 33.0 | 370 7 wo (S52900) ss} 93] 98/103) 108] 113 7 wo PLUS (532960) 86] 94{ 102] 111] 118] 127 wna er) _mRcomuw 120 (R-MO ALY 27 ui3 CRLN-FE-MO-CU=CB (ALOY 2008) 78] NI-CR-MO-CB (ALOY 625) s7] ss} 62] 68} 72) 77) 82| a6] s1] 96] ror] 6] 10] 115] 120] 126 M42 83 10 SEA-CURE. 24] 96/103) 109] 116) 123) 129] 17 ‘AL=64N (N08367) 73] REFERENCES: ASME SECTION 1, D, 1998 EDITION AMERICAN BRASS CO. HUNTINGTON ALLOY, INC. BULLETIN. #15M1—761—42 TRENT TUBE AME, TECH. PUBLICATIONS NOS 291, 360 & 648 ‘ARCO, INC. ALLEGHENY’ LUDLUM STEEL CORP. ‘CABOT-STELUTE TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY TRANS, AS.S.T. VOL. 21, PAGES 1061-1078 INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. BABCOX & WILCOX CO. SANDMIK TUBE 240 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manutacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-12M ‘THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF METALS Toe. BEE Wn rer Fin | SPB] 953 |ress oes 2600 [Sas [s7.1 | a767] 622 | 557] 5055] eas] Poaa] eNO] Bis OREO STEEL sts 517] s05| 492] 478] «60| +3] 425 | 407 | 389 | 320] 350] 329 | 305 |2a0 |270 o-1/2 wOLY STEEL 429 | 433] 436| 456] «29| «2:] aro] sae | sea | 370 | 353] 337] 318 | 259/255 | 260 1 ch-t/2 wo & 1-1/4 c2-1/2 wo} 359 372] 379| 381] 379] 378] 359] 350 | 350 | 341 | 3811 320] 308 | 208 [260 |56 2k CR1 WO 362 | 363] 359] 372] 372| s70| 365|358 | 350 341 | 351 | 320] 312 | 208 |270 | 255 5 ch-1/2 0 252 208| 8.3] S24] 351] 332] 352] 329 | 324 | sta | 312| 30s] 296 | 207 | 277 | 275 7 afew zea | 243] 265] 273] 286] 202] 225] 208 | 298 | 298 | 06| 20: | 207 | 200 |z70 | 258 9 ott x22 | 227) 242| 254] 265| 270] 275 |273 | 273| 273 | 273) 272 | 273 | 270 |283 | 260 3-1/2 weKeL sas| 02] 412| 412] 414| 405] 395 | 3a | 574 | 362 | 348 352] 315 | 202 | 260 | 265 RA ISR 253 | 255| 268| 270] 275| 273) 275|275 | 275| 275 | 273 | 270 | 265 | 25: | 260 | 261 BR 28 | 246| 249| 25:1] 253| 254| 254] 256 | 256 | 256 | 256| 255 | 256 | 258 | 255 | 255 7 oR ‘2B | 20| z22| 225] z27| 228) 280) 252 | 234 | 25 | 27 | WS] 21 | 264 | 247 [251 17-19 8 (TP 438) 242 1 304 SIN STL us| 152] 161] 170] 120] 189] 195] 208 | 21. | 220 | 228 235 | 242 | 251 [258 ]265 1 306 & 317 SH ST. 133] 157] 145] 158] 154] 173] 182[ 190 | 199 206 | 215] 223 | 230 | 239 | 248 | 253 32 & M7 SH ST. ao | 145] 152] 163] 171] 120] v9] 97 | 206] 213 | 222 | 250 | 257 | 244 |253 | 260 1 0 SN SL 126 130) 138] 149] 157] 166] 175] 84 | 192 | 203 | 209] 218] 227 | 235 |z44 [251 7205 (551805) 13a | 147] 155] 164] 173] 182] 190] 199 | 208 SRE60 (531500) 14s | 147} 155| 165] 170] 173] 183] 190 | 196 WL 0 @72| ea] 613] sea] S62 [sso | 562 | 573 | as e-0U (404400) aia| 223| 241| 260) 273] 204) 31.0|327 | 43 362 | 381 NOOREFE (N05600) 149 | 15] 157] 166] 175] 194] 192) 20: | 209] 213 | 228] 239 | 247 | 258 [268 |277 NoFEACR (NOBROO) wi | 113] 123] 338] 143] 157| 165] 175 | 186 | 192 | 20. | zo | 220 | 228 | 239 [251 NEFE-CR-NO~CU (408828) 125| 132] 140| 149] 157] 165 | 173] 180 | 109] 197 | 204 | 215 |223 |235 TeoWo ALF 8 waa] tia} rae] waa} iae| w3s]a2 | 151] ven | 173] 185 NIMO-CR ALLOY C-276 (410278) 10.2] 11.1] 12.1] 13.0] 14.0] 15.1] 159 | 17.0 | 18.0 | 19.0] 199 | 209 ALUMDaAL ALLY 3008 773 |1773 1203 {1021 frase ‘NUMA ALLOY 6061 nse | 1672 |17153|1743 1764 Tawa (GMS 12.5 & 7) z20 | 21.| 208| 202| 198| 196| 194 | 194 | 194| 195 | 19.7| 201 MLN fai. zs [1367 asa [isn NAL BUSS 229281 |1583|1585 fa3s corre, ses. 357.7 |377 [ses 9 90-10 CU-N! si9| 537] saa] 660| 727 (213 | 4a | sas | 917 70-30 CUM (CTS) 312] 329] 363] 323] 433 |457 | 519] 572 | 640 7 wo (332900) 1s2| 161 170] 178] 182| 195 7 MO PLUS (S32950) 149} 163} 17.7] 19.2] 20.4] 220 ry fzza Zeon 203) My NLOY mu-27 195 (CRN-FE-WO-CU-CE (OY 2008) N-CR-MO—CB (ALOT 625) 29 | 100) :07| 132] x25] 153] 42 ]r4a | 257] 166 | 175] 185] 190 | 199 208 |2r8 N42 152 130 SAAC 163 | 168] 173] a9] 201] 203] 223 ]257 K-50 (908367) 37 REFERENCES: ASME SECTION tI, D, 1998 EDITION AMERICAN BRASS CO. HUNTINGTON ALLOY, INC. BULLETIN $15M1-767-42 TRENT TUBE ALME. TECH. PUBLICATIONS NOS 291, 360 & 648 ‘AIRCO, INC. ALLEGHENY LUDLUM STEEL CORP, ‘CABOT-STELLITE TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY TRANS, AS.S.T. VOL. 21, PAGES 1061-1078 INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. BABCOX & WILCOX CO. ‘SANDVIK TUBE ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 244SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE D3 WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS Example: Requlrod: Welght ofa Rng 48" OD x 36 1/2" ID x2 1/2" Thick 46° dametr diac thck weighs s1a19i0 Sileiemeerect ooo Baas Ring sex Se 1/2°x'1 wags Hess bs Fing x36 /erx2 fewogns Satie Dianwee | “inthe pimewr | “ERE | bm | MERU | ainmcer | Matha Thine ‘Theloee Themes Tite ade Pounds Tae Poinds Teche Posnds Taber Pods 000 0.00 4.000 356 8.000 a6 $2000 207 0.125 0.00 4125 an a. 1470 2105 275 ro) oot 4250 402 8280 1816 12.280 42 037s 0.09 4375 426 2375 sse2 12275 aa asco 0.06 4500 ast 8500 1600 12500 3480 025 0.09 625 478 aces 1987 12625 3550 0780 03 4700 503 8750 1708 12780 ss2t oars ox7 4075 520 ars 1784 12675 3692 1.000 5000 587 000 804 12.000 a784 1.125 5125 585 e125 ass sa25 2037 11250 8280 ror 9280 1908 13250 28:10 1375, 5375 oa ears 1988 raa75 so0s 1500 5500 6u 91500 20310 12500 039 25 5625 708 9.625 2063 13625 4135 1780 5750 736 9750 27 13750 an 1975 5075 780 9875 aire 13075 1298 2000 089 000 ace t.ce0 za 14000 13068 2125 401 a2 836 10.25 7288 143125 was 2280 ta 6250 870 10250 2340 14250 4523 275 126 6375 9105 10375 z98 14375 609 2500 138 6500 oat 10.500 26 14500 4683 2625 153 6625 o78 10.625 2515 14625 788 2750 168 6780 sos 10750 2574 14780 4348 2075 94 6975 1053 10875 2534 14875 1928 23000 200 7.000 ost 11.000 2595 15.000 so. a5 238 7125 1131 11128 281 45:25 5096 3250 235 7250 u71 11250 29.19 18250 1.80 aa75 254 7375 ran sta75 zane 18375 e265 500 27 7.500 29 11500 2048 18500 sai 3625 209 7828 1295 11425 20:10 15625 5428 3730 319 7780 1338 11780 075 15750 5525 675 au 7875 1381 11875 ait 18875 36.13 (1) Weights are based on low carbon 242 Aluminum . Tia ASL 400 Series Stele ‘ALS 300 Series SStels ‘Aluminum Bronze N al Rolled Bras. 035 ‘Mantz Metal 058 Nickel-Civome-tron 095 102 104 197 (Copper & Copro Nickels. ol with a density of 0.2836 Ib/inch ®, For other metals, multiply by the following factors: Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TanLe 48_eatuag WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS Diner | “eee” | biamee | “eee | ime | “iatbet || name | “om ashes ahs wet ais iichar [Pon iar Pad ae Post ia Poi 18.000 rae 21.00 ozs zscoo | 1057 sro | ataos tastes sree ites e540 gies | tsete suis | air 820 sate 21280 to08e wooo | saa sizso | aise t378 273 2378 tour a7 ists sists | ai23 13800 ease 21800 to296 peso | eae sis | zztot 182s c1s6 zises toate peas 13790 sises | zor taro ee 21780 toss7 25750 ts938 size | mess tears ea 21875 tos. wears | soa siers | zat 17000 e137 72.00 tora 7.000 16238 seco | zzace tries eae zaies to90s zis | eae sates | oer 20 cos 20 i027 zo | tsa0 waz | ais v3 er2e naar inst zisrs | i802 sears | eas i780 feat z2s00 a7 zreco | teous seo | asa trees ea9 nase itaoe zee | tose sees | oreo 177 aie zo | 11528 zo | tris sero | 2390 ars nar | zen ites zis | tor wees | 207 3000 77 waco | 11780 zacoo | ire soa | awase tetas mir | zat tent mars | W810 wars | 2u80 i280 7410 nas eo 20250 8 saz | 2625 ta378 7a2t 23075 tai70 wears | trea was | zat {3.200 78 za800 tet zesco | ose soso | 207 taezs nar | cases tase paess | tsast sues | ziee i370 rast nT inet zero | tatt samo | 25071 tas 7335 zr te3.98 wes | tes mes | 2860 19.000 wat ecco 128.0 wooo | terse sco | esra0 ia.tes sir | zeszs feos mores | aoe sures | aso 3200 cose || eas i098 paso | i087 sao | asizs i378 east zisrs | ieee mars | too sass | 020 9300 eur || 2es00 13570 posoo | oes otso | zee tpees cers || ness i3807 pees | tos bases | aero {9720 eee 27 tose 2780 tor pire | za87 tB378 ers8 2087s torae pars 19880 ste | 270s 70000 725.000 ‘e021 socco | 20047 sso | areas zo.ies Bates tsi wos | bet seize | arast 2028 ze | tot soz | poaee sszo | 2677 nasts 22378 wae moss | possi seas | 2mm 20500 23.800 tease waco | 20720 ses | zm07t moses pases | tas28 woes | 0090 ssezs | zaeee mre 2760 tare coro | 20st peer mars p07 10.13 soars | 21230 seers | assy Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 243SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE D-13-{Continued) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS Wag 7 gee zy Diameter eet || Dianne | “ithe Diener | “thet” ee miles ‘ito Tienes edhe ie Pemde Tas Posade Teer Pounds ae Pou 28.000 20087 41.000 area 48.000 ane 1.000 sro 236.125 20088 425 s7e7t 46.28 473.88 si.t25 58218 36250 280 41.250 27800 46250 47648 51250 8504 36378 mart 437s 381.20 40275 479.03 51375 58790 36.00 2874 41.500 ent 46300 ao1e2 51.500 50078 36625 2078 41.925 asa 46825 25421 51625 sea 236750 0082 41.750 30825 46780 asst 51780 52681 36875 20287 41075 200.58 46875 20.42 51875 590.29 37000 20498 42.00 e201 47000 492.03 52000 202.29 37328 208.09 42.128 20525 47.128 29485 2.125 605.19 37280 208.08 42250 20780 27280 ‘0728 52280 00.00 27378 ai 42.075 20098 47375 49991 52375 811.00 37800 1323 42.500 40222 47800 502.55 52800 e139 37828 1522 42625 40489 47825 505.20 52625 1688 37780 arrae 2270 40707 47750 507.98 52750 61979 37878 10382 42075 4004s 47875 510382 52075 ena ‘38.000 setsa 148.000 ania 48.000 519.19 ‘3.000 e257 a2 32375 423,125 41424 ania 51887 59.125 rs ea2s0 e588 28.280 41668 2200 518.55 58.250 e189 30376 e201 22075 41808 e375 21.24 52378 exes 38.500 200.15 43.500 42148 48.500 523.94 sa.sco ears eases 22220 23825 42290 press 528.84 e628 cose 38780 was 2379 ss.24 2780 £0.88 52790 ex2s1 20875 862 23075 wa78 48875 82207 e875 618.50 38000 a7 “44.00 9122 49.000 50480 4.000 e191 eee 40.96 44128 ames 49.128 53758 utes e522 we | sate 146.250 95.4 49.250 54027 54250 65553 20375 sa3 44375 43880 49375 s42.01 54375 650.58 38.500 783 44500 461.08 49.500 348.77 54.800 651.59 20625 u.7a 44525 4258 49.25 540.59 54825 ote 38750 sie 44780 44505 49750 51.29 54750 66787 30075 94.16 44075 404 29875 55407 54875 67078 20.000 628 45000 45108 0.000 566.85 e770 40.125 35061 45.125 450.56 50.125 50.64 67685 40250 360.85 45250 45807 £0280 56248 erase 40375 262.10 45375 458.60 £0375 568.23 83.00 40500 265.35 45.500 461.18 50200 260.04 688.09 40.625 367.61 45.625, 463.66 50.625 570.86 689.19 20750 6087 45750 46621 50750 573.88 5220 soars ora. 45878 a0878 50878 e761 520 244 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-13-Cortinued) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS SECTION 9 Wait ger ight pee Diameur Diameter ne Dianeer | “inthe Diameter ef Thckneis Thicke Thiesners Tader Taher Pound Takes Pounds Takes Pod s6000 61.000 e288 68,000 s7025 71.000 i208 6.125 61.125 ea22t 66.128 97393 7.128 112878 56.250 61.250 ens.62 66.250 97.62 71280 1190.78 58.375 61375 639.03 66.375, sett 71378 113472 18.500 61.800 e445 66.500 925.01 71500 1138.70 38.625 61.625 245.00 5.625 98.71 71825 114268 98.750 61.750 e4o.se 68.780 02.43 71.780 14687 55875 61.875 85278 66.75 996.15 71875 115087 7.000 rea6a 62.000 856.21 67.000 ovo.88, 72.000 115468 7.128 72588 62.125 259.66 67.128 to0a6t 7225 1188.69 87.250 7008 62.250 963.13, 67.250 1007.35 72.250 116271 87375 raz 62375 866.60 67375, 1011.10 72378 1168.74 57.500 73643 162.500 87007 67.500 roids 72.500 11707 57825 730.84 62625 870.58 67625 so1a.62 72825 117481 87.750 7285 62750 8770s 67750 1022.39 72780 1178.86 87875 748.07 62875, 880.55 67875 1026.18 7875 118201 ‘8.000 74929 3.000 88405 68,000 1020.94 73.000 1186.98 sa.125 75258 63.125, 897.88 62.128 109373 7.108 191.04 58.250 7587 63.250 891.08 68.250 1097.53 73250 1198.12 $8375 759001 63.375 04st 69375 tosi.34 73378 1199.20 58.500 78227 163.500 00.14 68.500 1048.15 73.500 1203.29 30.625 78853 163.625 01.68 8625 1018.08 73825 207.30 58.750 753.80 63.750 905.22, 62.750 1082.79 73.750 seins 50875 07 63.875 900.73 e275 1056.62 73875 1218.60 9.000 77835 64.000 si2a8 69,000 1080.48, 74000 sore 59.125 Tse 64.128, o1s9t a.t25 105431 74125 1223.84 59.250 7a1ss 64250 919.48 69.250 1058.18, 74250 122797 5975 73528 64375, 925.08 e075 to72.02 74375 rent 59.500 708.55 64.500 926.65, 69.500 1075.68 74.500 1206.28 53625 ye187 64625, 930.26 60.625 1079.76 74825 reat 59.750 735.19 64.750 903.85 69.750 1083.64 74.750 1244.57 59.875 798.52 64875 99745 eoa7s 1087.53 74875 1248.73 60.000 201.86 65.000 e107 70.000 09142 75.000 125201 60.125 £0820 65.128, 94469 To.t2s 095.32 75.128 1257.09 60.260 200.58 65.250 948.32 70.250 1090.23, 75.250 1281.27 60.375 attet 65.375 951.96 7375 1108.15, 75:75 1258.47 60.500 21528 65.500 955.81 70.500 110707 75.500 125967 0.625 e186, 65.625, 950.26, 70825 i1it00 75.825 1273.88 60.750 22203 165.750 6291 70.760 111493 75.750 1278.09 60.875 225.42 65.675, 966.58 70.875 11888 75875 2821 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 245SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE Ds3-{Continued) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS Wane a i 7 Dimes | “phe || iam | “ithe” || ime | “ite | pine | “eRe eke, ae wie rite = Tomah indir | — Pom aaa Posi ia Tost ream | oes ero | tasta0 secon | 104750 1000 | sesso gers | 0078 airs | 14ese0 sense | tes017 sires | tear yaz0 | tzss0e siz | t4roae sez | tes807 ota | tesKes yess | i027 sia | tres sears | tee170 stars | taso7s yes | 0ase sie | wna tesco | teees0 ois | taskas qses | i077 sees | tacos seezs | iertat cies | teense yer | 131208 biz | taease erso | te7e24 im | tereas rere | tates cies | tours teers | teeter stars | ta2ote roc | 22082 eee | 149770 ercco | scant cz00 | tessz6 Tries | test eaies | soa? eres | 100078 cares | tas038 rao | taeaat tz | ttoses tr20 | teoset coo | teseae ram | tsast wae | sine eras | 1708 cose | Toone iro | is0783 tea | tsieoe trsco | toes como | tooset res | tata sees | isz0st erezs | 71022 sees | to1098, m7 | 13647 sero | isosze er70 | tris10 camo | tote mars | 38080 tears | 000s eras | 171000 sees | teeta Tao | 135518 eso | wouas seco | 172400 waco | esar gies | tas048 sates | ise007 sates | i707 cars | taot8s jaz | rasa sz | isa azo | 170470 caso | ices esr | teeaz1 soars | teas sasrs | r7s0e2 soars | yoraos jaso | teres7 sasco | tss290 easo | i7e4ss wasn | tperae races | 137605 caces | te57ee toces | 174048 cacas | tosees rar | teetss caro | 186200 sarso | ireeaa caro | toere7 jes | t3es7e caers | 180597 sess | 175038 saers | ioe80 reo | te50.1 exo | teres sooo | i7e4se || oxooo | toeare yores | ioouse tures | teres soos | ineoar || ontas | forme pea | 130099 exzso | teot01 ozs | i724 cuz | jorae0 pos | tacos cus | teas71 cess | i7reat cuss | esnes peso | tuor77 asco | tsooat tesco | trouto isco | joxont reezs | tetzzo eases | teossta sees | 0.18 suczs | tote pero | tet68s curso | te008 corso | reat eure | tones yeers | tects cues | te0ese oars | 17e08 ours | zoouss woo | 1asse ceo0o | te00z0 120430 ecco | zoroze mors | 1208 teres | tereas 200.20 cers | potser soa | ses ssz0 | 161087 teraz sez | zoeoet woss | ta2000 sess | tez3se te1025 sare | aoess2 soso | 148340 ssc | teza20 teaazo sssco | costes toses | ware secs | tess04 122033 ssecs | 203878 corso | 1se88 e700 | tss7at 135438 sere | zos08 sosrs | 186.8 esers | teaaso ta09.44 eos | bounae 246 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Asso:GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-12_{Comtnue) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS Wa ae rian aan Dinner | eR |] meer | MERE | tiamcer | “eRe |] inner | Mati thle ‘Thickness sisi Tieines Takes Pounds Tasker Powder ae Ponds Takes Pomds 6.000 | 208276 torcco | zz7are tosceo | sce60 tio | araaar 6.125 | 2osa.tt tories | zerr79 toszs | 250860 sues | arsoss s6.2so | 206047 rorzs | 2289.42 toe250 | 25145t siz | arse74 sea7s | 2050.89 ors7s | 2290.06 oss7s | 252043 sists | arezs4 s6s00 | 207820 rorsoo | Zz0471 roesoo | 2526.8 ritso | 27608 seses | 207058 rorses | Zw0037 torces | 253229 tite | 277536 6750 | 208495 101750 | Z08.09 toe 750 | 250824 iii70 | 27ensa s6a7s | 209035 woa7s | 2314.70 tears | 25aa. tiers | 279780 7000 | 208575 te2000 | zai7.a8 torco | 2550.14 vr200 | erect arias | 2101.16 vores | zaes06 to7.25 | 2556.10 trees | 20028 s72s0 | 210687 so22so | z2e075 orz | 256207 sree | aaosse szars_ | 2in190 wooa7s | zasees ora7s | 256804 sears | 21276 s7soo | 2it7as was | z015 ors | 257403 tr2500 | 251904 s7e2s | 2izzee o2ees | Zuse6 ores | 258002 ti265 | 29231 s77s0 | 2120.28 woo7so | 23588 07750 | 258601 a) s7as | 213070 wo2e7s | 2257.31 sorers | 255202 teers | 2sa786 e000 | 2130.10 yonoco | zass.08 se@o0 | 258603 tia000 | zoe 0.125 | 2t4ses tontes | 25070 toar2s | soto tases | 2aso4s soso | 2150.11 tor2s | Zarase toa250 | 261007 tiazs0 | aase75 sears | 215559 soss7s | | z38028 to0a7s | 2616.10 tiaa7s | aa06, sso | 216107 toasco | 2aa6.04 oasco | 262214 tras | 2ss8 98.525 | 216556 sosses | za1.e0 tocces | 262018 si3628 | 207570 99.750 | 217205 roars | 20758 tee7so | 250424 tra7o | 298203 sees | 217756 ones | 2409.36 joae7s | 254030 ses | 299097 soo0 | tenis yoro0 | 2aoa.t4 tose | 4635 roo | aaoa72 sees | 26058 yours | 2araoe to3.25 | 25243 size | awoto7 se250 | 219410 yor2s | 242076 00250 | 25851 t4290 | moras sears | 219869 rous7s | 2426.55 oos7s | 56460 tars | 1379 soso | 20517 rouse | 243296 tosseo | 267070 r4s00 | aaeo.t8 sesas | zzi07e touses | 2ase.t9 tones | 267600 ree | toase so7s0 | z21627 yours | 2auace oa7s0 | 258200 114750 | 2295 soars | zzer82 roua7s | 2asoes tooa7s | 28002 waar | ase toocco | 220730 toscoo | 2488.70 vroco | 2585.14 isco | ams72 soo.ies | 222296 tos.t2s | 246185 sores | zroi27 tist2s | 2asa.t3 swo2so | za tos2s0 | 246740 soz | zro7at i520 | zasas4 toos7s | 224413 woss7s | 267327 soars | 2198s tis275 | 296496 oosoo | 24972 105800 | 2e7a.te soso | 271970 tis | 7130 wooses | 205632 oseos | 24asc2 sioges | z7es85 tisee | ao77e3 100750 | 228093 105750 | 2490.80 sio70 | 27s202 s1s750 | 28427 sooa7s | 2206.54 tose7s | 2496.00 woes | 27819 sis075 | 20072 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 247SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-14 CHORD LENGTHS & AREAS OF CIRCULAR SEGMENTS S - A= AREA A=CxD? D = DIAMETER = HEIGHT 12 k = CHORD k= 2[h(D-h)] (ose pees [Rio [ 6 |wo [ee] e e [rete Jes oeresefoaco [opus ‘Tyne [os | 1s Jncer acooe| ast | eisie| aei | “ona thse | 38 [4508 ea [anos] ese | ‘issal ‘iz | “Sean hie | a] “sa ea | Soo] 053 | ‘ieol| ‘is | “eae iiass | “353 | “seis ct | Seas] ost | teas} ie | oe nisee | “254 | “sea ans | oo0e7| oss | ores] 10 | ory 235 | ase foe | Sooee| ese | “Siva9| “es | “sesa #8¢ | ise er | oore| ‘esr | ‘arvea| tor | “easig 231 | ‘ise fea | ones] tse | “sieno| te | “care fee | “iest aes | sorta] ‘ess | “sten9| ts | “ceae 3 | sa 12 fea | ase 13 43 | tea ns ass | ses he fee | es iy der | Ie 12 nea iB Ha i es is oe | i ‘my | “tsa is ae | nee ie | ity 109 220 | 1302 i at | “ise iy dee | ‘ine 133 383 | ‘iar ie am | a 1 ass | “iS 2 Sar | “tes 138 200 | “ieete 10 220 | 1905 is St | ies 18 3 | Ini 1 iat | ‘isa ie ise | Inet 18 ‘Br | ‘ssa i $e | ise 18 ios | laa 248 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Associ:Square Inches uLTipLy ‘bie inches: Cuble Feet Cuble Feet Gallons (U.S. Lig) Gallons timp.) Barrels (US) Gallons (U.S: Lig) MULTIPLY Ounces (AV) Pounds (AV) Pounds (AV) MuLTiPLy Pounds Per Cubic Inch Pounds Pet Cubic Foot Pounds Per Cubic Foot Galton (0:8. Lig) Feet Per Second Feet Per Minute Pounds Per FoctHour Pounds Per FootHout Pounds Per Foot Second ‘Square Feet Per Second Pound-Second Per square Foot Degrees Fahrenhett Degrees Rankine Degrees Fahrentelt GENERAL INFORMATION TALE DAS CONVERSION FACTORS Lent BY. B.a516 29.008 .0025008 ‘8.00064846 voLUME ay, 7162 ‘45400 0.860673 10785 By, 2a05 ‘sana 0.489582 ay, 21600 6.01046 s601798 019826 vevociry oy 0so8 FORCE ey, 044s wiscosy ey. 004899 Wea6 9200308 ‘47900, TEMPERATURE ‘Subtract 22 and Divi by 1. Dive by 1.8 ‘Ad 45867 and Divide by 38 SECTION 9 To.oBTAN Centimeter Motore Meters Kilometers ‘ToOBTAN ‘Square Centimeters Square Cartimetars Square Meters Square Meters ooBtAN ‘Cuble Centim able Meters Liters ta ule Metors ble Meters To.08TAIN Grams ‘ilograms rooBTaIN ‘Grams Per Cuble Centimet ‘Kilogram Per Cuble Meter Grams Per Liter ‘ilograms Per Ler TOOBTAN store Por Second Mater Pat Second TOOBTAN Kilonewtons: yo.ostaN Centipotses ‘Kilogram Second Centipotses Centietokes Centipoises TOOBTAN Degrees Centigrade Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 249SECTION 9 Pounds Per Square Foot Pounds Per Square inch Pounds Per Square inch Pounds Per Square Inch Inches of Ho Pounds Per Square inch MuTPLy Gallons Per Minute (U-8.Lig) Pounds Per Hour Cubic Feet Per Minute Pounds Per Minute MULTIPLY. Cubic Feet Per Pound Gallons Per Pound (U.S. Lig) BTU Per Hour MuLTPLy BTUPerPound-F muLTPLy BTUPer Pound MuLTeLy BruPerPound-F MULTIPLY Bru Per Hour.Square Foot"F BTU Per Square Foot Hout BTU Per Square Foot Hout BTU Per Square Foot Hour MULTIPLY BTU Per Foot Hour. °F BTU Per Square Fool°F Per Inch BTU Per Square FootHour °F Per Foot MULTIPLY Hour-Square Foot“ Per BTU Hour-Squate Foot" Per BTU Ly Pounds Per Hour-Square Foot MULTIPLY BTU Per Cubic Foot GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-18-{Continued) CONVERSION FACTORS. PRESSURE ey, S.ovea07 ‘9028 eau 76 oosaae ‘6004.76 boss Sesa7 ay B.o0006309 .o00t260 ‘ieseott 6.062428 ease ENERGY & POWER a 4085.06 o2si0 2.000282 43880 0207 ENTROPY ay, Sie68 ‘ENTHALPY ‘SPECIFIC HEAT ‘ees HEAT TRANSFER Serezs see 27108 e203 ‘THERMAL conpucrViTy a 7207 ouaaze ‘Vase. ‘FOULING RESISTANCE x 76.1102 one Mass vELocrry rooBTAN ietograms Per Square Centimeter ‘ilograms Per Square Mater ‘Newtons Per Square Meter 2 Pas ‘Klograms Per Square Centimeter Kilopascals ‘TOoRTAN Gale Meters Per Second kilograms Per Second ube Meters Per Hour ‘Kilograms Per Second ToosTAMN ‘CabieMeters Per Kilogram Cieers Per Kilogram qooBTAN ‘ous Kitoealories Thermies Soules watts ous Per Gram=c Tooptam Toutes Per Gram ¢ ‘TOOBTAN Watts Per Square Meter Watts Per Square Meter Kilocalories Per Square Meter-Hour Filocalories Per Square Meter Hout C ToosTam Watts Per Meter ¢ Watts Per Meter € Kilocalories Per Square Mater Hour’ € Per Meter qoostan ‘Square Meter c Per Kilowatt ‘Square Meter Hour C Per Kilocaorie ‘grams Per Squire Meter Second ‘TOOBTAN ‘Megajoules Per Cubic Meter 250 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-16 CONVERSION TABLES FOR WIRE AND SHEET METAL GAGES ‘Valet in approximate decimals ofan inch ‘Asa number of gates are in ute for various shapes and metals it it advitable to state the thickness in thousandths when speciying gage’ number. US Sel wie Ameicn(AWG)| VGWG) ae” | Bigagham EN Vwaatbumaad Mon] WO) us. Sundast | impert Sandad Brow and Spe [or Roebling ot "| Carte winter | Stndant Bimngm "ice Sa Gas) ‘Am Seti” | ‘Sabra Wie | Cor abect und Be) sw) dofnomteron | actWigets, | “tariSeer” | Glkemeat. | Garitea and | tan eget SREISS | Get Wes | Semis | waltinn) | Sema rane) ‘o900000| 0.4900 (2500 oases 9500 co) 290008, Sirs 489 2280 Baca ‘0000. 20000 2.08 0438 0.63 base 0000 2009 0.480 8008 ease 0.408 pers aoe S000 200 este 8 435 S35 83000 372 00. cH 38s oaa10 0380 O3ee oaase OMe 0 3 0335 ces 0340 o3i2 O88 O33 o 1 0288 83890 ‘e360 0281 oa5i2 0360 3 2 38 2825 2a 0366 oan 0378 2 3 33 0287 0350 0350 ane 0382 3 ‘ 0304 O28 Sasa 0334 23500 ra ‘ 5 one S070 8220 0210 Saas 8212 5 @ 032 9.3920 om 9209 0.1981 9198 ¢ 5 oes 83770 Si00 oia8 oe oe 7 3 S328 8320 oes oiz o3gr0 8160 3 3 one 83485 Me O86 03398 oie 3. 0 Ooze 831980 else oat 05380 0335 io " 09" 0.1205 9320 e125 ons ry us eB Boat 088 S08 2300 Soar ioe 2B a Sore Sasi 2035 805e 8.0882 882 % is ee 8.3600 083 Sore 078s 9.080 i 18 0057 Sar bore e070 2680 oor a5 8 a8) ‘2.0825 2088 082 ‘20825 ry 6 7 O85 2500 6088 0.086 osse 088 y 8 080 Soars Sots 2.080, 8005 Sous % 3 Soe Soeie Saaz ocr Sowa 2000 % 2 ose Sass bg oars Bis 838, 2 3 99288 00317 9082 o0a44 oom ‘082 Fy 2 Ss 8388 88a Seat Gosia 8028 2 B 8.0008 8.0388 2038 Sze Soxre 8038 3 a 8.00" 8.9230 on 0.9350 Soae 80s 2 Es Barr S304 030 Saat 8.220, 0030 3 28 90158 ore: ea1e 90188 ry 2018 a 2 Sone 89173 Sole Saie 25178 Stee 2 ois ote oot 0086 2a186 S018 2 2 Sons S180 8813 Soret Sai99 oo136 2 2 oto oto bor 00135 ooi23 Baie » a 00089 9012 2010 ‘20109 oan bone 3 2 2.080 Ota Soo8 Obie 88008 Sar08 2 S Sor Sone 8.08 S.0s6 oar 0100 3 x Sine, baie cor 2.0088 Sor? Boose o 38 Bose 8.0088 8.05, 2078, 8.5068 B88 Ey ry 90080 9.0080 0.008 90070 9.0061 90078 % 2 Boos 8085 Sooes 8054 See a 3 S009 8.9080 8082 8088 ‘60 % 33 So035 8.0078 8.048 ions & 2 Soest 8.0070 2088 088 2 rn (2.0068 ‘9084 ‘oonee e & 8.9062 88031 8.049 2 & 080 80037 S38 3 a 2.0083, 8.086 Soa ‘ s 0.0085 8.032 Soz8 3 6 9.0082 0018 onze 8 ° 8.3080 Soot? Soa % pi S048 oes Sante & % S.o0e8 Soot Soi 3 5 Booee Boor 2.0010 3 METRIC WIRE GAGE is ten times he diameter in millimeters. 1 Sometimes used for iron wire. + Sometimes used for copperplate and for plate 12 gage and heavier and for sel tubes Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 251SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP SECTION This section of the TEMA Standards provides the designer with additional information and guidance relative to the design of shell and tube heat exchangers not covered by the scope of the main sections of the Standards. The ttle of this section, "Recommended Good Practice’, indicates that the information should be considered, but is not a requirement of the basic Standards, When a paragraph inthis section (RGP) is folowed by an R, C, and/or B, this RGP paragraph isan ‘extension or amplification of a like numbered paragraph in the RCB section of the main Standards. Similarly, other suffix designations following RGP indicate other applicable sections of the main Standards. 252 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.11 HORIZONTAL VESSEL SUPPORTS RGP-G-7.111 LOADS RGP-G-7.1111 LOADS DUE TO WEIGHT | eT (Ts ae SECTION 10 -@A + T j _ ae at = a ‘oor sae FIGURE RGP-G-7.1111 4, CALCULATE COMPONENT WEIGHTS AND WEIGHT OF CONTENTS (OPERATING AND TESTING). 2. CALCULATE VERTICAL SADDLE REACTIONS & LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENTS DUE TO WEIGHT FOR THE EMPTY, OPERATING & TEST CONDITIONS CONSIDERING ACTUAL COMPONENT WEIGHT AND LOCATION, RVFwr = VERTICAL REACTION @ FIXED SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT RVSwr = VERTICAL REACTION @ SLIDING SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT ‘SMFit = LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ FIXED SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT ‘SMSwt = LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ SLIDING SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT ‘SMMwr = MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT BETWEEN SADDLES DUE TO WEIGHT RGP-G-7.1112 EARTHQUAKE FORCES SMFeo SMa SMSa RHF eo RLFeo J RLSea RHSeq_ as { 1 Ww sFea Avra veo sSca exe supe SADDLE b SADDLE FIXED suoING SADDLE SADDLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1112 4. CALCULATE SEISMIC REACTIONS AND MOMENTS. Cs= SEISMIC FACTOR RLFea = TOTAL EXCH WT x Cs RLSea = 0 (SLIDING SADDLE) RVSta = (RLFea xH)/L ‘SMFea = SMFwr x Cs RHFea = RVFwr x Cs ‘SMSea = SMSwr x Cs Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 253SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.1113 WIND LOADS Ler SMFw = SMMw = SMSw Se a es jo Hor —s Fltw RHFW RLFW RLSw RHSw Ns wW MSFw ba L 8 ae] MSS FIXED SLIDING RVEW RVSw SADDLE FIXED SLIDING ‘SADDLE ‘SADDLE ‘SADDLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1113 1. CALCULATE WIND LOADS (CALCULATE TOTAL WIND FORCE), FLw = Wert x Here x EFFECTIVE WIND LOAD (AS DETERMINED BY APPROPRIATE CODE) Hu = Herr x Lere x EFFECTIVE WIND LOAD (AS DETERMINED BY APPROPRIATE CODE) RLFw = FLw (MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE FOR SMALL EXCHANGERS) RLSw = 0 (SLIDING SADDLE) ‘SMFw = LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ FIXED SADDLE DUE TO TRANSVERSE WIND (SHELL MOMENT DUE TO LONGITUDINAL WIND MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE) LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ SLIDING SADDLE DUE TO TRANSVERSE WIND (SHELL MOMENT DUE TO LONGITUDINAL WIND MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE) 'SMMw = MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT BETWEEN SADDLES DUE TO TRANSVERSE WIND (SHELL MOMENT DUE TO LONGITUDINAL WIND MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE) RHSw = FH x ((B + 0.5L) /Ler) SMS: RVSw = (RLFW x Herr/2)/L RHF w = FHwx (A + 0.5L) / Lert) RGP.G-7.1114 THERMAL EXPANSION LOADS LOADS CAUSED BY LONGITUDINAL GROWTH BETWEEN FIXED & SLIDING SADDLES. 4 sree ition ssoe 7 + qty) + | ! J rere =alLIT ruse SADDLE Fee. SUING. SADDE 1. CALCULATE LOADS DUE TO THERMAL EXPANSION (WHERE y. = COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION BETWEEN FOUNDATION AND BASE PLATE AT SLIDING SADDLE). FOR STEEL =0.8 FOR LUBRICATED PLATE. 254 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.1115 COMBINED FORCES ee at AID + Y \4 RLFer I Riser | RHSerr 7 MSFerr u MSSerr RHFere FIXED SLIDING RVFere RVSer beieieal FIXED SLIDING Scie SADDLE SADDLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115 1. CALCULATE THE COMBINED SADDLE REACTIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING CASES OR AS APPROPRIATE. IN DESIGN CRITERIA: + DEAD WEIGHT EMPTY + DEAD WEIGHT EMPTY + EARTHQUAKE + DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING + EARTHQUAKE {DEAD WEIGHT FLOODED DEAD WEIGHT FLOODED + EARTHQUAKE DEAD WEIGHT EMPTY + WIND + DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING + THERMAL EXPANSION DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING + WIND OR ANY OTHER APPROPRIATE COMBINATION DEAD WEIGHT FLOODED + WIND 2, CALCULATE RESULTANT SADDLE LOAD & SHELL MOMENT FOR WIND/EARTHQUAKE CASES: RVFer = LARGER OF (RVFwt" + RHF Ww?) OR (RVFwr “+ RHFec! )"™ RVSere = LARGER OF (RVSwr?+ RHSw’)!” OR (RVSwr2+ RHSeat) = ‘SMFerr = LARGER OF (SMFur+ SMFw®)!" OR (SMFv1?+ SMFea*)"? 'SMSerr = LARGER OF (SMSwr7+ SMSw*)* OR (SMSwi*+ SMSed ‘SMMerr = LARGER OF (SMMwr?+ SMMw?)!" OR (SMMw: + SMMea?)"? RGP-G-7.1116 EFFECTIVE REACTION LOAD SADDLE ANGLE RVerr Renu —E ACTUAL SADDLE ‘ANGLE EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1116 1. CALCULATE THE EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE FOR EACH SADDLE FOR ALL WIND AND EARTHQUAKE CASES. 2, EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE = ((ACTUAL SADDLE ANGLE DIVIDED BY 2) - ARCTAN(RH/RV)) x 2 (GEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1116). Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 255SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.112 STRESSES (ONCE THE LOAD COMBINATIONS HAVE BEEN DETERMINED, THE STRESSES ON THE EXCHANGER CAN BE CALCULATED. THE METHOD OF CALCULATING STRESSES IS BASED ON "STRESSES IN LARGE HORIZONTAL CYLINDRICAL PRESSURE VESSELS ON TWO SADDLE SUPPORTS", PRESSURE VESSEL AND PIPING: DESIGN AND ANALYSIS, ASME, 1972, BY LP. ZICK ONGITUDINAL STRESS AT SADDLE WITH STIFFENER S1'= LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT SADDLES (TENSION AT TOP, COMPRESSION AT BOTTOM) ‘Si LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT MIDSPAN ‘S5= CIRCUMFERENTIAL COMPRESSION AT BOTTOM OF SHELL ‘S, = TANGENTIAL SHEAR IN HEAD Si= CIRCUMFERENTIAL ‘STRESS AT HORN Sz = TANGENTIAL SHEAR - RESULTS (OF SADDLE IN DIAGONAL LINES IN SHELL FIGURE RGP-G-7.112 256 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.1121 LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT MID SPAN (Si) 1 Sue tHl|-- 4--}44 eS PeeaattE t LONGITUDINAL STRESS LONGITUDINAL STRESS (METRIC) sy+2(-Sier) 2, Srna (SMMC) t08, Wee WHERE ‘SMMer= = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE SHELL MOMENT AT MID SPAN (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) ind (mm-kN) = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) ts = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) RGP-G-7.1122 LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT THE SADDLE WITHOUT STIFFENERS (5+) J THIS AREA IS INEFFECTIVE SoA oN Me oe eA TAN ty | at. i i : ty eee a ee SMFere or Stier 4 sist SMFere SMS ities (SIRES cosa) (SREB cosa) a SO AN nm) EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE, radians o Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 287SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.1123 LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT THE SADDLE WITH STIFFENER RINGS OR END CLOSURES CLOSE ENOUGH TO SERVE AS STIFFENERS (S:") LONGITUDINAL STRESS LONGITUDINAL STRESS (METRIC) sr = (-Siies or suser) = 6 Serr or suse) oe WHERE ‘SMFere, SMSeee = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE SHELL MOMENT AT FIXED OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) nib, (mm-4N) = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) SECTION MODULUS = 4 ts, inches? (mm*) ts = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) IF THE SHELL IS STIFFENED IN THE PLANE OF THE SADDLE OR ADJACENT TO THE SADDLE ‘OR THE SADDLE IS WITHIN A < 1/2 OF THE END CLOSURE, THEN THE ENTIRE SECTION MODULUS OF THE CROSS SECTION IS EFFECTIVE, ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMITFOR St, S1'&Si" ‘TENSION - THE TENSILE STRESS + THE LONGITUDINAL STRESS DUE TO PRESSURE TO BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE TENSION STRESS OF THE MATERIAL AT THE DESIGN TEMPERATURE TIMES THE JOINT EFFICIENCY OF THE GIRTH JOINT ‘COMPRESSION - THE COMPRESSIVE STRESS IS TO BE LESS THAN THE B FACTOR IN THE CODE FOR LONGITUDINAL COMPRESSION OF THE MATERIAL AT THE DESIGN TEMPERATURE, 258 — Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.1124 TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS IN PLANE OF SADDLE (S:) A) UNSTIFFENED SHELL t= rat AVF or VS __TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS (METRIC) TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS Ka(RVFerr oF RVSEr) Ko(RVEer oF RVSE) gp a a = 7 x10) kPa MAXIMUM SHEAR AT 8 =a. WHERE RVFer , RVSerr = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RESULTANT SADDLE LOAD AT FIXED ‘OR'SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) In, (mm-KN) ©, degrees CONSTANT Ka FOR VARIOUS VALUES OF @ oe = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) a0" [4.47% ts = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) 130° [4.022 740° [0.900 ‘SINa 150° [0.799 Kee ay SINGCOSS- '8) SHELL STIFFENED BY RINGS IN PLANE OF SADDLE, /-— STIFFENING RING fale 4 t T | 2 TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS (METRIC) eu AVF SE) gee AARMFET OVEN) ot ape Sa eoGies WHERE RVFerr , RVSerr = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RESULTANT SADDLE LOAD AT FIXED OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) in-b, (mmrkN) = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) ts = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) = 318 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 259SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE (©) SHELL STIFFENED BY END CLOSURE (A <1/2) Pe ay ra hoa TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS (METRIC) cox Kafer VS) coe AARVEtE CRUSE) Kgl pa (MAXIMUM SHEAR AT 8 = a. WHERE RVFerr , RVSerr = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE SHELL MOMENT AT FIXED OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) imtb, (mm-KN) 4, dogees f= (100-§ ) degrees a= 188 fp) raiane CONSTANT Ka FOR PASI oro UTSIOE SHELL RADIUS, ches (nm) Hous YA SHEL TAICENESS cos . a fea (re) 420° | 0.680, ‘SING -SINaCOSa 430° [0.722 Ke="x [na + SINGCOSa. 440° [0.502 [a Shacots ie ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMIT- THE MAXIMUM TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS FOR CASES A, B, & CIS TO BE LESS THAN 0.8 TIMES THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE STRESS IN TENSION OF THE SHELL MATERIAL AT THE DESIGN TEMPERATURE. 260 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Asso:RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.1125 CIRCUMFERENTIAL STRESS AT HORN OF SADDLES UNSTIFFENED (S:) CIRCUMFERENTIAL STRESS AT HORN OF SADDLE FOR Ls 2 r _ _ (RVFerORRVSerr) _ 3KO(RVFer ORRVSEF) — Ib $= A504 105) Bae ine oR FOR Ls <8r _ _ (RVFert ORRVSerr) _ Kar(RVFerr ORRVSerF) Ib S= + Fia(b + 10s) = Lets? + ie CIRCUMFERENTIAL STRESS AT HORN OF SADDLE (METRIC) FORLs 2 er : [ fee On isu 2 roc oR USE tre oR FORLs <8r of Ever OF RVSer ~ KonfivFere ORRVSH) | 1) pa WHERE RVFerr, RVSer = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE VERTICAL REACTION AT THE FIXED AND SLIDING SADDLE RESPECTIVELY, Ib (KN) = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) b= WIDTH OF SADDLE, inches (mm) Le = SHELL LENGTH BETWEEN TUBESHEETS OR BETWEEN SHELL FLANGES OR BETWEEN SHELL FLANGE TO HEAD TANGENT LINE, inches (mm) Ka = CONSTANT FROM FIGURE RGP-G-7.1125 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMIT FOR Ss = 1.25 TIMES ALLOWABLE STRESS IN TENSION FOR THE SHELL MATERIAL AT DESIGN TEMPERATURE, Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 261SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE Figure RGP-G-7.1125 VALUE OF CONSTANT Ky A= Distance from tubesheet or shell flange or head tangent line to center of saddle, inches (mm) T = Outside radius of shell, inches (mm) 0.05: 0.04. 0.03: VALUES OF CONSTANT Kg 0.02: 0.01 00 Os 10 1s 2.0 RATIO Alt 262 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 AGP.G-7.1126 STRESS IN HEAD USED AS STIFFENER (S,) If the head stiffness is used by locating the saddle close to the head, tangential shear stress should be added to the head pressure stress. The tangential shear has horizontal components which cause tension across the head. 8 x- E+ 2) raaians Central Angl Sea eee e180 12 120 B = (180 - 0/2), degrees r Ky. 3{[__sinta _ 8x -a + sina cosa ‘n 8, degrees 7. \\ oe Constant Ky Value For Various Saddle Contact Angles, 6 aad 6 i Ky 120" 0.401 130° 0.362 140 0.327 150° 0.297 Stress In Head Stress In Head (Metric) (RVF ye Or RVS,q) Kg Ib (RVFee¢ OF RVS ent) Ky Sy ———————| « 10%, ka ry rt, Where t, = thickness of head, inches (mm) Allowable Stress Limit ‘The tangential shear is to be combined with the pressure stress in the head and should be less than 1.25 times the maximum allowable stress in tension of the head material at design temperature. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 263SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.1127 RING COMPRESSION IN SHELL OVER SADDLE (S,) ‘The sum of the tangential forces on both sides of the saddle at the shell band causes a ring compression stress in the shell band. A width of shell equal to Sts each side of the saddle plus the saddle width resists this force. Wear plates of greater width than the saddle may be used to reduce the stress. B= (180 - 6/2), degrees r a at Piel Central Angle a =7 780° * 29)radians 1+ cosa @ + sin a cosa | <7 a x tl Constant Ks Value For Various Saddle Contact Angles, 8 @ Ks 120° 0.760 130 0.726 140 0.697 150° 0.673 Ring Compression Stress Ring Compression Stress (Metric) a (RVFyq Or RVSiq) K; Ib (RVFyq OF RVS.q) Ks =—_—__—__ » — 8.= |————___—_— : ts(b + 101s) in? wort pee Where b = saddle width, inches (mm) Se ait ‘The maximum compressive stress should be less than 0.5 times the yield stress of the material atthe design temperature. This should not be added to the pressure stress, 264 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.113 DESIGN OF SADDLE PARTS. DETERMINE MAXIMUM LOADS FROM APPLICABLE LOAD CONDITION ‘SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115 ete RHEE RLF EFF cesar HSEFF RLScer RvEeer RVStFF THERE ARE MANY TYPES OF BASE PLATE, WEB & GUSSET ARRANGEMENTS. THE FOLLOWING APPROACH IS OFFERED AS ONE OF MANY. CENTROID OF SADDLE ARC WEB i Zz GUSSET T BASE PLATE CALCULATE PROPERTIES OF SADDLE ABOUT X-X & Z-Z AXIS A=AREA, in? (mm?) le-x, Iz-2=MOMENT OF INERTIA ABOUT x-x OR 2-2, int (mm*) Sx-x, $z-2=SECTION MODULUS ABOUT x-x OR z-z, in?(mm3) CHECK WEB & GUSSETS AS COMBINED CROSS-SECTION FOR BENDING BENDING STRESS ABOUT BENDING STRESS ABOUT xox AXIS x=x AXIS (METRIC) Mex ob _ Mex : so: SS sb = SX x 108, kPa WHERE Mx-x _=(RLFEFF OR RLSeFF) x LEFF, in-Ib (mm-kN) Sb ©90% YIELD STRESS BENDING STRESS ABOUT BENDING STRESS ABOUT 22 AXIS, 2:2 AXIS (METRIC) Mz-2z Sz-z "in sp = -MZ2_ x 108, kPo Sb = a WHERE Mz-z_=(MSFEFF OR MSSEFF), in-Ib (mm-kN) Sb < 90% YIELD STRESS Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 265SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE, CHECK WEB & GUSSETS AS COMBINED CROSS-SECTION FOR COMPRESSION RVFer or RVSee ib ‘STRESS IN COMPRESSION, Sc= 2 eB RVFu ot RVSer 2 x10", (kPa) ‘STRESS IN COMPRESSION, Sc ‘STRESS LIMIT = ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESS COMBINE STRESS FROM BENDING AND COMPRESSION ACTUALBENDING STRESS __,_ ACTUAL COMPRESSIVE STRESS "ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS ‘ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESS, 266 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.12 VERTICAL VESSEL SUPPORTS. ‘THE VESSEL LUGS DESCRIBED IN THIS PARAGRAPH INCORPORATE TOP PLATE, BASE PLATE AND. ‘TWO GUSSETS, OTHER CONFIGURATIONS AND METHODS OF CALCULATIONS ARE ACCEPTABLE, APPLIED LOADS Bae ANALYZING (EMPTY, OPERATION, FULL OF WATER, ETC...) Ib (kN) N= NUMBER OF LUG SUPPORTS i d8= BOLT CIRCLE, inches (mm) M-= OVERTURNING MOMENT AT THE SUPPORTS. DUE TO EXTERNAL LOADING, In-b (mm-kN) aM WwW. MAXTENSION= 4M — Wp ay tue aan ND) an ooceae Me ‘ i a | | aw ‘dBN i | eBN i T oan ioe TOA one UPLIFT | TOAD’ 1 dB: ; | A w w Ll \ Bode a Ww We TOTAL DEAD WT. PER CONDITION ! 7 i i i Mt NO UPLIFT EXISTS ew> w (MAX COMPRESSION = ant Ww «tb (KN) RGP-G-7.121 DESIGN OF VESSEL SUPPPORT LUG 3 -TP- n EG= LOCATION OF LOAD REACTION, inches (nm) — Poe t= Distance BETWEEN TOP PLATE { "AND BOTTOM PLATE, inches (mn) = To = THICKNESS OF BOTTOM PLATE, inches (nm) ‘Tt= THICKNESS OF TOP PLATE, inches (mm) ‘Tg = THICKNESS OF GUSSETS, inches (mm) ‘TP = TOP PLATE WIDTH, inches (mm) GB = BOTTOM PLATE WIDTH, inches (mm) bw = BEARING WIDTH ON BASE PLATE (USE 75% OF GB IF UNKNOWN), inches (mm) P. we b-Ec—~ co—-| Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 267SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE. RGP-G-7.122 BASE PLATE 2+ 21g + —__.] RGP-G-7.123 TOP PLATE Ly =a bec MAX, COMPRESSIVE STRESS AT B CONSIDER BASE PLATE AS A SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM SUBJECT TO A UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD o, ib (kN) (a+ To)? SED into (mm-kn) ae FOR TENSION DUE TO UPLIFT, CONSIDER BASE PLATE AS SIMPLY ‘SUPPORTED BEAM WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD LL, Ib (KN) ATITS CENTER Lua+ To) w= Be 1b (mma) BENDING STRESS BENDING STRESS (METRIC) eu* tb eu* ie spa eb, sp = SMF 108 ar GwNToy "in Cow rBy . Sb < 90% YIELD STRESS M® = GREATER OF Ma OR Mr ASSUME SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD (0+ Ta)? + int (oen-KN) WHERE tb (aN © = Fag in (mm BENDING STRESS. BENDING STRESS (METRIC) eM to eu e sp =—— 6M _—_ ib b= 9M x 108 kPa TPF) in? TP )x CT) Sb < 90% YIELD STRESS G8-Tp a arctan —S8-TP degrees Ht ie ca. (© = eccentricity = EC - «Inches (mm) MAX. COMPRESSIVE STRESS AT 8 (METRIC) wi be Sc" —gaxTgx(cosayy *"* oe ‘So < THE ALLOWABLE STRESS IN COMPRESSION (COLUMN BUCKLING PER AISC) ue ae Sc=—eByTgRICOS@T— *(t + Gg )x 10 kPa 268 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.2 LIFTING LUGS (SOME ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF LIFTING LUGS) RGP-G-7.21 VERTICAL UNITS TAILING LUG TRUNNION TRUNNIONS SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR BENDING & SHEAR, VESSEL REINFORCMENT SHOULD BE PROVIDED AS REQUIRED. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 269SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.22 HORIZONTAL UNITS ejnere -—-@ -—-— {HI cs SLING LIFT PREFERRED METHOD OF LIFTING IS SLINGING SHELL ERECTION LUGS ONLY IF SPECIFIED BY CUSTOMER RGP.G-7.23 TYPICAL COMPONENT LIFTING DEVICES. EYE BOLT LIFTING Luc 270 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.24 LIFT PROCEDURE 4. ESTABLISH LIFT PROCEDURE. LIFT PROCEDURE IS ESTABLISHED BY CUSTOMER. THIS STEP MAY NOT BE NECESSARY FOR ROUTINE LIFTS. TOTAL WEIGHT eure Peete i ae ERR, SPREADER: ‘SLING OR TAIL LUG ae) per Pore ca ae 2. CALCULATE WEIGHT TO BE LIFTED. 3. APPLY IMPACT FACTOR, 1.5 MINIMUM, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 4, SELECT SHACKLE SIZE NO IMPACT FACTOR IS APPLIED UNLESS CUSTOMER ‘SPECIFIED. SHACKLE TABLES ARE AVAILABLE FROM ‘SHACKLE MANUFACTURERS. 8, DETERMINE LOADS THAT APPLY (SEE ABOVE FIGURES). Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 271SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE 6. SIZE LIFTING LU, THICKNESS OF LIFTING LUG IS CALCULATED BY USING THE GREATER OF SHEAR OR BENDING. RESULTS AS FOLLOWS: {| = REQUIRED THICKNESS OF LUG, inches (mm) ‘Sb = ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS OF LUG, psi (kPa) ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESS OF LUG, ps! (kPa) IDTH OF LUG. inches (mm) STANCE, CENTERLINE OF HOLE TO COMPONENT, inches (mm) p = DESIGN LOAD / LUG INCLUDING IMPACT FACTOR, Ib. (kN) = RADIUS OF LUG, inches (mm) 4 = DIAMETER OF HOLE, inches (mm) REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR SHEAR REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR SHEAR (METRIC) P ° dpe eee x 10° ,mm 28)" 62) 218K" a2) REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR BENDING REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR BENDING (METRIC) 6h 6h te oe inches t= Px 108 mm sbi)? Sp(L)? USE GREATER OF THICKNESS REQUIRED FOR BENDING OR SHEAR. NOTE: COMPONENT SHOULD BE CHECKED AND/OR REINFORCED FOR LOCALLY IMPOSED STRESSES. 272 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.3 WIND AND SEISMIC DESIGN For purposes of design, wind and seismic forces are assumed to be negligible unless the purchaser specifically details such forces in the inquiry When such requirements are specified by the purchaser, the designer should consider their effects on the various components of the heat exchanger. These forces should be evaluated in the design of the heat exchanger for the pressure containing components, the heat exchanger supports and the device used to attach the heat exchanger supports to the anchor points. Methods used for the design analysis are beyond the scope of these Standards; however, the designer can refer to the selected references listed below. References: (1) ASME Boller and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Il, "Nuclear Power Plant Components,” (2) "Earthquake Engineering’, R. L. Weigel, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1970. (@) "Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering’, Newark and Rosenbluth, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1971 (4) Stee! Construction Manual of the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 8th Edition. (6) TID-7024 (1963), "Nuclear Reactors and Earthquakes", U.S. Atomic Energy Commission Division of Technical Information. (6) "Earthquake Engineering for Nuclear Reactor Facilities (JAB-101)", Blume, Sharp and Kost, John ‘A. Blume and Associates, Engineers, San Francisco, California, 1971. (7) "Process Equipment Design’, Brownell and Young, Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1959. RGP-RCB-2 PLUGGING TUBES IN TUBE BUNDLES tn U-tube heat exchangers, and other exchangers of special design, I may not be possible r feasible to remove and replace detective tubes. Under certain conditions as indicated below, the manufacturer may plug either a maximum of 1% of the tubes or 2 tubes without prior agreement. Condition: (1) For Utube neat exchangers where the leaking tubets) s more than 2 tubes away from the periphery of the bundle, (2) For heat exchangers with limited access or manway openings in a welded-on channel where the tube is. located such that it would be impossible to remove the tube through the access opening in the channel (3) For other heat exchanger designs which do not facilitate the tube removal in a reasonable manner. (4) The method of tube plugging will be a matter of agreement between manufacturer and purchaser. (6) The manufacturer maintains the original guarantees. (6) ’As-buit drawings indicating the location of the plugged tube(s) shall be furnished to the purchaser. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 273SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE 274 RGP-RCB-4.62 SHELL OR BUNDLE ENTRANCE AND EXIT AREAS This paragraph provides methods for determining approximate shell and bundle entrance ateas for common configurations as illustrated by Figures RGP-RCB-4.6211, 4.6212, 4.6221, 4.6222, 4.6231 and 4.6241 Results are somewhat approximate due to the following considerations: 1) Non-uniform location of tubes at the periphery of the bundle. '2). The presence of untubed lanes through the bundle. (3) The presence of tie rods, spacers, and or bypass seal devices Full account for such concerns based on actual details will result in improved accuracy. Special consideration must be glven to other configurations. Some are listed below: 11) Nozzle located near the bends of U-tube bundles. (2) Nozzle which is attached in a semi or full tangential position to the shel. (3) Perforated distribution devices. (4) Impingement plates which are not flat or which are positioned with significant clearance off the bundle. (6) Annular distributor belts. RGP-RCB-4.621 AND 4.622 SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA The minimum shell entrance or exit area for Figures RGP-RCB-4.6211, 4.6212, 4.6221 and 4.6222 may be approximated as follows: Hy2\Pi- Dod A where Approximate shell entrance or exit area, inches 2 (mm 2), Nozzle inside diameter, inches (mm) = Average free height above tube bundle or impingement plate, inches (mm) h=0.5(h,+h2) for Figures RGP-RCB-4.6211, 4.6212 and 4.6222. h=0.5(D,-OTL) for Figure RGP-RCB-4.6221 ht = Maximum free height (at nozzle centerline), inches (mm) hia = Minimum free height (at nozzle edge). inches (mm) hy =h,-0.8(D,-(D, *D, 9°°) D,= Shell inside diameter, inches (mm) or. Outer tube limit diameter, inches (mr) F , = Factor indicating presence of impingement plate F = Owith impingement plate F = 1 without impingement plate ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 P., =Tube center to center pitch, inches (mm) D, =Tube outside diameter, inches (mm) F ; = Factor indicating tube pitch type and orientation with respect to fluid flow direction F2=1.0tor Be and De F , =0.866 for Be F 2 =0.707 tor “Oe RGP-RCB-4.623 AND 4.624 BUNDLE ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA The minimum bundle entrance or exit area for Figures RGP-RCB-4.6231 and 4.6241 may be approximated as follows: A,=B,(D,-OTL)+(B,K-A,) where A,™ Approximate bundle entrance or exit area, inches 2 (mm 2) B.,= Baffle spacing at entrance or exit, inches (mm) K = Effective chord distance across bundle, inches (mm) K = D, for Figure RGP-RCB-4.6231 Ay Area of impingement plate, inches 2 (mm 2) A,=0 for no impingement plate tp? a for round impingement plate 1? for square impingement plate = Impingement plate diameter or edge length, inches (mm) A, = Unrestricted longitudinal flow area, inches 2 (mm 2) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 275SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE ‘The formulae below assume unrestricted longitudinal low. 4, =0 for baffle cut normal to nozzle axis A, = 0.Sab for Figure RGP-RCB-4.6231 with baffle cut parallel with nozzle axis Ay= 0.5(D,~ OT L)e for Figure RGP-RCB-4.6241 with baffle cut parallel with nozzle axis a= Dimension from Figure RGP-RCB-4.6231, inches (mm) © = Dimension from Figure RGP-RCB-4.6231 c inches (mm) Dimension from Figure RGP-RCB-4.6241, inches (mm) RGP-RCB-4.625 ROD TYPE IMPINGEMENT PROTECTION Rod type impingement protection shall utilize a minimum of two rows of rods arranged such that maximum bundle entrance area is provided without permitting direct impingement on any tube. Shell entrance area may be approximated per Paragraph RGP-RCB-4.622, Figure RGP-RCB-4,6221. Bundle entrance area may be approximated per Paragraph RGP-RCB-4.624, Figure RGP-RCB-4.6241 276 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 FIGURES RGP-RCB-4,6211, 4.6212, 4.6221 AND 4.6222 ‘SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA FIGURE RGP-RCB- 4.211 IMPINGEMENT PLATE = FULL LAYOUT Dy ho hy (O,-OTL)/2 7m ' aT & ho hy poet to, —a ? 1 FIGURE RGP- RCB - 4.6212 IMPINGEMENT PLATE - PARTIAL LAYOUT Dn —l4 ho hy at (o-oTLy2 = — Qe , po Lr 0, ——+ PT FIGURE RGP-RCB-4.6221 FIGURE RGP-RCB- 4.6222 NO iMPINGEMENT PLATE - FULL LAYOUT NO IMPINGEMENT PLATE - PARTIAL LAYOUT D, o ho hy pea ty (Dg - OTL)72 50 00) (D,-OTL)/2 xg eg a <4 h. h (0,-oTLy/2 2% Fee ge aoe ait q (filh + Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 277SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE FIGURES RGP-RCB-4.6231 AND 4.6241 BUNDLE ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA FIGURE RGP —RCB-4.6231 PARTIAL LAYOUT— WITH OR WITHOUT IMPINGEMENT PLATE vIEw"A A" (0,-OTLY/2 FIGURE RGP—RCB ~ 4.6241. FULL LAYOUT — NO IMPINGEMENT PLATE On wow = =< (Os -onLy2 688888 Re, + = mb ———S 2, co ——— | c Et tio onve Le vIEw"B B" at (0,-onye (DzoTLy2 278 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-RCB-6 GASKETS RGP-RCB-6.1 TYPE OF GASKETS Gaskets made integral by welding are often harder in the welds than in the base material. Hardness limitations may be specified by the exchanger manufacturer. RGP-RCB-7 TUBESHEETS RGP-RCB-7.2 SHELL AND TUBE LONGITUDINAL STRESSES, FIXED TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS The design of fixed tubesheets in accordance with Paragraph RCB-7.16 is based, in part, upon the tube bundle providing elastic support to the tubesheets throughout the tubed area. Itis therefore important to insure that the tubes can provide sufficient staying action against tensile forces and sufficient stabllty against compressive forces. Paragraph RCB-7.2 provides rules to calculate the tube loads at the periphery of the bundle only. The tubes at the interior of the bundle are not considered, but can become loaded both in tension and compression. Tensile forces are generally nota problem tho requtemonts of Paragraph RCB-7-2 are met. Compressive forces might, however, create unstable conditions for tubes at the interior of the bundle. Typical conditions that can cause this are: Loading: ‘Tube side pressure and/or differential thermal expansion where the shell, if unrestrained, wouid lengthen more than the tubes. (Positive P «per Paragraph RCB-7.161) Geometry: Flexible tubesheet systems. Generally, those that are simply supported at the edge (& = 1 per Paragraph RCB-7.192) and have a value of F,(Paragaph RCB-7.161) greater than 2.5, Methods similar to those provided in the following references can be used to predict loadings on the tubes at the interior of the bundle: (1) Gardner, K.A,, "Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Design’, Trans. ASME, Vol. 70, 1948, pp. A-377-385, (2) Gardiner, K.A., "Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Design-2: Fixed Tubesheets", Trans. ASME, Vol.74, 1952, pp. A-159-166. {@) Miller, K.A.G,, "Design of Tube Plates in Heat Exchangers’, Proc. Inst. Mech. Eng., Ser. B, Vol. 1 1952, pp. 215-231 (4) Yu, Y.Y., "Rational Analysis of Heat-Exchanger Tube-Sheet Stresses", Trans. ASME, Vol. 78, 1956, pp. A-468-473, (6) Boon, G.B. and Walsh, R.A., "Fixed Tubesheet Heat Exchangers’, Trans. ASME, Vol. 86, Series E, 1964, pp. 175-180 (See also Gardner, K.A., discussion of above, Trans. ASME, Vol. 87, 1965, pp. 235-236). (©) Gardner, K,A., "Tubesheet Design: A Basis For Standardization’, Proceedings of the First International Conference on Pressure Vessel Technology: Part 1, Design and Analysis, pp. 621-648 and Part lll, Discussion, pp. 133-135, ASME, 1969 and 1970. (7) Chiang, C.C., "Close Form Design Solutions for Box Type Heat Exchangers", ASME 75-WA/DE-15. (@ Hayashi, K., “An Analysis Procedure for Fixed Tubesheet Exchangers’, Proceedings of the Third International Conference on Pressure Vessel Technology: Part 1, Analysis, Design and Inspection, pp. 363-373, ASME, 1977. (@) Malek, R.G., "A New Approach to Exchanger Tubesheet Design’, Hydrocarbon Processing, Jan. 197 (10) Singh, KP, "Analysis of Vertically Mounted Through Tube Heat Exchangers’, ASME 77-JPGC-NE-19, Trans. ASME, Journal of Engineering for Power, 1976. ‘The allowable tube stresses and loads presented in Paragraph RCB-7.2 are intended for use with an analysis considering only the peripheral tubes. These allowable stresses and loads can be modified if the tubes at the interior of the bundle are included in the analysis, Engineering judgement should be sed to determine that the bundle can adequately stay the tubesheets against tensile loadings and remain stable against compressive loadings. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 279SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-RCB-9 280 RGP-RCB-7.4 TUBE HOLES IN TUBESHEETS, RGP-RCB-7.43 TUBE HOLE FINISH Tube hole finish affects the mechanical strength and leak tightness of an expanded tube-to-tubeshest joint. In general: (1) A rough tube hole provides more mechanical strength than a smooth tube hole. This is influenced by complex relationship of modulus of elasticity, yield strength and hardness cof the materials being used. (2) A smooth tube hole does not provide the mechanical strength that a rough tube hole does, but it can provide a pressure tight joint at a lower level of wall reduction. (8) Very light wall tubes require a smoother tube hole finish than heavier wall tubes, (4) Significant longitudinal scratches can provide leak paths through an expanded tube-to-tubesheet joint and should therefore be removed. RGP-RCB-7.5 TUBE WALL REDUCTION The optimum tube wall reduction for an expanded tube-to-tubesheet joint depends on a number of factors. Some of these are: (1) Tube hole finish (2) Presence or absence of tube hole serrations (grooves) (3) Tube hole size and tolerance (4) Tubesheet ligament width and its relation to tube diameter and thickness (6) Tube wall thickness (©) Tube hardness and change in hardness during cold working (7) Tube O.D. tolerance (®) Type of expander used (9) Type of torque control or final tube thickness control (10) Function of tube joint, Le. strength in resistance to pulling out, minimum cold work for corrosion purposes, freedom from leaks, ease of replacement, etc. (11) Length of expanded joint (12) Compatibility of tube and tubesheet materials RGP-RCB-7.6 TESTING OF WELDED TUBE JOINTS. ‘Tube-to-tubesheet welds are to be tested using the manufacturer's standard method, Weld defects are to be repaired and tested. Any special testing such as with halogens, or helium, will be performed by agreement between manufacturer and purchaser. CHANNELS, COVERS, AND BONNETS RGP-RCB-9.21 FLAT CHANNEL COVER DEFLECTION ‘The recommended limit for channel cover deflection is intended to prevent excessive leakage between the cover and the pass partion plate, Many factors govern the choice of design deflection limits. Some of these factors are: number of tube side passes; tube side pressure drop: size of exchanger; elastic springback of gasket material; effect of interpass leakage on thermal performance; presence or absence of gasket retaining grooves; and leakage characteristics of the tube side fluid. ‘The method shown in Paragraph RCB-9.21 for calculating deflection does not consider: (1) The restraint offered by the portion of the cover outside the gasket load reaction diameter. (2) Additional restraint provided by some types of construction such as full face gasket controlled metal-to-metal contact, etc. (8) Cover bow due to thermal gradient across the cover thickness. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 The recommended cover deflection limits given in Paragraph RCB-9.21 may be modified if other calculation methods are used which accomodate the effect of reduced cover thickness on the exchanger performance. Reference: Singh, KP. and Solar, A.l., "Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components’, First Edition (1984), Chapter 12, Arcturus Publishers, Inc. RGP-RCB-10 NOZZLES RGP-RCB-10.6 NOZZLE LOADINGS For purposes of desig, nozzle loads are assumed to be negligible, unless the purchaser specially 10.6. details such loads in his inquiry as indicated in Figure RGP- FIGURE RGP-RCB-10.6 Since piping loads can impose forces and moments in three geometric planes, there is no one set of Values which can be provided as a maximum by the manufacturer. Each piping load should be evaluated as a combination of forces and moments as specified by the purchaser. ‘Nozzle reactions from piping are transmitted to the pressure containment wall of the heat exchanger, and could result in an over-stressed condition in this area. The effects of piping loads transmitted through main body flanges, supports and other components should also be considered. For calculation of the combined stresses developed in the wall of the vessel due to piping and pressure loads, references are listed below. Referencs (1) Welding Research Counc Bulletin No. 107, “Local Stresses in Spherical and Cylindrical Shells Due to External Loading’, K. R. Wickman, AG. Hopper and J.L. Mershon. (2) Stresses From Radial Loads and External Moments in Cylindrical Pressure Vessels", PP. Billaard, The Welding Journal Research Supplement (1954-1955) (3) "Local Stresses in Cylindrical Shells", Fred Forman, Pressure Vessel Handbook Publishing, Inc. (4) Pressure Vessel and Piping Design Collected Papers, (1927-1959), The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, “Bending Moments and Leakage at Flanged Joints’, Robert G. Blick. (6) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Il, "Nuclear Power Plant Components". (©) Welding Research Council Bulletin No. 198, "Secondary Stress Indices for Integral Structural ‘Attachments to Straight Pipe", W.G. Dodge. (7) Welding Research Council Bulletin No. 297, "Local Stresses in Cylindrical Shells Due To External Loadings.on Nozzles - Supplement to WAC Bulltn 107", JL. Mershon, K Mokhiavan, GV. Ranjan and E.C, Rodabaugh. RGP-RCB-11 END FLANGES AND BOLTING RGP-RCB-11.5 LARGE DIAMETER LOW PRESSURE FLANGES When designing a large diameter, low pressure flange, numerous considerations as described in Appendix S of the Code should be reviewed in order to reduce the amount of flange rotation. ‘Another point of consideration is the fact that this type of flange usually has a large actual bolt area Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 281SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE compared to the minimum required area; the extra bolt area combined with the potential bolt stress Can overload the flange such that excessive deflection and permanent set are produced. Methods are available to determine the intial bolt stress required in order to achieve a leak-free bolted joint. Once the required bolt stress is known, flange rotation and stress can then be calculated and, if necessary, the designer can take further action to reduce rotation and/or stresses. RGP-RCB-11.6 BOLTING-ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE ‘The following references may be used for assembly and maintenance of bolted flanged joints. See Paragraphs E-3.24 and E-3.25. References: (1) Torque Manual. Sturtevant-Richmont Division of Ryeson Corp. (2) Crane Engineering Data, VC-1900B, Crane Company. RGP-RCB-11.7 PASS PARTITION RIB AREA Gasket pass partition rib area contributes to the required bolt load, therefore, its effects should be considered in the design of flanges, One acceptable method to include rib area is shown below. Other methods are acceptable. ¥ “= ¥ value of pass partition rib(s)* m= mfactor of pass parition ris)" pase partition b, = Effective seating ‘width of pass partition rib(s)* r= Total length of pass partition rib(s)* Wand WY n2= As defined in ASME Code Section Vill, Division 1 Appendix 2 ‘and modified below. Seating width of Wat ORGY +O, 7.Y Partition Rib (N) 2P[buGm+b,rym‘] H= (6)°(P)(0.7854) Wt H+H, *Note: (1) mand Y values for peripheral portion of gasket may be used if greater than m“& (2) mand Y values are listed in ASME Code Section Vill Div. 1, Appendix 2 Table 2-5.1 or as, specified by gasket manufacturer. 282 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-T-2 FOULING RGP-T-2.1 TYPES OF FOULING Currently five different types of fouling mechanisms are recognized. They are individually complex, often occurring simultaneously, and their effects may increase pressure drop, accelerate corrosion and decrease the overall heat transfer coefficient. (1) Precipitation Fouling Crystlzation is one of the most common types of preciptation fouling, opcurs in many process streams, cooling water and chemical streams. Crystallization scale forms as the result of over-saturation of a relatively insoluble salt. The most common, calcium carbonate, forms on heat transfer surfaces as a result of the thermal decomposition of the bicarbonate ion and the ‘subsequent reaction with calcium ions. (2) Particulate Fouling Sedimentation is the most common form of particulate fouling. Particles of clay, sand, silt, rust, etc. are initially suspended in the fluid and form deposits on the heat transfer surfaces, Sedimentation is frequently superimposed on crystallization and possibly acts as a catalyst for Certain types of chemical reaction fouling, (@) Chemical Reaction Fouling ‘Surface temperatures and the presence of oxidation promoters are known to significantly influence the rate of build up of this fouling type. Coking, the hard crust deposit of hydrocarbons formed on high temperature surfaces, is a common form of this type of fouling, (4) Corrosion Fouling Iron oxide, the most common form of corrosion product, is the result of an electro-chemical reaction and forms as a scale on iron-containing, exposed surfaces of the heat exchanger. This scale produces an added thermal resistance to the base metal of the heat transfer surface (6) Biological Fouling Organic material growth develops on heat transfer surfaces in contact with untreated water such 23 Sea, river, or lake water. In most cases, it will be combined or superimposed on other types (of fouling such as crystallization and sedimentation. Biological growth such as algae, fungi, slime, and corrosive bacteria represent a potentially detrimental form of fouling. Often these micro-organisms provide a sticky holding medium for other types of fouling which would otherwise not adhere to clean surfaces. RGP-T-2.2 EFFECT OF FOULING ‘There are different approaches to provide an allowance for anticipated fouling in the design of shell, and tube heat exchangers. The net result is to provide added heat transfer surface area. This {generally means that the exchanger is oversized for clean operation and barely adequate for Conditions just before it should be cleaned. Although many heat exchangers operate for years. without cleaning, it is more common thet they must be cleaned periodically. Values of the fouling resistances to be specified are intended to reflect the values at the point in time just before the exchanger is to be cleaned. The major uncertainty is the assignment of realistic values of the fouling resistances. Further, these thermal resistances only address part of the impact of fouling as there is an increase in the hydraulic resistance as well; however, this Is most often ignored. Fouling is ‘complex, dynamic, and in time, degrades the performarice of a heat exchanger. ‘The use of thermal resistance permits the assignment of the majority of the fouling to the side where fouling predominates. It also permits examination of the relative thermal resistance introduced by the different terms in the overall heat transfer coefficient equation. These can signal, to the designer, where there are potential design changes to reduce the effect of fouling, It also permits the determination of the amount of heat transfer surface area that has been assigned for fouling. Higher fouling resistances are sometimes inappropriately specified to provide safety factors to account for uncertainties in the heat transfer calculation, the actual operating conditions, and/or possible part expansion. These uncertainties may well exist and should be reflected in the design, but they should not be masked in the fouling resistances. They should be clearly identified as appropriate factors in the design calculations. ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 283SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE ‘Another inappropriate approach to heat exchanger design is to arbitrarily increase the heat transfer surface area to allow for fouling. This over-surfacing avoids the use of the appropriate fouling resistances. In effect, the fouling for the exchanger is combined and no longer can be identified as belonging to one side or the other. In order to examine the effect of fouling on the pressure drop, supply the anticipated thicknesses of each of the fouling layers. RGP-T-2.31 PHYSICAL CONSIDERATIONS ‘A) Properties Of Fluids And Usual Propensity For Fouling ‘The most important consideration is the fluid and the conditions when it produces fouling ‘Attimes, a process modification can resut in conditions that are less lily to cause fouling. 8) Surface And Bulk Temperatures For many kinds of fouling, as the temperatures increase, the amount of fouling increases. Lower temperatures produce slower fouling build-up and deposits that often are easier to remove. C) Local Velocities Normally, keeping the velocities high reduces the tendency to foul. Velocities on the tube side are limited by erosion, and on the shell side by flow-induced vibration. Stagnant and recirculation regions on the shell side lead to heavy fouling, D) Tube Material, Configuration And Surface Finish ‘The selection of tube material is significant when it comes to corrosion. Some kinds of biological fouling can be lessened by copper-beating tube materials. There can be differences between finned and plain tubing. Surface finish has been shown to influence the rate of fouling and the ease of cleaning. E) Heat Exchanger Geometry And Orientation The geometry of a particular heat exchanger can influence the uniformity of the flows on the tube side and the shell side. The ease of cleaning can be greatly influenced by the orientation of the heat exchanger. F) Heat Transfer Process The fouling resistances for the same fluid can be considerably different depending upon whether heat is being transferred through sensible heating or cooling, boiling, or condensing, ) Fluid Purity And Freedom From Contamination Most fluids are prone to have inherent impurities that can deposit out as a fouling layer, or act as catalysts to the fouling processes. It is often economically attractive to eliminate the fouling constituents by fiters. H) Fluid Treatment To Prevent Corrosion And Biological Growth Fluid treatment is commonly carried out to prevent corrosion and/or biological growth. If these treatments are neglected, rapid fouling can occur. |) Fluid Treatment To Reduce Fouling There are addtves that can disperse the fouling material soit does not deposi. Adltives may also alter the structure of the fouling layers that deposit so that they are easily removed. The use of these treatments is a product quality and economic decision. is necessary for the purchaser to J) Cathodic Protection One of the effective ways to reduce the possibilty of corrosion and corrosion fouling is to provide cathodic protection in the design: 284 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 K) Planned Cleaning Method And Desired Frequency Itis important that the cleaning method be planned at the design stage of the heat exchanger. Considerations in design involving cleaning are whether it will be done online, offline, bundle removed or in place, whether it will involve corrosive fluids, ete. ‘Access, clearances, valving, and piping also must be considered to permit ease of cleaning. The cleaning method may require special safety requirements, which should be incorporated in the design. L) Place The More Fouling Fluid On The Tube Side ‘There are two benefits from placing the more fouling fluid on the tube side. There is less danger of low velocity or stagnant flow regions on the tube side, and, itis generally easier to clean the tube side than the shell side. itis often possible to clean the tube side with the exchanger in place while it may be necessary to remove the bundle to clean the shell side. RGP-T-2.32 ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS. Planned fouling prevention, maintenance and cleaning make possible lower allowances for fouling, but do involve a commitment to ongoing costs. The amount and frequency of cleaning varies considerably with user and operation. The most significant parameters involved in deciding upon the amount of fouling allowance that should be provided are the operational and economic factors that change with time. New fluid treatments, changing first costs and operating costs, different cleaning procedures and the degree of payback for longer periods of being on stream should be some of the items ‘evaluated in determining an appropriate fouling resistance. Failure to include the economic ‘considerations may lead to unnecessary monetary penalties for fouling. ‘Companies concerned about fouling continually monitor the performance of their heat exchangers to establish fouling experience and develop their own guidelines for determining the appropriate fouling resistance to specify when purchasing new equipment. Almost every source of cooling water needs to be treated before itis used for heat exchanger service. The treatment ranges from simple biocide addltion to control biological fouling, to ‘substantial treatment of brackish water to render it suitable for use. The amount of treatment may be uneconomical and substitute sources of cooling must be sought. With today's technology, the quality of water can be improved to the point that fouling should be under control as long as flow velocities are maintained and surface temperatures controlled. RGP.T-2.4 DESIGN FOULING RESISTANCES (HR FT2°F/Btu) The purchaser should attempt to select an optimal fouling resistance that will result in a minimum ‘sum of fixed, shutdown and cleaning costs. The following tabulated values of fouling resistances allow for oversizing the heat exchanger so that it wll meet performance requirements with reasonable intervals between shutdowns and cleaning. These values do not recognize the time related behavior of fouling with regard to specific design and operational characteristics of particular heat exchangers. ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 285SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE Fouling Resistances For Industrial Fluids Oils: Fuel Oi #2 0.002 Fuel 01 #6. (0.005 Transformer Oi 0.001 Engine Lube Oil (0.001 ‘Quench Oi (0.004 Gases And Vapors: Manufactured Gas (0.010, Engine Exhaust Gas (0.010, ‘Steam (Non-Oil Bearing) (0.0005 Exhaust Steam (Oil Bearing) (0.0015-0.002 Refrigerant Vapors (Oli Bearing) (0.002, ‘Compressed Ait (0.001 ‘Ammonia Vapor [0.001 CO 2 Vapor 0.001 Chlorine Vapor 0.002 Coal Fiue Gas 0.010 Natural Gas Flue Gas (0.005 Liquids: Molten Heat Transfer Salts (0.0005 Refrigerant Liquids (0.001 Hydraulic Fluid (0.001 Industrial Organic Heat Transfer Media 0.002 ‘Ammonia Liquid 0.001 ‘Ammonia Liquid (Oil Bearing) 0.008 Calcium Chioride Solutions (0.008 ‘Sodium Chioride Solutions (0.003 CO 2 Liquid 0.001 Chlorine Liquid (0.002, Methanol Solutions: (0.002. Ethanol Solutions, (0.002, Ethylene Glycol Solutions 0.002 286 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE Fouling Resistances For Chemical Processing Streams. SECTION 10 ‘Gases And Vapors: Acid Gases (0.002-0.003 ‘Solvent Vapors 0.001 ‘Stable Overhead Products: (0.001 Liquids: MEA And DEA Solutions (0.002 DEG And TEG Solutions (0.002 ‘Stable Side Draw And Bottom Product (0.001-0.002 Caustic Solutions 0.002 Vegetable Oils 0.003 Fouling Resistances For Natural Gas-Gasoline Processing Streams Gases And Vapors: Natural Gas (0.001-0.002 ‘Overhead Products (0.001-0.002 Liquids: Lean Oil (0.002 Rich Olt (0.001-0.002 ‘Natural Gasoline And Liquified Petroleum Gases (0.001-0.002 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 287SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE Fouling Resistances For Oil Refinery Streams ‘Crude And Vacuum Unit Gases And Vapors: ‘Atmospheric Tower Overhead Vapors (0.001 Light Naphthas 0.001 Vacuum Overhead Vapors 0.002 ‘Crude And Vacuum Liquids: ‘Crude Oil 010 250°F 250 to 350° F VELOCITY FT/SEC VELOCITY FT/SEC <2 24 24 <2 24 24 DRY 0.003 0.002, (0.002 0.008 0.002, 0.002 SALT* | 0.003 (0.002, (0.002 (0.005 0.004 (0.004 350 to 450° F 450° F and over VELOCITY FT/SEC VELOCITY FT/SEC <2 24 24 <2 24 >4 DRY 0.004 0.003 0.008 (0.005 0.004 (0.004 saLT* | 0.006 (0.005 0.005 0.007 0.006 0.006 *Assumes desalting @ approx. 250° F Gasoline 0.002) Naphtha And Light Distilates (0.002-0.008 Kerosene (0.002-0.008 Light Gas Oi (0.002-0.003 Heavy Gas Ol (0.003-0.005 Heavy Fuel Oils, 0.005-0.007 ‘Asphalt And Residuum: ‘Vacuum Tower Bottoms 0.010) ‘Atmosphere Tower Bottoms (0.007 Cracking And Coking Unit Streams: (Overhead Vapors (0.002 Light Cycle (0.002-0.003 Heavy Cycle Oil (0.003-0.004 Light Coker Gas Oil [0.003-0.004 Heavy Coker Gas Oil (0.004-0.005 Bottoms Slurry Oil (4.5 Ft/Sec Minimum) 0.003 Light Liquid Products 0.002, 288 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 Fouling Resistances For Oil Refinery Streams- continued Catalytic Reforming, Hydrocracking And Hydrodesulfurization Streams: Reformer Charge 0.0015, Reformer Effluent 0.0015 Hydrocracker Charge And Effluent™ (0.002 Recycle Gas. (0.001 Hydrodesulfurization Charge And Effluent™ (0.002 Overhead Vapors 0.00% Liquid Product Over 50° APL 0.001 Liquid Product 90 - 50° A.P.I 0.002 “Depending on charge, characteristics and storage history, charge resistance may be many times this value. Light Ends Processing Streams: (Overhead Vapors And Gases 0.001 Liquid Products 0.001 ‘Absorption Oils, (0.002-0.003 Alkylation Trace Acid Streams (0.002 Reboiler Streams (0.002-0.003, Lube Oil Processing Streams: Feed Stock 0.002, Solvent Feed Mix 0.002, Solvent (0.001 Extract® (0.003) Raffinate [0.001 ‘Asphalt 0.005, Wax Slurries* 0.003) Refined Lube Oil (0.001 Precautions must be taken to prevent wax deposition on cold tube walls. Visbreaker: Overhead Vapor (0.003 Visbreaker Bottoms 0.010 Naphtha Hydrotreater: Feed 0.003 Effluent 0.002 Naphthas (0.002 (Overhead Vapors (0.0015 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 289SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE Fouling Resistances for Oil Refinery Streams - continued Catalytic Hydro Desulturizer: Charge 0.004-0.005 Effluent 0.002 HT. Sep. Overhead 0.002 Stripper Charge 0.003, Liquid Products (0.002 HE Alky Unit: Alkyiate, Deprop. Bottoms, Main Fract. Overhead Main Fract. Feed 0.003 Al Other Process Streams 0.002 Fouling Resistances For Water FgapscegiGm Up To 240° F 240 to 400° F ‘Temperature Of Water 125°F Over 125° F Water Velocity Fi/See | Water Velocity Ft/Sec Sand Less [Over3 [3 and Less [Over 3 ‘Sea Water 0.0005 [00005 [oon [0.001 Brackish Water ‘0002 fooor _|o.oca [0.002 Cooling Tower And Artificial Spray Pond: Treated Make Up 001 [oor _[oooa [0.002 Untreated o.003 [000s [0.005 [0.004 Gity Or Well Water coor [oor _[o.o2 [0.002 River Water: Minimum 0002 [oor [o00s [0.02 ‘Average 0.008 [0.002 [0.004 [0.003 Muddy Or Silty 0.003 [0002 [0.004 [0.008 Hard (Over 15Grains/Gal) | 0.003 [0.003 [0.005 [0.005 Engine Jacket 001 _fooor [0.001 | 0.001 Distiled Or Closed Cycle (Condensate 0.0005 [0.0005 [0.0005 [0.0005 Treated Boller Feedwater ‘0.001 [0.0005 [0.001 [0.001 Boller Blowdown 0.002 _fooc2 [0.02 [0.002 Ifthe heating medium temperature is over 400 ° F and the cooling medium is known to scale, these ratings should be modified accordingly. 290 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationA Acoustle Resonance or Coupling Al Tost, Allowable Working Pressure of Tubes. ‘Aly, TEMA Definition Alloy Clad Tubeshsts Alloy Shelis, Minimurn Thcknoss ‘Anodes ‘ares, Bundle Entrance and Exit Segments of Circles ASNE Code Data Reports B B Class Heat Exchanger, Detintion. Biscing Devices Baffles and Support Piatos, Cross, Clearances: Cross, Minimum Thickness cute Hoes Impingement. Longitudinal Spacing Special Cases ‘Special Precautions Type Boked Joints Boing, Dimensional Data, End Flanges. Foundation Internal Floating Hesd Pase Rib Area, Size and Spacing Tightening, Type Bundle Cleaning Bundle Entrance and Ext Area urale Hold Down, By-Pass Valves c C.Ciass Hest Exchanger, Detnion Gest on, Service Limitation Ctanne! Covers ‘Channel Cover Formula ‘Channel Cover Grooves ‘Channel Pass Parions ‘Ctannels, Minimum Thickness ‘Channels, Type Designation & Size Numbering ‘Gucular Rings and Dises, ‘Weights of ‘Cecular Segments, Areas of Cleaning Heat Exchanger, Cleanliness, Ingpoction CCaanliness Provisions Clearance, Cross Bales & Suppart Plates. CCharancs, Wrench & Nut Code Data Reports CCampressibilty Charts, Generalized Gas. Compressibity, Gas. 95, 274-278 248 44 23 38, 30 3132 32,33 3 31122 38 33 35,34 34 31 18 188, 189 ‘8, 281, 282 17 38, 38 282 18 Bi 22 35 36,37 18 23 25 5, 280, 281 0 90 38,69 88 42 pap-pa7 248 6.21, 22 15,19 17 32 188, 189 14 156, 187, 158 160 Connections, Preeeure Gage. Protection Stacked Units Thermometer Vent and Drain Consequential Damages Construction Codes Conversion Factors Correction Factors for Mean Temperature Difference. Correction Factars fer Boling Moment Corrosion and Vibration Corrosion Allowance, ‘Couintrfiow Exchangers Covers, ‘Channel Floating Head Shell Ccteal Properties Cross Bates D Damages, Consequential Data Reports. Detective Pars, Detintions Density, ‘Gates Lguis. Desig Goncitions Design Pressures Design Temperatures. Diameters, Baio and Suppor Plate, Tube Holos Tubeshoet Holes Dimensions, ‘Boting Fittings, Welding. Flanges, ASME. Pips, Welded and Seamioss Tubing, Dirt Removal Disassemby fr Inepection Dismanting Clearance Double Tubesheots. Drain Connections Draining Exchangers Drawings. Drift Tolerance, Tube Hole Or Elastcty, Modulus of End Flanges. Enance & Exit Areas, Tube Bundles. Exchangoes (See Heat Exchanger) Expansion Joints, Shel Expansion, Mean Cooffcients of Thermal Expanded Tube Joints. INDEX ot 7 e192 st 6.01 14 2B 469, 175, 248, 250, 2425 ‘a7, 147 88, 280, 281 ‘38,30, 40 3 82, 182 31-38 1“ 14 40 150, 156, 157, 158 160, 154, 155, 38 a 24 3 Wa7 120, 189 185, 586, 187 184 ‘380, 291 7 236, 237 135,98, 84, 281, 282 36, 274-278 62 238, 239 22, 72, 73, 280 Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 291INDEX F Fabrication Inepoction 13 Fabrication Tolerances. 6s Faoites for Cleaning Heat Exchangers. 21, 22 Finish, Tube Holes. 70, 280 Fitings, Dimensions of Welding, 185 Fixed Tubesheets 46, 53, 62-70 Flanges, end 25,99, 94, 281, 282 ASME Standaré 186, 187 Bott Clearances 188, 183 Spit Type. 2 Pressure-Temperature Rating 190-229 Protection, 15 Flexible Shell Elements 7-08 Floating Heads, 38 Backing Devices 36,39 Packed, 40, 41, 42 Internal 38, 38, 40, Nomenclature 3 Outside Packed 40,41, 42 Poked Lantern Ring 42 Tube Bundle Supports 40 Floating Tubesheet 21, 83, 55 Fuld Density 480, 154, 168 Flu Temperature Relations 126, 127 Fealing ‘Economics of 426, 285 Effect of "126, 283, 284 Indeation ot 19 Fouling Resistance, ‘Chemical Processing Steams 287 Indusval Fiuids 206 Natural Gas-Gascline Processing Streams. 287 Oil Refinery Streams ‘208, 269, 260 Wate. 280 Foundation Bolts 7 Feundations. 7 G Gages, Standard Diameters. 27 Gaskets (Peripheral & Pass Parton) 43 Mater! 43 Replacement 22 Jot Details 43, 44 General Construction Features 15.58 Generalized Compeessioilty Charts, 186, 157, 158, Grooved Channel Covers 0 Grooved Tube Holes m1 Grooved Tubeshests 74 Guaantoos 14.15 H Hanaing Tube Bundes 21 Hardness Conversion Table, 232 Heal Content Petroleum Fractions 361,167 Heat Exchanger Arrangement Diagrams, 25 Parts and Nomenclature 34,8 Standard Dimension Tolerance 60 Heat Transtor 124 Haat Treatment, U-Tubes 28 Hotes, 70 Battles and Support Plates 31, 122 Diameter and Tolerance, Tube 70,71 Finish, Tube, 70, 280 Grooving 7 Hydrostatic Test Pressure 2s Impingement Bates, ‘Bundle Entrance and Exit Areas. as Protection Requirements 3% Shell and Tubs Side. 5 Inspection, Cleaniness. i619 Inspection, Fabrication 13 instalation of Heat Exchangers 718 Internal Floating Heads "98,391 40 J Jacketed Gaskets “a ‘Joints, Bolted 19 Packed, Service Limitations 40, 41, a2 K Kettle Type Rebolir, Typical Ilustration 25 L Latent Heats of Various Liquids 168 Leaks, Looating 20,21 LCoveling Heat Exchangars 7 iting Devices 16, 268-272 Ligaments, Tubsshests Minimum 70, 72,73 Lead Concentration Factor, Flanges 3 Longitudinal Battles 3 uM Maintenance of Heat Exchangers s922 Material Warranties, 14 ‘Mateials-Detinion of Terms 2 ‘Mean Coatficlents of Thermal Expansion 288, 239, Maan Notal Temperature 24 128, 129, 130 Mean Temperature Ditference 126,127, 133 (S00 also MTD) Metal Resistance, Finned & Bare Tubing. 128 Metal Temperature Limitations. 28 Minimum Inside Depth Channels & Bonnets a8 ‘Minimum Inside Deptn Floating Heads 3 Modulus of Elasticity. MTD Correction Factors 292 Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationN Name Plates Nétwal Frequencios, Tubes Nemanclature of Heat Exchanger Components Nemenciature. Neatles, ‘Connootions Foating Head loadings Spit Fiangas Number and Size of Tie Rode ° (Operation of Heat Exchangers (Operating Procedures (Olthide Packed Flosting Head P Packed Floating Heads Packing Boxes Packing Material Pars, Replacement. Pate Peition Grooves. Pats Patton Plates Past Patton Rib Area Pacormance Failures. Prlormance Guarantaes Prodi inspection Physical Properties of Fluids Poe Dimensions of Welded and Seamless. Shels Pipe Tap Connections Pipng Loads ite, Tubes. Plate, Shell. Piugging Tubes in Tube Bunates Posted Heat Treatment, Floating Head Covers. Channels and Bonnets ropartion of Heat Exchanger for Shipment. Pressure Gage Connection Pressure Lose. Presure-Temperature Ratings for Valves, Fitings, ‘and Flanges Pressure, Tube Working Praseton, Impingement. Shipment using Mechanisms Pusatng Fiuds R F lass Heat Exchanger, Dstinion Raings, Valves, Fitings, and Flanges (Soe Pressure-Temperature Ratings) baler, Kettle Type, tlustation Risommended Good Practice, RGP Section Replacement Parts Removing Tube Bundles. Fing Flanges, Spit Fings, Weighs of 18 45 ot 40 92,281 35,36 426 190-209 232-235 36 6 21,74 18, 89 23 5 262 15 2 92 2a2e7 INDEX s Satety Relot Devices 8 Sealing Devices. 36 ‘Seamless Pipe, Dimensions of 188 Segments, Circular 288 ‘Seismic Design 16, 253-288 Shell Covers, Minimum Thickness. 3t Shells, Diameters 30 ‘Mustratlons 2s Longitucinal Stas 7.68 Iwinimum Thickness, 30 Size Numbering & Type Designation 42 Tolerances 20 ‘Shipment, Preparation of Units 15 ‘Shop Operation. 13 Shutting Down Operation 18 ‘Size Numbering of Heat Exchangers. 1 Spacers and Tie Rods 36.36 ‘Spare Parts 15.22, 44 ‘Specific Gravity, 150 Hygrocarban Liquids 54,155 Specific Heat, 150, 151 “Gasee, Miscellanoous, Atmospheric Pressure. 165 ‘Gases at High Pressure 160, 181, 166 Hydrocerbon Gases, ‘Almospheris Pressure, 150, 161, 162, 168 Liquids, Miscellaneous 450, 164 Petroloum Fractions, Liquid 150, 159 Patroloum Fractions, Vapor. 160, 160 Specitication Sheet, Exchanger 11,12 Split Type Nozzle Fiangos, se Stacked Units. see Starting Operation. 18 ‘Stress Reloving (Ses Postweld Heat Treatment) ‘Support Plates, Holes 3t Spacing 38,34, 121 Thickness 92, 33 Supports 6,7, 18.16, 255-268 T Temperature Limitations, Meta 24 Multipass Flow. sr Shocks 40 ‘Temperature Eficincy, 27, 128 (Counterfiow Exchangers 147 1 Shell Pass. 148 2Shell Passes 149 Test Connections 38 Tost, Pneumatic of Liquid 23124 ‘Test, Standard 23, 24 Test Ring. 2 ‘Thermal Condustviy.. 240, 241 ‘Conversion Factors 168, 249, 250 ‘Gases and Vapors, Miscellaneous 472 Liquids, Miscellaneous amt Liquid Petroloum Fractions 470 Metals ‘240, 241 Pressure Correction 175, 174 Pure Hydrocarbon Liquids 170 ‘Thermal Expansion, Mean Cootfiients of, Metals... 238, 288 Thermal Performance Test. 14 Thermal Resistance of Uniform Deposits (See Fouling) ‘Thermal Relations. 128 ‘Thermometer Connections ot Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 293INDEX Thickness, Minimum, Battles ‘Channele and Sonnets Channel Covers. Shals and Shell Covers Tubes Tubesheets ‘Te Rods and Spacers, Number and Size. ‘Tolerances, “Tube Holes in Tuboshests “Tbe Holes in Batts Heat Exchangers and Parts Shall and Shell Covers Tueshest Dring Tube Bundles, ‘leaning Handling Plugging Tubes. Removal Suppor Vibration Tube Expanding Tuba Joints Expanded, Loads Testing, Welded. Welded. Tube Support Pate Dring (See Also Suppert Plates) ‘Tube Wall Metal Resistance Tube Working Pressure, Internal Tubes, ‘Characteristics. ‘Compressive Stese Diameters and Gages Expanding, Finns Leaks. Length Longitudinal Stress ‘Maximum Recommended Gages ‘Natural Frequencies Pattern, Pitch Plugging in Tube Bundles: Prajection Special Precautions Tue Wall Reduction U-Tubes: Unsupported Length, Maximum, Werking Pressure, Internal Tubesheets, ‘Applicaton instructions & Limitations Appliod Facings Clad & Faced Tubeshests Divided Floating Heads Double Tubesheets Effective Tubesheet Thichnass. Fixed Tubeshects Fixed Tubechests of Differing Thickness Formulae, Benaing 32,33 38 ‘80,280,281 30,31 27.28 48 38, 36 70,74 31 oo 20 70.71 18,21,22 21 23,273 21 40 14, 95-123 22 22,72, 73, 260, 63, 70 280 74 at 125 288, 236, 235 200, 281 9 27 2 a 20,21 ar 67,68 27, 72,73 7 28,29 23 273 73 67 260 28,96, 104 23, 34 288, 284, 285 45 45 48 45 48 56-62 4s 46, 83, 62-70, 66, 67 46-49 Effective Design Pressures-Floating Head (Type P)... 5 Effective Dilrential Design Pressure Effective Shall Side Design Pressure. Effective Tube Side Design Pressure. Equivalent Boling Pressure, 55,68 64, 65 6 a 64 Tubesheate, Formulae, (continued) Equivalent Diferential Expansion Pressure 62, 68 Flanged Extension 53, 54 ‘Shea 50, 51,52 Shall Longitudinal Stross 67, 68, 279 ‘Tube Allowable Compressive Stress. 6 Tubs Longitudinal Stross 8, 69, 279, Tubeto-Tubsshest Joint Loads 69,70 Intogrally Clad 48 Minimum Thicknaes. a Packed Floating Tubesheot Typo Exchangers 40, 41, 42 Shall and Tube Longitudinal Stresses (67, 68, 69 Special Cases. 70 ‘Tide Holes in Tuboshosts 70,71 ‘Tube Joints-Expanced & Welded 22.74, 200 ‘Tubesheet Pass Partition Grooves 7 ‘Tubasheot Puling Eyes %% ‘Type Designation of Heat Exchangors 2 u Unsupported Tube Length, Maximum, 33, 34 Tubes, 2 oer Support 34 Hest Treatment 8 Users Note vil v Vent & Drain Connections 18, 56,91 Vibration, 44, 84,85, 96-129 ‘Acousils Resonance or Coupling 95, 116 Mechanieme Causing % Dosigns & Considerations. jan 12 Selected References: 122.123 Tube Excitation 97, 38, 88 ‘Tube Natural Frequencies, 97, 98, 98 ‘Turbulent Butfeing 416,117 Vortex Shedding 116 Visceslty 151 ‘Conversion Factors 181, 175, 249, 250, Gases & Vapors, Atmospheric Pressure et Gases & Vapors, High Pressure $6, 182 Hygrocarbons & Petroleum Fractions. 176-179 Lguids, Miscellaneous 180 w Wall Resistance, Finned & Bare Tubes. 125 Waler Fouling Resistances 280 Weights of Circular Rings & Discs 2aa.oe7 Weights of Tubing, 230, 231 Welded and Seamless Pipe, Dimensions ot ea Wlded Tubs Joints 74,280 294 Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association